MEV2000 en

MEV2000 Series General Purpose
AC Variable Speed Drive
User Manual
Issue: 1
Date of Publication: 2014-11
Data Code: 0478-0262-01
MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive
User Manual
Document Version V1.0

Archive date 2014-11
BOMCode 0478-0262-01
Control Techniques Ltd.

All rights reserved. The contents are subject to change without any prior
notice.
Website: www.emerson-ct.cn
Customer service hotline: 400-887-9230

Table of Contents
Preface...................................................................................... 1 3.7.6 Variations in the EMC wiring .......................30
Precautions for unpacking inspection ............................. 1 Chapter IV Instructions on Inverter Running and Operating ...32
Inverter model description .............................................. 1 4.1 Explanatory descriptions .............................32
Chapter I Safety information .................................................... 2 4.1.1 Inverter running command channel ............32
1.1 Definition of Safety ....................................... 2 4.1.2 Inverter frequency reference channel .........32
1.2 Installation precaution .................................. 2 4.1.3 Inverter operating status .............................32
1.3 Operation Precautions .................................. 2 4.2 Detailed operating instructions ...................32
1.3.1 About the motor and mechanical load ......... 2 4.2.1 Operation panel use ....................................32
1.3.2 About the inverter ........................................ 3 4.2.2 Button function description ........................33
1.4 Precautions for discarding the inverter ........ 3 4.2.3 LED nixie tube and indicator description .....33
4.2.4 Operation panel display status ....................33
Chapter II Product Introduction................................................ 4
4.2.5 Operation methods of the operation panel 34
2.1 Specifications ................................................ 4
4.3 Initial powering-on ......................................35
2.2 Product series introduction .......................... 5
4.3.1 Inspection before powering-on ...................35
2.2.1 Rated value of inverter ................................. 5
4.3.2 Initial power-on operation ..........................35
2.2.2 Inverter control mode ................................... 6
2.2.3 Name of each part of the inverter ................ 7 Chapter V Parameter Introductions ........................................36
2.3 Optional parts ............................................... 8 5.1 Basic Parameters (Group F0) .......................36
2.3.1 Component of optional parts ........................ 8 5.2 Starting and Braking Parameters(F2 Group) 40
2.3.2 Option card type ........................................... 9 5.3 Auxiliary Operating Parameters(F3 Group) .42
2.4 Inverter accessories ...................................... 9 5.4 Vector Control Parameters (Group F4) ........44
5.5 PID Control Parameters(Group F5) ..............47
Chapter III Installation and Wiring .......................................... 10
5.6 Traverse Operating and BC Brake
3.1 Installation environment ............................ 10
Parameters (Group F6) ..................................................52
3.2 Removal and installation of inverter
5.7 Terminal Function(Group F7) ......................57
components .................................................................. 11
5.8 Display (Group F8) .......................................66
3.2.1 Removal of terminal cover .......................... 11
5.9 Enhanced Parameter (Group F9) .................70
3.2.2 Removal of finger-type panel and DC terminal
5.10 Option Module Parameter Setting
cover 11
(Group FA) ....................................................................74
3.2.3 Installation and removal of option card ...... 12
5.11 Motor 2 parameters(Group FC) ...................74
3.2.4 Installation and removal of external RS485
5.12 Simple PLC Parameters(Group FE) ...............76
adapter 13
5.13 Communication Parameters (Group FF) ......78
3.3 Installation methods of inverter ................. 14
5.14 Motor parameters (Group FH) ....................80
3.3.1 Wall-mounted installation .......................... 14
5.15 Protection parameters(FL Group)................82
3.3.2 Wall penetration installation ...................... 15
5.16 Drive’s Parameters (Group Fn) ....................86
3.4 Higher IP protection rating ......................... 17
5.17 User Security Parameters(FP Group) ...........86
3.5 Removal of fan ............................................ 18
3.6 Wiring of Inverter ....................................... 18 Chapter VI Troubleshooting and Abnormality Handling .........88
3.6.1 Wiring and configuration of main circuit Chapter VII Maintenance & Repair .........................................99
terminals ................................................................... 18 7.1 Routine maintenance & repair ....................99
3.6.2 Wiring and configuration of control circuit . 23 7.2 Regular maintenance...................................99
3.6.3 Communication link .................................... 25 7.3 Replacement of inverter wearing parts .....100
3.7 EMC installation instructions requirements 25 7.4 Inverter storage .........................................100
3.7.1 Grounding hardware ................................... 25 7.5 Inverter warranty ......................................100
3.7.2 Internal EMC filter....................................... 26 Appendix 1 Parameter Summary Table.................................101
3.7.3 General requirements for EMC ................... 27
Appendix 2 Recommended Parameters of Parts ..................153
3.7.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3 standard
(standard for Power Drive Systems) ......................... 28 Appendix 3 Serial Communication Protocol ..........................155
3.7.5 Generic emission standards ........................ 28
Foreword 1
Preface
MEV2000 is featured with high torque, high precision and
wide speed drive through a unique control method, which Inverter model description
caters to the needs of high performance in general purpose AC
motor drive. It also has an outstanding trip control function MEV2000-40004-000
which exceeds that of the products of the similar kind and can
adapt to the severe grid, temperature, humidity and dust 变频器系列
Inverter series 客户定制化代码
Customization code
conditions, remarkably improving its reliability.
代号
Code Supporting
As a revolutionary product that combines the general needs 代号
Code 适配电机功
motor power
400V 4 率（kW）
(kW)
and individual needs of the customers with industry needs 0004 0.37
0005 0.55
dynamically for the first time, MEV2000 is equipped with 0007 0.75
practical PI, simple PLC, flexible input/output terminals, pulse 0011 1.1
0015 1.5
frequency reference, power-off and shutdown parameter 0022 2.2
0030 3
storage option, frequency reference channel, run command 0040 4
channel binding, zero frequency return difference control, 0055 5.5
0075 7.5
master/slave reference control, swing frequency control and 0110 11
0150 15
fixed-length control, which can provide a highly integrated 0185 18.5
solution for the equipment manufacturers, and is of great 0220 22
0300 30
value for reducing the system cost and improving the system 0370 37
0450 45
reliability.
The MEV2000 can meet the requirements of the users for low Fig.A.1 Inverter Model Description
noise and low EMI by optimizing the PWM control technology
and the EMC design. The nameplate listing the inverter model and rated value is at
The relevant precautions during the installation, wiring, the lower part of the right side plate of the inverter case, as
parameter setting, troubleshooting and daily maintenance will shown in Fig.A.2. The barcode which indicates the equipment
be detailed in this manual. To ensure the correct installation information can also be found at the bottom of the operation
and operation of the MEV2000 series inverter as well as its panel base, as shown in Fig.A.3.
high performance, please read carefully this user manual
before installing the equipment. This manual shall be kept
properly and delivered to the users of the equipment.
Precautions for unpacking inspection

Please check carefully when unpacking the equipment:
Whether the product has the damage signs;
Whether the rated value in the nameplate is consistent with
your order requirement.
The Company has implemented strict inspection on the
Fig.A.2 Inverter Nameplate
manufacturing, package and delivery of the product. In case
any omission is detected, please contact the Company or the MEV Model Description
supplier immediately.
We are engaged in the continuous improvement of the
inverter. The relevant manuals provided by the Company are
subject to change without prior notice.
Fig.A.3 Schematic Diagram for the Positions of the Nameplate

and Barcode
MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

2 Chapter I Safety information
Chapter I Safety information

1.1 Definition of Safety
! Caution
Danger
Operations without following instructions can
cause personal injury or death.  When handling the product, protect the operation
panel and cover against any stress, otherwise, it may
Operations without following instructions can
drop, resulting in human injury or property loss.
! Caution cause personal injury or damage to product
 Install the product on the place that can withstand
or other equipment.
the weight of the inverter, otherwise, it may drop,
resulting in human injury or property loss.
1.2 Installation precaution  Do not install the product in the environment with
water splash (e.g., near the water pipe), otherwise,
Danger you may suffer the property loss.
 Take care not to drop any foreign objects, such as the
 Please install the product on the inflammable screws, gaskets and metal bars, into the inverter,
materials (e.g., metal), otherwise, fire may be caused. otherwise, fire and property loss may be caused.
 Avoid placing any combustible material near the  If the inverter is damaged or lacks certain parts, do
product, otherwise, fire may be caused. not install and run it, otherwise, fire and injury may
 Avoid installing the product in the environment with be caused.
explosive gas, otherwise, explosion may be caused.  Do not install the product in the place exposed to
 Only qualified personnel shall wire the drive.. direct sunshine, otherwise, you may suffer property
 Never wire the drive unless the input AC supply is loss.
totally disconnected.  The main circuit terminals and the terminal lugs must
 The drive must be properly earthed to reduce be firmly connected, otherwise, you may suffer
electrical accident. property loss.
 Install the cover before switching on the drive, to  It is prohibited to connect AC 220V input to the
reduce the danger of electric shock and explosion. terminals other than the relay terminals 41 and 42,
 When powering up the inverter that has been stored otherwise, you may suffer property loss.
for over 2 years, the voltage applied to it must be  The current of the relay terminals 41 and 42 must be
gradually increased with the regulator, otherwise, limited to less than 2 A if they are connected with AC
electric shock and explosion may be caused. 220V signal.
 Do not touch the terminals when the product is
powered up, otherwise, electric shock may be 1.3 Operation Precautions
caused.
 Avoid operating the inverter with a wet hand, When using the MEV2000 series inverter, please pay attention
otherwise, electric shock may be caused. to the following items:
 Maintenance operation shall be conducted when 10 1.3.1 About the motor and mechanical load
minutes has passed after the disconnection of the
power supply. At this time, be sure to confirm that Comparison with industrial frequency operation
the voltage between the positive and negative buses The MEV2000 series inverter is a voltage type inverter. Its
is below 36V, otherwise, electric shock may be output voltage is the PWM wave and contains harmonic.
caused. Therefore, the temperature rise, noise and vibration of the
 The parts can only be replaced by the qualified motor are a litte higher than the industrial frequency
technician. It is prohibited to leave any stub or metal operation.
items in the product, otherwise, fire may be caused. Constant torque low speed operation
 The parameters must be properly set after replacing Motor’s over-temperature protecting threshold
the inverter before the product can be used, The drive can protect the motor from over-temperature. If the
otherwise, you may suffer property loss. ratings of the driven motor are not in compliance with the
 The bare parts of the terminal lug for connecting the drive, be sure to adjust the protective threshold to ensure the
main circuit must be wrapped with insulating tape, motor is properly protected.
otherwise, electric shock may be caused. Running at the frequency above 50 Hz
When running the motor above 50Hz, there will be increase in
vibration and noise. The rate at which the torque is available
from the motor is inversely proportional to its increase in
running speed. Ensure that the motor can still provide
sufficient torque to the load. Please consult the engineer in
advance.
Lubrication of mechanical device

Chapter I Safety information 3
The mechanical devices that need lubrication, including the

reducer and gear, will be damaged if they run at low speed for
a long time because of the poor lubrication performance. MEV2000
Please consult the engineer in advance.
Negative torque load
For the applications of lifting loads, negative torque may occur;
the inverter will trip because of overcurrent or overvoltage.
Braking components with proper parameters shall be
configured for this case.
Mechanical resonance point of the load devices
The inverter may come across the mechanical resonance point Fig.1.2 Capacitor Prohibited at the Inverter Output Side
of the load devices in certain output frequency range, which
Circuit breakers connected to the output of the drive
must be avoided by setting jumping frequency.
If circuit breaker or contactor needs to be connected between
Applications with frequency ON/OFF operations
the drive and the motor, be sure to operate these circuit
It is suggested to perform ON/OFF control on the inverter
breakers or contactor when the drive has no output, to avoid
through the terminals. It is prohibited to directly perform the
damaging of the drive.
frequent ON/OFF operation through the switching devices at
Using outside the range of rated voltage
the inverter input side (e.g., contactor), otherwise, the
It is suggested not to use the MEV2000 series inverter beyond
equipment may be damaged.
the operating voltage range. If it is necessary, please use
Motor insulation inspection before the inverter connection
suitable voltage regulation device.
If the motor is used for the first time, or used again after idling
Surge protection
for a long time, the motor insulation shall be checked, so as to
The inverter is equipped with the surge protection device, and
prevent the damage to the inverter because of the insulation
has certain self-protection capacity against the lightning.
failure of the motor windings. The wiring is as shown in Fig.1.1.
Altitude and derating
Please use the 500 V voltage type megameters for the test.
Derating must be considered when the drive is installed at
The insulating resistance shall be no less than 5 MΩ.
high altitude, greater than 1000m. This is because the cooling
effect of Drive is deteriorated due to the thin air. For every
additional 100 m, the output current of the inverter shall be
derated by 1% for normal operation. That is, the current of the
inverter shall be derated by 20% at the altitude of 3000 m. The
relation curve between the rated current of the inverter and
the altitude is as shown in Fig.1.3 .
Motor
Megameter Grounding
electrode
Fig.1.1 Schematic Diagram for Motor Insulation Inspection 1000 3000 （m）
1.3.2 About the inverter Fig.1.3 Derating Relation Between the Rated Output Current of
the Inverter and the Altitude
The capacitor or varistor component for improving the power
factor because the inverter output is the PWM wave, if the 1.4 Precautions for discarding the inverter
capacitor or SPD piezo resistor is installed at the output side
for improving the power factor, inverter tripping or When discarding the inverter, please pay attention that:
component damage may be caused. Be sure to remove such The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuit and the PCB
components, as shown in Fig.1.2. may explode when they are burnt.
Toxic gas will be given out when burning the plastic parts (e.g.,
the front panel).
Please dispose of the inverter as industrial waste.
MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

4 Chapter II Product Introduction
Chapter II Product Introduction

2.1 Specifications
Item Item Description
Rated voltage;
Three-phase: 380 V - 480 V; 50 Hz/60 Hz
frequency
Input
Allowable voltage
Voltage: ±10%; Voltage unbalance: <3%; frequency: ±5%
range
Rated voltage 380 V
Frequency 0 Hz~550 Hz
Output Open-loop mode: 60 s at 150% of the rated current (cold state), 8s at 150% of the rated current (hot
Overload capacity state)
RFC-A mode: 3 s at 180% of the rated current
Control mode V/F control, open-loop vector, RFC-A control (rotor flux control)
Speed adjusting
1:100
range
Zero Speed Torque Open-loop mode:150%@0.5Hz, open-loop vector 180%@0.5Hz, RFC-A:180%@0.5Hz
Frequency
Digital setting: maximum frequency ×±0.01%; Analog setting: maximum frequency ×±0.2%
precision
Frequency
Digital setting: 0.01 Hz; Analog setting: maximum frequency ×±0.1%
resolution
Torque increase Manual torque increase 0.0%-30.0%
Four modes: 1 customized V/F curve plus 3 torque decrease feature curves (2.0 order, 1.7
V/F curve
order, 1.2 order)
Three modes: linear acceleration/deceleration, S-curve acceleration/deceleration and
Acceleration/decel
automatic acceleration/deceleration; four acceleration/deceleration time settings, time unit
eration curve
(min/sec) selectable, maximum: 3200 Min
Control DC braking initial frequency: 0-60.00 Hz
performance DC braking Braking time: 0.0 s-25.0 s;
Braking current: 0.0%-150.0%
Jogging frequency range: 0.10 Hz-50.00 Hz; jogging acceleration/deceleration time: 0.1 s-60.0 s
Jogging
(settable), jogging interval settable
Multi-speed
Multi step speed running through the built-in PLC or the control terminals.
running
Built-in PI It is designed to setup as a close loop control system easily
Automatic energy
Automatically optimize V/F curve to save energy depend on the load
saving running
Auto voltage
Constant output voltage can be maintained automatically when the mains voltage changes
regulation (AVR)
Auto current
Auto current limiting during the operation to avoid frequently vercurrent tripping
limiting
Auto carrier
To automatically adjust the carrier frequency according to the load characteristics; optional
adjustment
Traverse operation Traverse operating function with adjustable central frequency
Customized Fixed length
The inverter stops when reaches the set length
functions control
Drooping control Applicable to operations where the same load is driven by several inverters

Chapter II Product Introduction 5
Item Item Description

Acoustics noise
To adjust the acoustics noise when the motor runs
control
Uninterrupted operation through the control of the bus voltage upon instantaneous power
Ride through
interruption
The run command channels and the frequency reference channels can be bundled freely and
Bundling function
switched synchronously
Running command Operation panel reference, control terminal reference, serial port reference, which can be
channel switched in various modes
Frequency Digital reference, analog voltage reference, analog current reference, pulse reference, serial
reference channel port reference, which can be switched in various modes
Running Auxiliary frequency
Flexible auxiliary frequency tuning and frequency synthesis
function reference
Pulse output 0.10 kHz pulse square wave signal output, able to output the set frequency, output frequency
terminal and other relevant parameters
Analog output Offer one analog output ranging for 0-10V 50mA, able set as frequency, output frequency and
terminal other parameters
LED display Able to display parameters such as current, voltage and frequency.
Panel
Key locking Lock all the keys to prevent misoperation
Phase loss protection (optional), overcurrent protection, overvoltage protection, undervoltage
Protection function
protection, over-temperature protection, overload protection, etc.
Optional parts Remote LCD keyboard, external RS485 adapter, SD adapter, IO option card, etc.
Indoor, away from direct sunshine, free from dust, corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist,
Operating site
water vapor, water dripping or salt
0-3000 m, between 1000 m-3000 m, for every additional 100 m, the rated current should be
Altitude
derated by 1% for normal operation.
Ambient o o o
-20 C-+40 F (derated when used in the ambient temperature above 40 C)
temperature
Environment Humidity Less than 90% RH, no condensing
2
Vibration Less than 5.9 m/s (0.6 g)
Storage o o
-40 C~+70 C
temperature
Protection class IP20
Cooling mode Forced air cooling, with fan control
Installation method Wall mounting, through panel mount, DIN(below 1.5kW)
Efficiency 98%
Table.2.1 General Technical Specifications
2.2 Product series introduction
2.2.1 Rated value of inverter

The current of MEV2000 is rated as heavy load current for the power ranging from 0.37KW to 7.5KW, and as heavy and light load
current for the power ranging from 11KW-45KW respectively. See Table.2.2 for details.

Maximum
continuous output
Input current current Rated capacity Supporting motor
Inverter model (A)
(A) (KW) (KW)
Heavy
Light load
load
MEV2000-40004-000 2.4 1.3 0.37 0.37
MEV2000-40005-000 2.9 1.8 0.55 0.55
MEV2000-40007-000 3.5 2.3 0.75 0.75
MEV2000-40011-000 5.1 3.2 1.1 1.1
MEV2000-40015-000 6.2 4.1 1.5 1.5
MEV2000-40022-000 8.7 5.6 2.2 2.2
MEV2000-40030-000 12.2 7.3 3 3
MEV2000-40040-000 14.8 9.4 4 4
MEV2000-40055-000 16.3 13.5 5.5 5.5
MEV2000-40075-000 20.7 17 7.5 7.5
MEV2000-40110-000 29 27 30 11/15 11/15
MEV2000-40150-000 36 35 38 15/18.5 15/18.5
MEV2000-40185-000 46 42 48 18.5/22 18.5/22
MEV2000-40220-000 60 47 63 22/30 22/30
MEV2000-40300-000 74 66 79 30/37 30/37
MEV2000-40370-000 88 77 94 37/45 37/45
MEV2000-40450-000 105 100 112 45/55 45/55
Table.2.2 The 400 V Series Inverter (380V-480V+10%)
o o
Note: The continuous current ratings given in this manual is applicable to the operation at a ambient temperature of 40 C (104 F),
altitude of 1000 m and switching frequency of 3.0 KHZ. For the operation with switching frequency, ambient temperature and
o o
altitude higher than 3.0 KHZ, 40 C (104 F) and 1000 m, respectively, the inverter should be derated.
2.2.2 Inverter control mode

MEV2000 inverter is suitable for the standard AC induction motor. The inverter can drive the motor according to the frequency set
by the user. The motor speed lies on the output frequency of the inverter and the slip caused by the mechanical load. The motor
speed can be well controlled by the inverter through slip compensation. Therefore, the low-speed performance is determined by
whether the open-loop mode or RFC-A mode is adopted.
Open-loop mode:
1. V/F mode
The output torque of the motor can be enhanced by boosting the voltage in low speed operation. Except for that, the voltage
applying to the motor is proportional to the frequency. The mode is suitable for the operation in which multiple motors are driven
by one inverter. In general, the motor with a base frequency of 50 Hz can still obtain 100% of the torque when its frequency is
lowered to 4 Hz.
2. Open-loop vector mode
During low speed operation, the inverter produces a proportional voltage using the motor parameters to keep the flux constant in
different overload conditions. Except for that, the voltage applying to the motor is proportional to the frequency.
In general, the motor with a base frequency of 50 Hz can still obtain 100% of the torque when its frequency is lowered to 1 Hz.
RFC-A mode:
The rotor flux adopts the closed-loop current control, which allows the same overload current is used under open-loop mode, while
eliminating the low load instability of traditional open loop control.
The inverter estimates the flux position, flux and running speed of the motor using the motor current, voltage and key parameters
in the motor model. RFC-A control mode is a mode which simulates the closed-loop control system to estimate where the motor is
running.

2.2.3 Name of each part of the inverter
Fig.2.1 Feature of the drive (Size 2~4)

1. Power nameplate (on the side) 5. Control terminal 9. DC bus- 13.STO terminal
2. Label 6. Braking resistor interface 10. Output terminal of the motor wire 14.Key pad terminal
3. Option card socket 7. Screw hole of built-in EMC filter 11. Power input port
4. Relay interface 8. DC bus+ 12. Ground terminal

Fig.2.2 Feature of the drive (Size 5 - 6)

1. Keyboard 5. Control terminal 9. Output terminal of the motor wire
2. Power nameplate label 6. Braking resistor interface 10. Power input port
3. Option card interface 7. DC bus+ 11. Ground terminal
4. Relay interface 8. DC bus-
2.3 Optional parts
2.3.1 Component of optional parts

If you need the following options, please order separately from Emerson.
Fig.2.3 Options Supported by MEV2000

SN Name Functional descriptions

1 External RS485 adapter Supporting Modbus RTU communication
2 Option card See 2.3.2 for details
3 Remote keyboard External remote LCD keyboard
Providing +24 V backups and uploading and
4 SD Adapter
downloading parameters with SD cards
Table.2.3 Options
2.3.2 Option card type

Functional
Name Appearance of the option card Color
descriptions
Providing more I/O

IO card Orange
interfaces
Table.2.4 Option Card Description
2.4 Inverter accessories

The packing box of the inverter contains a quick guide manual, a safety instruction book and an accessory tool box.
Name Size 1-4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7
Ground bracket
M4 screw ×2
Installation bracket
×2 ×2 ×2
Ground clamp
Terminal bolt
M6×11 M8×12
Bezel ring
×3 ×2
Table.2.5 Accessory Box

10 Chapter III Installation and Wiring
Chapter III Installation and Wiring

The vibration at the installation place shall be less than 5.9
3.1 Installation environment 2
m/s (0.6 g);
The device shall be protected from the direct sunshine;
The inverter shall be installed in a well-ventilated indoor
The device shall be mounted in the location free of dust and
environment vertically.
metal powder;
The following items shall be given much attention when
Do not install the device in the place with corrosive gas and
selecting installation environment:
o o explosive gas;
The ambient temperature shall be within -10 C~40 C. If the
o If there is any special installation requirement, please consult
temperature exceeds 40 C, forced external heat dissipation or
and confirm with the relevant engineer.
derating shall be adopted.
The humidity shall be less than 90%, with no condensation;
Backplane
Fig.3.1 Installation Spacing
Size Space (A)

40oC 50oC
2 0 mm 0 mm
3
4
5 0 mm 30 mm
6 0 mm
7 30 mm
Table.3.1 Description of Installation Distance (IP20 Protection Class)
Note: Ensure that the installation spacing is larger than 30 mm to reach the strength for installing the backplane if the wall
penetration installation is adopted for the inverter.

Chapter III Installation and Wiring 11
3.2 Removal and installation of inverter components
3.2.1 Removal of terminal cover

Energy store
Even if the AC power supply is cut off, the capacitor in the inverter will
keep live and the voltage is fatal to human being. If having been powered
up before, the inverter may continue to run only after the AC power
supply is cut off for more than ten minutes. Generally, the capacitor will
discharge due to the built-in resistor. However, in some abnormal cases,
the capacitor may not discharge or cannot discharge due to the voltage
on the output terminal. The capacitor cannot discharge if the screen
becomes white due to the failure of the inverter. Please consult us or our
authorized retailer.
Removal
1. Rotate counterclockwise with a slotted screwdriver; 2. Pull the cover downwards; 3. Take out the terminal cover
Fig.3.2 Schematic Diagram for the Removal of Size 2~4 Cover
Fig.3.3 Schematic Diagram for the Removal of Size 5 - 8 Covers
3.2.2 Removal of finger-type panel and DC terminal cover

Fig.3.4 Removal of Finger-type Panel and Terminal Cover

A. All sizes
B. Size 5
C. Size 6
C. Size 7
Place the finger-type panel on a firm surface and strike the corresponding tap (1) with a hammer, as shown in the above figure.
Continue to do so until all taps (2) required to be removed are removed. After that, clean all burrs and sharp debris.
3.2.3 Installation and removal of option card

Installation:
1. Align with the snap-fit of the inverter; 2. Insert the option card downwards; 3. Fasten it.

Fig.3.5 Schematic Diagram of the Installation of the Option Card

Removal:
1. Loosen the snap-fits on two sides of the option card; 2. Pull it out.
Fig.3.6 Schematic Diagram of the Removal of the Option Card
3.2.4 Installation and removal of external RS485 adapter

Installation:
1. Align two snap-fits on the interface of the external RS485 adapter with two slots on the upward side of the inverter; 2. Push the
adapter in; 3. The interface of the adapter snaps in the RS485 joint inside the inverter.
Fig.3.7 Schematic Diagram of the Installation of the External RS485 Adapter

Removal:
1. Pull out the RS485 adapter.

Fig.3.8 Schematic Diagram of the Removal of the External RS485 Adapter
3.3 Installation methods of inverter
3.3.1 Wall-mounted installation

The whole series of MEV2000 inverters support wall-mounted installation and Size 2 supports guide rail installation. The outline is
shown in Fig.3.9. See Table.3.2 for the specific outline and installation dimensions.
Fig.3.9 Outline of MEV2000 Inverter

M1 M2 H W D Aperture A B Gross Weight
Inverter Model Size
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
MEV2000-40004-000 2
MEV2000-40005-000 2
MEV2000-40007-000 2 194 55 205 78 150 5 0 100 1
MEV2000-40011-000 2
MEV2000-40015-000 2
MEV2000-20022-000 3
MEV2000-40022-000 3
215 70.7 226 90 160 5 0 100 1.5
MEV2000-40030-000 3
MEV2000-40040-000 3
MEV2000-40055-000 4
265 86 277 115 175 6 0 100 3.13
MEV2000-40075-000 4
MEV2000-40110-000 5 375 106 391 143 202 6.5 0 100 7.4
MEV2000-40150-000 6 365 196 389 210 227 7 0 100 14

M1 M2 H W D Aperture A B Gross Weight

Inverter Model Size
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
MEV2000-40185-000 6
MEV2000-40220-000 6
MEV2000-40300-000 7
MEV2000-40370-000 7 508 220 557 270 280 9 30 100 28
MEV2000-40450-000 7
Table.3.2 Outline and Dimension of MEV2000 Inverters (mm)
3.3.2 Wall penetration installation

MEV2000 size 5 ~ 7 inverters (11 KW ~ 45 KW) support the wall penetration installation method.
Size 5 (11 KW)
Fig.3.10 Dimensions for Wall Penetration Installation of Size 5

Size 6 (15 KW, 18.5 KW, 22 KW)


Size 7(30 KW,37 KW,45 KW)

Wall-mounted mounting
Dimensions Quantity Wall penetration installation Quantity
bracket
×2
Size5 ×2
×2
×3
Size6 ×2
×2
×2
Size7 ×2
×2
Table.3.3 List of Mounting Bracke

two safety brackets are used to fix the two sides, as shown in
3.4 Higher IP protection rating Fig.3.14. The sets of safety brackets, seal rings and IP insertion
pieces can be used during wall penetration installation. See
The IP protection class of MEV2000 inverters is set to IP20 and
Table.3.4 for the details about the ordering of sets of tools.
the pollution degree 2 (for dry and non-conductive pollution)
to NEMA1. The IP protection degree of Size 5~Size 7 inverters
Dimensions CT order No.
can be set to IP65 if wall penetration installation is adopted.
5 3470-0067
The front parts and various switch devices of Size 5 ~ Size 7
6 3470-0055
inverters are all installed inside the cabinet with the protection
degree of IP65, while the heatsink is installed outside the 7 3470-0079
cabinet through a backplane. Therefore, most of the heat Table.3.4 Sets of Tools for Wall Penetration Installation
generated by the inverter is dissipated outside the cabinet so
as to reduce the temperature inside.
Backplane
IP65 case
Penetration Penetration
IP20 wall safety wall safety
bracket bracket
Penetration
wall
installation
Fig.3.15 Schematic Diagram of Wall Penetration Installation
Sealing washer
Fig.3.13 IP 65 Cabinet Installation

Seal the exhaust outlet of the heatsink with insertion pieces so
that the IP degree of the back parts of the heatsink can be high.
Refer to Fig.3.13.
Seal ring
Fig.3.16 Installation of IP Insertion Pieces

1. Insert the slotted screwdriver into the protruding part on
the hinge plate and then pry to install IP insertion pieces with
higher degree.
2. Pull up the hinge plate and insert the IP insertion piece to
the ventilation hole of the heatsink.
3. Check and ensure the IP insertion pieces are inserted
securely and correctly.
Fig.3.14 Installation of Seal Ring 4. Cover the hinge plate and if required, remove the IP
To seal the gap between the inverter and the backplane tightly, insertion pieces in the reverse order.

3.5 Removal of fan the power supply through the circuit breaker or
fuse switch.
The whole series of MEV2000 inverters support snap-fit
installation for the fan for easy replacement of heatsink fan. 3.6.1 Wiring and configuration of main circuit
terminals
1. Connection of inverter and options
L1
L2
L3
N
Fig.3.17 Schematic Diagram of Removal of Fans 隔离开关

Isolating switch
1. Press the snap-fits outside the fan and pull out the fan.
2. Remove the wire between the fan and the inverter. Fuse
熔断器
3.6 Wiring of Inverter

AC交流输入电抗器
input reactor
Danger
Contactor
接触器
• Do not open the inverter cover until the power
supply of the inverter is fully disconnected for at
least 10 minutes. Input EMC filter
输入EMC滤波器
• Make sure that the internal wiring be conducted
only when the voltage between the main circuit L1 L2 L3
terminals (+) and (-) is below DC36V. BR Braking

MEV2000 制动电阻
resistor
• Only the well-trained and authorized technicians +
PE U V W
are allowed to perform the internal wiring of the
inverter.
• Check the wiring carefully before and after Output EMC filter
输出EMC滤波器
connecting the emergency shutdown or safety

circuit. 交流输出电抗器
AC output reactor
• Check the voltage level of the inverter before
powering on, otherwise, personal injury/death or
equipment damage may be caused. M
! Caution
Fig.3.18 Connection of inverter and options
• Check carefully whether the rated input voltage of 1) The inverter is suitable for all types of power supplies, such
the inverter is consistent with the AC power as TN-S, TN-C-S, TT and IT.
voltage before use. 2. Disconnecting devices (e.g., isolating switch) must be
• The inverter has passed the dielectric strength test installed between the power grid and the inverter to ensure
before delivery. Users should not conduct this test the personal safety during the equipment maintenance.
again on the inverter. 3) The circuit breakers or fuses with the over-current
• When it is necessary to connect the external protection (MCB or MCCB) shall be installed before the
braking resistor, refer to Chapter II. inverter to avoid the failure expansion due to the
• Do not connect the power cable to U, V or W. post-equipment failure. Refer to Table.3.5 for the selection of
• The grounding wire is generally the copper wire the fuses and the section area of the electrical connected
with the diameter of 3.5 mm2 or above and the wires.
grounding resistance is less than 10 Ω.
• The inverter has leakage current inside. The Incoming
Main
leakage current of the inverter unit is more than line Control circuit
circuit
3.5 mA, which depends on the operating Model protection
conditions. To ensure the safety, the inverter and MEV2000- Control
Input Output
motor must be grounded, and leakage protector Fuse (A) terminal
wire wire
(i.e., RCD) shall be installed. It is recommended to wire
adopt B type RCD. 20004 6 1 1 1
• To provide the overcurrent protection for the
input side and facilitate the power-off 20005 10 1 1 1
maintenance, the inverter shall be connected with

Incoming (5% of the voltage imbalance between the phases). See

Main
line Control circuit Attachment 1 for specific selection of the reactors.
circuit
Model protection 6) AC output reactor
MEV2000- Control When the cable connecting the inverter and the motor is
Input Output longer than the length specified in Table.3.6, it is suggested to
Fuse (A) terminal
wire wire
wire use high-capacity cables and install AC output reactor (the
recommend reactance is 2%) to suppress the high-frequency
20007 16 1 1 1
oscillation to avoid the damage to motor insulation, large
20011 20 2.5 1 1 leakage current and frequent inverter protective action.
The distributed capacitance of the motor cables will affect the
20015 20 2.5 1 1 output load of the inverter; therefore, the cable length shall be
20022 25 4 1.5 1 less than the values listed in Table.3.6.
40004 6 1 1 1
400 V nominal AC power voltage
40005 6 1 1 1 Maximum allowable cable length of the
motor under the following frequencies
40007 6 1 1 1
Inverter
0.667kHz
40011 6 1 1 1 Model
12kHz
16kHz
1kHz
2kHz
3kHz
4kHz
6kHz
8kHz
MEV2000-
40015 10 1 1 1
40022 10 1 1 1
40004
40030 16 1.5 1 1
40005
18.25m
37.5m
40040 16 2.5 1.5 1
75m
50m
25m
40007 100m
40055 20 2.5 2.5 1
40011
40075 25 4 2.5 1 40015
40110 40 6 6 1 40022
18.25m
37.5m
100m
75m
50m
25m
40150 63 10 10 1 40030
40185 63 16 16 1 40040
40220 63 25 25 1 40055
18.25m
37.5m
100m
75m
50m
25m
40300 100 35 35 1 40075
40370 100 50 50 1
200m
150m
100m
75m
50m
37m
40450 125 70 70 1 40110
Table.3.5 Recommended Circuit Breakers, Fuse Capacity and
Section Area of the Copper Core Insulating Wires 40150
300m
200m
150m
100m
75m
50m
Note: The parameters in the table are recommended values. 40185

4) The recommended model of the AC input contactor is AC1
5) AC input reactor 40220
When the grid waveform has severe distortion and the higher 40300
harmonics between the inverter and the power supply are
250m
185m
125m
90m
interacted, the AC input reactor may be installed. The AC input 40370

reactor can also increase the inverter input power factor. 40450
When the power capacity exceeds 175 KVA, the Size 2 and Size
Table.3.6 Length of the Inverter Output Cable
3 inverters need to install an AC input reactor externally, while
the Size 4-Size 7 inverters, which have a built-in DC reactor, 7) Input EMI filter
need not, except there is imbalanced power phase sequence Optional EMI filter may be installed to suppress the
or special power supply environment. high-frequency noise interference from the inverter power
The recommend reactance should be set to about 2% when cable. See Attachment 2 for the specific models of EMC filter.
using the reactor and a higher value may be adopted if 8) Braking resistor
necessary, but it may cause the output loss of the inverter due
to pressure drop.
For all ratings of the inverter, 2% of the reactors allow the
imbalance of the negative phase sequence power up to 3.5%

Instantan Continuou Section area of phase Minimum section area of

Minimum
eous s power conductor upon installation S corresponding protective
Dimensions resistance 2 2
power rating (mm ) conductor Sp (mm )
(Ω)
(KW) (KW)
400V 10<S≤16 S
MEV2000-40004-000 270 2.3 16<S≤35 16
MEV2000-40005-000 270 2.3 35<S S/2
MEV2000-40007-000 270 2.3 Table.3.8 Area of Protective Conductor
MEV2000-40011-000 270 2.3
MEV2000-40015-000 270 2.3
 Tips:
MEV2000-40022-000 100 6.1 2.2
1. When the EMI filter is installed properly, the MEV inverter
MEV2000-40030-000 100 6.1 3
will meet the requirements of IEC 61800-3 standard set out by
MEV2000-40040-000 100 6.1 4
the International Electrotechnical Commission.
MEV2000-40055-000 50 12.2
2. The input/output EMI filter shall be installed as close to the
MEV2000-40075-000 50 12.2
inverter as possible. See Section 3.7 of Chapter III “Installation
MEV2000-40110-000 31.5 21.5 16.2
Instructions for Meeting EMC Requirements” for the
MEV2000-40150-000 17 39.8 21.6
installation method.
MEV2000-40185-000 17 39.8 25
3. See Attachment 1 for the technical parameters of the
MEV2000-40220-000 17 39.8 32.7 options.
MEV2000-40300-000 9 75.2 41.6 2. Input/output wiring connection of the main circuit
MEV2000-40370-000 9 75.2 50.6 Applicable models: MEV2000-40004 ~ MEV2000-40015
MEV2000-40450-000 7 96.6 60.1
Table.3.7 Reference Table for Selection of the Braking Resistor
Note: The instantaneous power is the highest short-term
power dissipation when the IGBT braking is open. The braking
resistor should be able to bear the power dissipation at a
shorter interval (ms). The resistance is inversely proportional
to the instantaneous power rating.
In most cases, the braking starts once in a while, which makes
the continuous power rating of the braking resistor much less
than that of the inverter. Therefore, the braking resistor with a
continuous rated power is more suitable for most cases.
However, attention must be paid to that the instantaneous
power rating of the braking resistor shall be high enough to
bear the possible Threshold braking load. Optional EMC Thermal
filter overload
The duty ratio of the braking period should be carefully Optional input protection
considered when optimizing the braking resistor. reactor device Braking
resistor
The resistance of the selected braking resistor shall not be less
than the specified minimum resistance. A larger resistance will
be more cost-saving, and can ensure safety in case of the
braking system failure.
Power supply Ground
However, if the selected resistance is too high, the braking grounding Input power connection
ability will be reduced, which may lead to the over
voltage-protection of the inverter during the braking process. Fig.3.19 Input/output Connection Diagram of Size 2 Main
9) Safe grounding cable Circuit
The inverter has leakage current inside. To ensure the safety, Applicable models: MEV2000-40022 ~ MEV2000-40040
the inverter and motor must be grounded, and the grounding
resistance shall be less than 10 Ω. The grounding wire shall be
as short as possible, and the wire diameter shall meet the
standards in Table.3.8.
Note: The values in the table apply only when the two
conductors adopt the same metal. If not, the section area of
the protective conductor shall be determined in Table.3.8
according to the equivalent conducting factor.

Thermal overload Braking

protection device resistor
Optional EMC
filter Thermal
overload
Optional input protection
reactor device
Optional EMC
filter
Braking
resistor Optional input
reactor
Motor
Ground Motor
Power supply Input power connection
grounding
Ground
Input powerPower supply
grounding connection
Fig.3.20 Input/output Connection Diagram of Size 3 Main
Circuit Fig.3.22 Input/output Connection Diagram of Size 5 Main
Applicable models: MEV2000-40055 ~ MEV2000-40075 Circuit
Applicable models: MEV2000-40150 ~ MEV2000-40220
Thermal overload Braking
protection device resistor
Optional EMC Thermal

filter overload
protection
Optional input device Optional EMC
reactor filter
Optional
Braking input reactor
resistor
Motor
Motor
Power supply Input power Ground
grounding connection
Input power Power supply
grounding
Ground
connection
Circuit Fig.3.23 Input/output Connection Diagram of Size 6 Main
Circuit
Applicable models: MEV2000-40110
Applicable models: MEV2000-40300 ~ MEV2000-40450

Power supply grounding Input power
Optional input
reactor
Optional EMC
filter
Thermal
overload Braking
protection resistor
device
Motor
Ground
connection

Circuit

3.6.2 Wiring and configuration of control circuit
24V 0V
Ana log input
模拟输入AI1
AI 1
多功能端子
Mul ti-function X1/Y1
terminal X1/Y1 Frequency reference 1
频率给定1
10V
Mul多功能端子 X2 X2
ti-function terminal Ana log input
Forwa rd 正转/停止命令
running/stop commandFWD 模拟输入AI2/X4
AI 2/X4 Frequency reference 2
FWD Ana log 频率给定2
Reverse 反转/停止命令
running/stop commandREV output AO1
模拟输出AO1 Frequency meter
REV 频率表
多功能端子 X3
Mul ti-function terminal X3
Relay output
继电器输出 Bra king resistor
制动电阻
Three-phase
三相380V
380V
Fig.3.25 Terminal Connection Diagram

Note:
1. if the terminals are used for impulse input or output, they shall be connected to a common terminal of 0V.
2. Effective wiring mode of STO enable of Size 2-4 models: terminal 31, 34 linked with +24 V terminal 9 and terminal 32, 33 linked
with 0 V terminal 6; effective mode of STO enable of Size 5-6 models: terminal 31, 35 connected with +24 V terminal 9
Fig.3.26 Frame 5-6 STO Terminal Connection Diagram

3. Size 2-4 models provides one-way relay 41, 42; Size 5-6 models two-way relay 41, 42 and 43, 44.
Terminal
1 2 4 5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14
No.
Multi-functional
Analog input Multi-function Multi-
Analog +10 V Analog input terminal
Function AI2/multi- input terminal functional Run Run
O V input power output 24 V X3/high-speed
introduction function input X1/output input terminal forward reverse
AI1 supply AO1 pulse frequency
terminal X4 terminal Y1 X2
input
Table.3.9 Introduction to Terminal Function

Terminal
Category Name Terminal function description Specifications
No.
Input voltage range: 0~±10 V ±3%
(input resistance: 100 kΩ)
Input current range:
2 Analog input AI1 Receiving the analog voltage/current input
0 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 0 mA ±5 %,
Analog input
4 to 20 mA ±5 %, 20 to 4 mA ±5 %
Resolution: 11 bit
Input voltage range: ±10 V ±3%
5 Analog input AI2 Receiving the analog voltage
(input resistance: 100 kΩ)
Output voltage range: 0 to +10 V
±5 % (Max output current 50mA)
Analog output Onput current rangein output
Analog output 7 Providing the analog voltage output
AO1 current mode:
0 to 20 mA ±4 %,
4 to 20 mA ±4 %
Forward running
12 command
Forward/reverse running digital command.
Running control terminal Input voltage range: 0 V ~+ 24 V
Please refer to F7 two-wire/three-wire
terminal Reverse running
control function description for details.
13 command
terminal
Multi-functional
10 It can be set as the digital input terminal
input terminal X1
with multiple functions. Please refer to F7 Input voltage range: 0 V ~+ 24 V
Multi-functional
11 terminal function definition for details.
input terminal X2
In addition to acting as an ordinary
multi-functional terminal, terminal 14 can Input voltage range: 0 V ~+ 24 V
Multi-functional
also be set as the high-speed pulse input Maximum input frequency: 100 kHz
input terminal Multi-functional
14 terminal or the input terminal for testing Models supported by motor
input terminal X3
the motor thermistor. Please refer to F7 thermistor: DIN44081 pct., KTY84,
introduction to input terminal functions for PT1000, PT2000
details.
In addition to acting as the analog input 2,
Multi-functional
5 terminal 5 can also be set as the digital Input voltage range: 0 V ~+ 24 V
input terminal X4
input terminal with multiple functions.
Can be set as a digital or pulse output with
Multi-functional Multi-functional Output voltage range: 0 ~+24 V
multiple functions. Please refer to F7
output terminal 10 output terminal Output frequency range: maximum
introduction to input terminal functions for
Y1 10 kHz
details.
41,42 Size 2-4 provides one-way relay 41, 42; Size Maximum current rating of the
5-7 two-way relay 41, 42 and 43, 44. contact:
Relay output
Relay output It can be set as the relay output terminal AC220 V/2 A
terminal 43,44 with multiple functions. Please refer to F7 DC30V/4A resistive load
terminal function definition for details. DC30V/0.5A inductive load
+24 V power
Power supply 9 Common terminal Maximum output current: 200 mA
supply
Ground connection used together with
Common terminal 1 0V
other terminals
+10 V power Connect a potentionmeter with analog Output voltage range: +10 V±3 %
Power supply 4
supply input terminal 2 or terminal 5. Maximun output current: 5mA
Table.3.10 Terminal Function Description

3.6.3 Communication link this section shall be met, but no specific emission standards
are specified. Attention shall also be paid to the special
Installing the external RS485 adapter will provide you two requirements in the section headed “Over-voltage protection
communication methods: the direct connection of terminals of control circuit - long cables and wiring outside a building”,
and two-way connection between the RJ45 port and 485 which are aimed to enhance the surge immunity of control
communication. Modbus RTU communication can be accessed circuits.
through the main controller and inverter by setting the Section 3.7.4, EMC standard for power drive systems
inverter parameter. IEC61800-3 (EN61800-3).
Section 3.7.5, Generic emission standards for industrial
environment, IEC61000-6-4, EN61000-6-4 and EN50081-2.
The recommendations in section 3.7.3 are usually sufficient to
avoid interference to adjacent industrial equipment. If there is
highly sensitive equipment nearby, or the inverter is in a
nonindustrial environment, the recommendations in sections
3.7.4 and 3.7.5 shall be followed to reduce radiofrequency
emission.
In order to ensure the installation meets the emission
standards described in:
 The EMC data sheet provided by the supplier of the
inverter
Fig.3.27 External RS485 Adapter Wiring  Correct external EMC filter must be used and all of the
Pin Functional descriptions requirements in section 3.7.3 General requirements for
1 120 Ω terminal resistance EMC and section 3.7.5 Generic emission standards must
2 RX TX be followed.
3 0V
4 +24 V(100 mA) Model CT order No.
5 Not connected MEV2000-40110(Size5) 4200-0402
6 TX enable MEV2000-40150 ~ 4200-4800
7 RX\TX\ MEV2000-40220(Size6)
8 RX\TX\ (connecting to pin 1 if MEV2000-40300 ~ 4200-1132
the terminal resister needs to MEV2000-40450(Size7)
be applied to) Table.3.13 Order Form for External EMC Filter
Table.3.11 RJ45 Port Pin Descriptions Note: installers of the inverter shall ensure that the inverter
The connections with the minimum number are 2, 3, 7 and complies with local EMC regulations.
shielding. The shielded cable must be used at any time. 3.7.1 Grounding hardware
Pin Functional descriptions To meet EMC requirements, MEV2000 is provided with a
1 0V grounding bracket, which enables direct grounding of cable
2 RX\TX\ shields without using lead wires. Method: remove the cable
3 RX TX shields and fix the cable on the grounding bracket with metal
4 120 Ω terminal resistance clips or clamps (not provided) or cable tie. Note that the cable
5 TX enable shields shall be connected under guidance in any case and
6 +24 V(100 mA) shall be connected to the intended terminal of the inverter
Table.3.12 RS485 Terminal Connection Pin Descriptions with a clamp. A suitable clamp is the Phoenix DIN rail mounted
SK14 cable clamp (for cables with a maximum outer diameter
Note: The standard network cable is not recommended to be of 14 mm).
used as the RS485 hardware connection because there is no Installation of the grounding bracket is shown in Fig.3.28 and
twisted shielded pair between the cables. Fig.3.29.
The serial communication connection port of MEV2000 Installation of the grounding clamp is shown in Fig.3.30 and
inverter has been double insulated to meet the requirements Fig.3.31.
of EN50178 SELV.
The control computer shall be grounded according to the
IEC60950 SELV (IT equipment). Or the insulation equipment
shall be installed in the communication cable if the
ungrounded laptop or similar equipment is used.
3.7 EMC installation instructions requirements

There are three levels of requirements for EMC, respectively
described in the following three sections:
Section 3.7.3, General requirements for all applications, to
ensure normal operation of the inverter and minimize
interference to nearby equipment. The immunity standards in

Fig.3.28 Schematic diagram for installation of Size 2-4

grounding bracket
Fig.3.30 Schematic diagram for installation of Size 5 grounding

clamp
Fig.3.29 Schematic diagram for installation of Size 5-8

grounding bracket (size 5 as an example)
Fig.3.31 Schematic diagram for installation of Size 6 grounding

clamp
3.7.2 Internal EMC filter

It is recommended that the internal EMC filter be kept in its
original place unless it needs to be removed for a special
reason.
The internal EMC filter reduces radio-frequency emission to
the power supply. Where the motor cable is short, it is
permitted to adopt the requirements of EN 61800-3 for the
second type of environment (see section 4.11.4 Compliance

with EN 61800-3 standard and Electromagnetic compatibility

(EMC)). For longer motor cables, the filter continuously
reduces emission; if the length of shielded motor cable is
within the limit for the inverter, interference to adjacent
industrial equipment will not be caused. It is recommended
that the filter be used in all applications, unless the ground
leakage current is not allowed to exceed 9.2 mA for size 2 or
when it is not suitable to install a filter. Removal and
installation of the internal EMC filter is shown in the following
figures.
Note: power supply for the inverter must be Fig.3.34 Schematic diagram for removal of size 6 internal EMC
disconnected before removing the internal EMC filter
filter. For models of size 6, the EMC filter can be disconnected by
unscrewing the screw on the left with a torx screwdriver.
Fig.3.35 Schematic diagram for removal of size 7 internal EMC

filter
For models of size 7, the EMC filter can be disconnected by
Fig.3.32 Schematic diagram for removal of size 2-4 internal unscrewing the screw on the left with a torx screwdriver.
EMC filter 3.7.3 General requirements for EMC
For models of size 2-4, the internal EMC filter can be
disconnected by unscrewing the screw marked with EMC on Ground (earth) connection
the left with a torx screwdriver. The grounding arrangement should be in accordance with
Fig.3.36, which shows a single inverter mounted on a metal
backplane or without an installation cabinet.Fig.3.36 shows
how to deal with the EMC issue when using unshielded motor
cable. However, shielded cable is preferential. Please refer to
section 3.7.5 Generic emission standards for detailed
information about installation.
If a ground connector adopts separate

cable, the connector shall be linked to
the corresponding power cable in
parallel so that the radiation is at the
lowest level.
Metal
backplane
EMC filter
If control circuit is grou- External

nded at 0 V, the grounding controller
0 V PE
must be conducted in the
system controller to avoid
Fig.3.33 Schematic diagram for removal of size 5 internal EMC clutter entering 0 V circuit.
Three-phase AC
filter
For models of size 5, the leftmost torx screw can be seen after The ground terminal of
removing the plastic cover by unscrewing the three M4 screws incoming power must be
connected to single power Motor is linked to inverter
on the left. The EMC filter can be disconnected by unscrewing ground bus, or ground
Metal backplane’s
relief cover fixed with 4-core cable. The
terminal of low impedance in onto power ground conductor in motor
the torx screw. seal box as a reliable ground ground wire cable must be directly
end for barrier-free connected to the ground
components in the seal box.
Grounding connector
Fig.3.36 Ground connection for general EMC enclosure

Cabling
A certain distance shall be kept between the inverter, the
power cable and the signal cable, as shown in the figure

below. buildings. Operating the inverter in such an

environment without an external EMC filter
may cause interference to nearby sensitive
equipment. The user needs to take remedial
measures in case of such interference. If the
interference causes serious results, please take
actions according to section 3.7.5 Generic
emission standards.
Detailed instructions and EMC information are given in the
EMC Data Sheet, which is available from the supplier of the
inverter.
3.7.5 Generic emission standards

Do not place Sensitive The following information applies to inverters of size 2-7.
(unshielded) signal
ca ble a t l east 300 mm Use the recommended filter and shielded motor cable.
a wa y from the a rea Perform cabling as shown in Fig.3.38. Ensure that the AC
comprised of drive,
motor ca ble, input power and grounding cables are at least 100 mm away from
ca ble EMC filter a nd the motor cable. Ensure that the AC power and land cables are
uns hielded braking
res istor ca ble at least 100 mm away from the inverter and motor cables.
Fig.3.37 Inverter cable intervals

Note: The shields of the signal cables (thermal protection,
braking and other signals) within the motor cables must be
grounded (near the motor cable), so as to prevent the noise
current spreading in the control system.
3.7.4 Compliance with EN 61800-3 standard

(standard for Power Drive Systems)
Compliance with the requirements in this standard shall
depend on the environment in which the inverter is intended
to operate:
Operation in the first type of environment: Do not replace
The standards specified in section 3.7.5 Generic emission filter cable
standards shall be complied with. An external EMC filter is
required.
Note: The use of this product with standard Fig.3.38 Intervals between power and grounding cables (size
configuration is subject to certain environmental 2-7)
restrictions according to IEC61800-3. In
residential environment, this product may cause Avoid placing sensitive signal cables in a zone 300 mm (12 in)
radiofrequency interference in which case the around the inverter. Ensure favorable EMC grounding.
user may need to take intensified measures such
as using an external filter.
Operation in the second type of environment:
In any case, shielded motor cables must be used, and an EMC
filter is required for all inverters with rated input current lower
than 100 A.
The inverter is equipped with an internal filter which can
restrain basic radiofrequency interference. In some cases,
requirements for longer cables can be met by putting the
motor cable (U, V and W) through a ferrite bead.
For applications where longer motor cables are needed, an
external EMC filter is required and it shall be connected
according to the EMC standard in section 3.7.5.
Note: The second type of environment typically
includes an industrial low-voltage power
network which does not supply residential

Sensitive
signal cable
Fig.3.41 Motor cable shield grounding

Unshielded cables may be used for the optional braking
Fig.3.39 Interval for sensitive signal circuits resistor(s) provided that the cables are all inside the cabinet.
Ensure a minimum space of 300 mm (12 in) from the signal
cable and the AC supply cable to the external EMC filter;
otherwise shielded cables must be used.
Optional external
bra king resistor
Optional external
braking resistor
Ca s e Ca s e
Or
Fig.3.42 Shielding requirement for the optional external

Fig.3.40 Grounding of inverter, motor cable shield and filter braking resistor
Note: 1. Ensure direct metal contact at the inverter and filter If the control cable extends outside the cabinet, it must be
mounting points. Any paint must be removed beforehand. shielded and the shields must be pressed to the inverter’s
Connect the shield of the motor cable to the ground terminal metal enclosure using the grounding bracket, as shown in
using a wire that is as short as possible and not exceeding 50 Fig.3.43. Remove the insulating layer of the cable to clamp the
mm long. Complete 360° shielding is preferential for the motor cable on the bracket, but the shields shall be kept intact.
terminal bracket. Alternatively, the cable may pass through a ferrite bead,
With respect to EMC, it doesn’t matter whether the motor whose part number is 3225-1004.
cable contains an internal (safety) ground core, or if there is a
separate external ground conductor, or where the grounding
is made only through shields. An internal ground core will
carry a high noise current and therefore it must be terminated
as close as possible to the shield termination.
Fig.3.43 Grounding of signal cable shields using the grounding

bracket

3.7.6 Variations in the EMC wiring In applications where such circuits may be exposed to
high-energy surge, some special measures are required to
Interruptions to the motor cable prevent malfunction or damage. Over-voltage may be caused
The motor cable should ideally be a whole shielded or by the high transient voltage between ground points resulting
armored cable without interruptions. In some situations it may from lightning or power failure. There will be higher risk if the
be necessary to interrupt the cable, as in the following circuits extend outside the building.
examples: As a general rule, if the circuits extend outside the building
 Connecting the motor cable to the wiring terminal in the where the inverter is located or the cable inside the building is
cabinet. longer than 30 m, some additional precautions shall be taken.
 Installing an isolating switch between the motor and the Any of the following techniques may be applied:
inverter so as to meet safety requirements. 1. Galvanic isolation, i.e., do not ground the 0 V control
In these cases the instructions below shall be followed. terminal. Avoid loop circuits formed by the control cables. For
For the wiring terminal in the cabinet, connect the shields of example, loop circuits may be prevented by twisting the signal
the motor cable to the grounding metal backplane using metal input and output cables together.
cable-clamps, and the grounding metal backplane shall be 2. Shielded cable has additional power ground connection. The
positioned as close to the wiring terminal as possible. Cables cable shields may be grounded at both ends, but in addition,
for strong current shall preferentially be kept at a minimum the ground conductors at cable terminals shall be connected
length, and ensure that all sensitive equipment and circuits are together by a power ground cable (equipotential connecting
at least 0.3 m (12 in) away from the wiring terminal. 2
cable) with a cross-sectional area of at least 10 mm or 10
times the area of the signal cable shield, or to meet the
electrical safety requirements of the plant. This ensures that
From inverter the fault or over-voltage current passes mainly through the
ground cable shields, rather than the signal cable shields. If the
building itself has a connection network with reasonable
design, this measure will be unnecessary.
3. Additional over-voltage suppression - for the analog and
digital inputs and outputs, a zener diode network or a
commercially available over-voltage suppressor may be
Backplane connected in parallel with the input circuit, as shown in
Fig.3.46 and Fig.3.47. If a digital port undergoes severe
Case
over-voltage, its fault protection may start.
To motor
If a digital port undergoes severe over-voltage, its fault
protection will start. For continued operation after such an
Fig.3.44 Connecting the motor cable to the wiring terminal in incident, the fault can be reset automatically by control word
the cabinet or terminal setting.
Using a motor isolating switch
The conductor connecting the motor cable shields is
recommended to be a flat metal coupling-plate, and
Device signal Signals to inverter
conventional wire is not suitable.
The shields shall be fixed onto the coupling-plate using metal
cable-clamps. Keep the exposed cables without shields at a
minimum length, and ensure that all sensitive equipment,
circuits and terminal boxes are at least 0.3 m (12 in) away from
such cables. The flat metal coupling-plate shall be placed as Fig.3.46 Over-voltage suppression for digital and unipolar
close to a grounding system as possible, e.g., a large metallic input and output
structure near the inverter ground.
Device signal Signals to inverter
Switch
From inverter To motor

Connecting rod
Fig.3.47 Over-voltage suppression for analog and bipolar input
Fig.3.45 Connecting the motor cable to the isolating switch and output
Over-voltage protection of control circuit - long cables and Over-voltage suppression devices can be used as modules
wiring outside a building provided with rail, such as Phoenix products:
The input/output ports for the inverter control circuits are Unipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 DC
designed for general use and suit the application inside Bipolar TT-UKK5-D/24 AC
equipment or for small systems. Such devices are not suitable for encoder signals or fast digital
Such circuits meet the requirements in EN 61000-6-2 (1 kV data networks because the capacitance of the diodes has
surge) if the 0 V circuit is not grounded.

negative effect on the signal. Most encoders’ signal circuit has recommendations for special networks may be taken as
current isolation with the motor bracket, in which case no reference.
precautions are required. For data networks,

32 Chapter IV Instructions on Inverter Running and Operating
Chapter IV Instructions on Inverter Running and Operating

F9.005 and F9.006. Corresponding calculation formulas are
4.1 Explanatory descriptions shown in F9.005 and F9.006 of Chapter V.
The terms describing the inverter control, running and status 4.1.3 Inverter operating status
will appear repeatedly in the following chapters. Please read
this chapter carefully. It will help you understand and MEV2000 operating status includes stop status, running
properly use functions described in the following chapters. status and motor parameter self-tuning status.
stop status: If there is no running command input after the
4.1.1 Inverter running command channel inverter is powered on and initialized; or if the stop
command is executed during running, the inverter enters
It specifies the physical channel for such operation
the stop status immediately.
commands accepted by the inverter as start, stop and
Running status: The inverter enters the running status after
frequency reference. There are three types of running
receiving the running command.
command channels:
Motor parameter self-tuning status: If there is any running
Operation panel: To control with the RUN and STOP buttons
command after the parameter FH.008 is set as 1 or 2, the
on the operation panel;
inverter enters the motor parameter identifying status. It
Control terminal: To control with Control Terminal 9 (FWD),
enters the stop status after the parameter identification is
Control Terminal 10 (REV), Control Terminal 6 (24V)
completed.
(two-wire control) and Xi (three-wire control);
Serial port: To control the start and stop through the upper 4.2 Detailed operating instructions
computer;
The command channel can be selected through the
parameter F0.004 and multifunctional input terminals 4.2.1 Operation panel use
(functions of No.27, No.28 and No.29 can be selected The operation panel is the main unit of the inverter to
through F7.000 ~ F7.007). receive commands and display parameters. It is can be into
two types: LED model and LCD model. The former has the
 Note: standard configuration, and the latter with LCD display is
Before switching channels, be sure to conduct the switching optional as required by the user. The latter adds text
commissioning first; otherwise, equipment damage or messages in Chinese and English to explain the display data
human injury may be caused! type. Both of them have the same appearance, size and
4.1.2 Inverter frequency reference channel operation method as shown in Fig.4.1. Take the LED
operation panel for introduction convenience.
The common running mode of MEV2000 has the following
six physical channels of frequency reference:
Operation panel potentiometer reference;
Terminal UP/DOWN reference;
Serial port reference;
Analog AI1 reference;
Analog AI2 reference;
Terminal pulse (PULSE) reference.
EXA1
EXA2
Means of frequency reference:

Final output frequency from the inverter is determined by
various computation combinations of the eight basic
channels. The computation involves concepts of main &
auxiliary setting frequencies.
Main set frequency: It is set by F0.000, multi-section
frequency, PLC or a closed loop.
The main set frequency is determined by inverter running
priority. The priority follows: jog running > closed loop
running > PLC running > multi-speed running > common
running. For instance, if the inverter is in multi-speed
running, its multi-section frequency is the main set
frequency.
Auxiliary set frequency: It is set by Parameter Group F9.
Final output frequency: It is the sum of main setting
reference and auxiliary setting frequency via proportional
combination. The proportion coefficient is determined by

Chapter VI Parameter Introductions 33
Fig.4.1 Operation panel schematic diagram
! Caution
Note: MEV2000 operation panel is not compatible with other Emerson inverter series!
4.2.2 Button function description

There are 7 buttons on the inverter operation panel.
Definitions of button functions are as shown in Table.4.1.
Button Name Function
Program/exit Fig.4.2 Diagram of correspondence between the unit
1 Exit the programming state. indicator status and units
button
3 status indicators: They are located on the upper left of the
Function/data Enter the lower level menu
2 operation panel, and their indications are described in
button or confirm data.
Table.4.2.
Decrease the data or Indicator Display status Indication of the current
3 Minus button
parameter. inverter status
Increase the data or Off Stop status
4 Plus button
parameter.
On Forward running status
Press this button to run the Off Stop status
5 Run button inverter under the operation
On Reversal running status
panel mode.
Operation panel control
Stop/reset Press this button for stop or On
6 status
button fault reset. Table.4.2 Status indicator description
Rotate this button for 4.2.4 Operation panel display status
7 Potentiometer
frequency setting.
Table.4.1 Operation panel function table The display status of MEV2000 operation panel includes stop
status parameter display, running status parameter display,
 Note: failure status display, alarm status display, parameter
Functions of RUN and STOP/RESET buttons are also parameter editing status display, etc.
restricted by parameter F9.009. 1. Stop parameter display status
4.2.3 LED nixie tube and indicator description If the inverter is in stop status, the operation panel displays
the stop status parameter as shown in Fig.b of Fig.4.3, where
The inverter operation panel has a 6-bit & 8-segment LED the unit indicator on the upper right indicates the parameter
nixie tube, 5 unit indicators and 3 status indicators, as shown unit. Different stop status parameters (defined by parameter
in Fig.4.2. The nixie tube can display the inverter status
parameter, parameter parameter, failure alarm code, etc. F8.034) can be scanned by pressing the button.
The five unit indicators correspond to five unit indications 2. Running parameter display status
respectively as shown in Fig.4.2. The inverter reaches the running status after receiving a
valid command for running, and its operation panel displays
the running status parameter as shown in Fig. c of Fig.4.3,
where the unit indicator on the upper right indicates the
parameter unit. The running status parameter (defined by

34 Chapter IV Instructions on Inverter Running and Operating
parameters F8.001 and F8.002) can be scanned by pressing Button to the edit status level by level. Press Button
the button. to save the parameter and press Button to
exit in the parameter display status.
V-F 50.00 50.00 Status
状态模式 mode Check
查看模式 mode Edi编辑模式
t mode
F0.00
50.00 F0.000
F0.000 F0.000 00
Fig. a Power-on Fig. b Stop Status, Fig. c Running Status,

Initialization, Inverter Panel Operations Forward Running
Displaying Control Mode Being Displayed Being Displayed
Fig.4.3 Display of the inverter initialization, stop and running Stop停机状态显示
s tatus
displayor running status 编辑状态
statuses 或运行状态参数显示
parameter display or
或故障告警显示
Edi t s tatus
strip alarm display
3. Failure alarm display status
If the inverter detects a failure signal, it immediately enters Fig.4.5 Programming display status of the operation panel
the failure alarm display status with blinking display of the
failure code as shown in Fig.4.4.
4.2.5 Operation methods of the operation panel
The stop parameter and failure information can be browsed The operation panel can be used to perform various
by pressing the button. Failure reset can be executed operations on the inverter as shown below:
through the operation panel STOP/RESET button, control Status parameter switching display:
terminal or communication command. If failure still exists, 按键显示
Button display F0.00
the failure code displayed shall be maintained.
50.00
50.00 F0.000
1500 0 0.000
LED
LED显示
Er.0199
di splay
设定频率
Set 运行转速
the last set Rotating speed in running Line 运行线速度
speed in running Output power
输出功率
最后一次设定值
value of frequency 设定转速
Setting rotating speed 设定线速度
Setting line speed 输出转矩
Output torque
Fig.4.6 Operation example for displaying parameters in stop

status
(The operating status switching method is the same as
above.)
Fig.4.4 Failure alarm display status
Parameter code parameter setting: (The following is an
4. Alarm status display example of modifying the parameter F3.013 setting from
If the inverter detects an alarm signal, it immediately enters 5.00 Hz into 6.50 Hz. The bold number in Fig.4.7 indicates
the alarm display status with constant blinking display of the the flashing bit.)
alarm code on the operation panel. If the alarm is dismissed
in a certain time, the inverter will report the failure and be 50.00 F0.00 F3.000 F3.000 F3.013 5.00 5.00
shut down. Enter edit进入编
status, Select Enter into Select Enter
选择功能组确选择功能功能码确
into level 参数修改
Parameter
Alarm codes are described in Table.4.3 and display
辑状态，
I menu
level function
功能
level II menu
认，进入
after function function
码F3.013III menu
认，进入 after modification
显示一 group 组F3F3 group is
二级菜单 code function
三级菜单 code is
级菜单 confirmed F3.013 confirmed
F3.013 F3.013 6.50 6.50 6.00 6.00
Alarm
Alarm description to Return to
+ +
code 返回一级
Return 返回原来
original 参数确认 Modify 将闪烁位
Parameter 修改闪烁 Right 进行参数
Select
the菜单
previous parameters
参数 parameters右移一位
confirmation位参数 shift parameter
位移选择
The brake resistor is overloaded, and it alarms level of F3.014 Display 0 of 5flashing
显示下一
flashing shift
Br.res menu Parameters
个功能码
bit bit by
Parameter
when the overload is over 75%. of next
function code
one bit 参数修
参数改，5 6
modification
The motor is in overload; it alarms when the 显示上一
Display Parameters of
F3.012 previous function code
overload accumulator reaches 75%; and the 个功能码
OV.Ld 参数
inverter is shut down when the overload is over
Fig.4.7 Operation example for parameter editing
100%.
The inverter is in overload, and it alarms when If the parameter has no flashing bit in the edit status, it
d.OV.Ld indicates this parameter cannot be modified for the
the overload detected is over 90%.
tuning The motor is in self-tuning. following possible causes:
Opt.AI Failure occurs in the option card. 1) This parameter is an unmodifiable parameter;
I.AC.Lt It alarms upon reaching the current threshold. 2) This parameter cannot be modified in running status, and
Table.4.3 Alarm codes it can only be modified after stop;
3) The parameter is protected. When the parameter FP.001
5. Parameter editing status = 1, 2, 3, it cannot be modified for parameter protection
Press Button to enter the edit status in the stop, against misoperation. To edit the parameter parameter,
running or failure alarm status (see FP.000 description and please set parameter FP.001 as 0 first.
Fig.4.9 for the user password condition). The edit status is Adjustment of reference frequency in common running:
displayed in three-level menu mode as shown in Fig.4.5, Only in the “status mode” can the user change the reference
where the menu level follows the sequence: parameter frequency from 50.00 Hz to 49.00 Hz as shown in Fig.4.8.
group → parameter number → parameter parameter. Press

Chapter IV Instructions on Inverter Running and Operating 35
Note: Even if the hundred-digit set value of parameter

F9.009 is not 0 (the operation panel is allowed to be locked),
50.00 49.00
the operation panel is still in unlocked status when the
operation panel is powered on each time.
4.3 Initial powering-on

Fig.4.8 Operation example for adjusting reference frequency
4.3.1 Inspection before powering-on
Lock operation of the user password: (Assuming the “user
password” FP.000 is set as “1368”. The bold number in For wiring & connection, please refer to the technical
Fig.4.9 indicates the flashing bit.) requirements stipulated in 3.6 “Inverter Wiring” of the
manual.
LED displays
LED显示 50.00 F0.000 FP.000 FP.000 1 8 68
button
按键操作
operations
Select Enter Unit place Hold同时按住两
+
down the two
4.3.2 Initial power-on operation
进入编辑状态，
Enter edit status, 选择进入参数个位闪烁， at the same
显示一级菜单 function
display level 功能组 parameter flashes and buttons
个键进行参
and
group 编辑 edit then按键7次
press time for parameter
I menu 数移位，按
the button 7 shift and press the
键6次6 times
After wiring & connection is confirmed errorless, turn on the
times buttons
50.00 3 FP.001 0 1368 368 air switch of AC power supply at the inverter input side to
+ +
1368 is Hold
按确认键同时按住两
down the Hold down the apply power to the inverter. And then the operation panel
按红色复位
Press Set it as 3 Enter
the red Reset设置为3 进入下一 into
replaced two buttons at 同时按住两
two buttons at
键确认，密
button for confirmation
and then the password
next
个参数
parameter
后，1368
by
个键进行参个键进行参
数移位，按
the same time
0 after the same time for parameter
parameter 数移位，按
displays the V/F mode first; when characters displayed in the
码生效 OK button for
会变为0
comes into effect shift
键1次
is pressed the
shift and press
and press 键3次
buttons once the buttons 3 nixie tube turn into the set frequency, it indicates that the
times
inverter initialization has been completed.
Fig.4.9 Operation example for user password locking If Indicator on the lower left of the operation panel is
Locking operation of buttons on the operation panel: on, it indicates that the operation panel is in control status.
(Preset the parameter of parameter F9.009 as 1, and then The operation process of initial powering-on is as follows:
lock the buttons as shown in the following operation
example.) Start
LED
LED显示
display
50.00 F0.000 F9.000 F9.000 F9.009 0 1
Button Stop
停机状态 status Enter
进入编 edit 选择 Enter功能组确
Select into level II 选择对应
Select the 进入参数
Enter 修改参数
Parameter
按键操作 display
operations
显示 status, and
辑状态， function menu after
功能 function
认，进入 corresponding parameter modification Conduct wiring connection according to
display level I group group is 参数parameters 编辑 edit
显示一
menu 组二级菜单
confirmed requirements in Section 3.6
级菜单
The buttons no
按键被锁定 50.00 F9.009 F9.009 1
longer respond to +
button不再响应
operations Hold down Enter 退回一级
按住Enter键 Return to 退回二级
Return to Parameter
参数确认
按键操作
after they are button and Up arrow level I level
菜单II menu confirmation Check
locked 和向上键并
button for 3 seconds 菜单 menu N
保持3秒，操
and then buttons of whether the wiring
operation
作面板按键 panel are
locked is correct?
即做锁定
Fig.4.10 Operation example for locking the operation panel Y

buttons Check if
N the output voltage
Unlocking operation of buttons on the operation panel: is correct?
(Assume that buttons on the operation panel are locked.) Y
LED Power on
LED显示
di splay 50.00 50.00 50.00
Within 1 second
+
Button 停机状态按住Enter键 Hol d down Enter The 按键锁定s et value of
N
按键操作 Stop s tatus button and Down pa解除，参 rameter F9.009 Display V=F
operations 显示
di splay 和向下键3秒
arrow button for 3 wi ll not change
即可解除面板数F9.009
s econds a nd then a fter the buttons
Within 2 seconds
buttons
按键锁定 of operation a的设定值
re unlocked
Y
panel are unlocked 不会改变
N
Display Set frequency
Fig.4.11 Operation example for unlocking the operation
Powering-on failed
panel buttons Y
Powering-on
succeeded Disconnect the air switch at power
input side
Check the causes
Fig.4.12 Operation process of inverter initial powering-on

36 Chapter V Parameter Introductions
Chapter V Parameter Introductions

 Note
The values in “()” are thedefault settings. Range: Minimum reference
F0.003 Main Digital Clamp (F0.013) ~ Maximum
5.1 Basic Parameters (Group F0) Reference Reference Clamp (F0.012)
(50.00Hz)
F0.000 Motor 1 reference Range:0~7 (0)
frequency selector When the reference frequency is set in digital mode (F0.000=0,
1, 2), this setting is the drive’s initial frequency value.
0: Digital reference1. To set the reference via potentionmeter.
Initial frequency is the value of F0.003 and it can be adjusted
via potentionmeter. F0.004 Motor 1 operating
Range:0,1,2 (0)
1:Digital reference 2. Terminal reference selected. Command Source Selector
The reference gets initial value from F0.003 and is changed by 0: Keypad
terminal up/down2: Digital reference 3 Comms Use the keypad RUN, STOP button
To set the reference frequency via serial port 1: TerminalsInput operating commands via terminals
Initial frequency is the value of F0.003 and it can be adjusted Use terminals FWD, REV, JOGF and JOGR to start and stop the
via FF.008. drive. 2: Comms
Serial port setting has 4 options: Modbus,Profibus,Devicenet Input commands via serial port
and CANopen Use serial port to start and stop the drive. Use FF.007
3: AI1 analog input
The reference frequency is set by analog voltage/current input  Note:
via terminal AI1 and the input range is DC 0V~10V, DC 0~20mA, Please be careful that during operating, the control modes can
20~0 mA, 4~20mA,20~4 mA. be changed through F0.004 or external terminals.
4: AI2 analog input Please be careful that during switching from other running
The reference frequency is set by analog voltage/current input command channels to terminal 2 wire command channel (see
via terminal AI2 and the input range is DC 0~10V, F7.008) or serial port command channel, the running
DC0~20mA,20~0 mA, 4~20 mA,20~4 mA. command will be valid immediately after the switching if the
5: Pulse input reference above channel commands are valid (there is level triggered)
Set the reference frequency by pulse input via pulse terminal before switching to them.
(terminal X4). Input pulse signal: voltage range: 10 V ±0.8 V;
frequency range: 0~100.0 kHz. F0.005 Keypad Running
Range:0,1 (0)
6: Ex A1 Direction Selector
External analogue reference 1 from SI-IO This function is active in keypad control mode only, but
7:Ex A2 inactive in serial port control mode nor terminal control mode.
External analogue reference 2 from SI-IO 0: Forward
1: Reverse
 Note:
Frequency calculating methods of Modes 3, 4 and 5 are
F0.006 Max output
decided by F1.000~F1.012, please refer to section 0. Range:0.00~550.00Hz (50.00Hz)
frequency
Max output frequency is the highest permissible output
F0.001 Digital Reference
Range:0,1 (0) frequency of the drive.
Save Selector
Only valid when F0.000=0, 1 or 2. 0 (frequency setting can be
F0.007 Motor 1 rated
saved at power off): When the drive is switched off or under Range:0.00~550.00Hz (50.00Hz)
frequency
voltage fault occurs, the setting of F0.003 will be refreshed to
the present frequency value. Please set F0.007 with reference to the values on the motor’s
1 (frequency setting can not be saved at power off): When the nameplate.
drive is switched off or under voltage fault occurs, the setting Open loop mode
of F0.003 will not be changed. Motor Rated Frequency (F0.007) and Motor Rated Voltage
(F0.008) define the frequency to voltage characteristic applied
to the motor. See V/F Curve Select (F0.014) for more details.
F0.002 Digital Reference
Range:0,1 (0) Motor Rated Frequency (F0.007), Motor Rated Speed (FH.003)
Stop Selector
and Number of Motor Poles (FH.000) are used to calculate the
Only valid when F0.000=0, 1 or 2. When the drive is running, rated slip of the motor for slip compensation.
digital setting frequency can be set via UP/DN keys on the Rated slip (Hz) = Motor Rated Frequency (F0.007) - (Pole pairs
panel, terminal UP/DN or serial port (depending on F0.000). x Motor Rated Speed (FH.003) / 60).
0 (Hold): The digital reference keeps the last modified value Pole pairs = the numeric value of Number Of Motor Poles
when drive stops. (FH.000) (i.e. 3 for a 6 pole motor).
1 (Resume to F0.003): The digital reference is reset to F0.003 If slip compensation is required Motor Rated Speed (FH.003)
when drive stops. should be set to the motor nameplate value, which should give

Chapter V Parameter Introductions 37
the correct compensation for a hot motor provide the Output frequency
nameplate value is correct. Slip compensation can be used
throughout the speed range of the motor, i.e. below base F0.006
speed and in the flux weakening region, to correct the motor
speed to minimise the change of speed with load. Motor
Rated Speed (FH.003) can be set to a value that is higher than
synchronous speed to deliberately introduce speed droop,
which can be used to aid load sharing with mechanically
coupled motors. Time
Slip compensation is disabled under the following conditions:
1. Motor Rated Speed (FH.003) = 0
2. Motor Rated Speed (FH.003) = Motor Rated Frequency Fig.5.1 Definition of Acceleration & Deceleration Time
(F0.007) x 60 / Pole pairs, i.e. synchronous speed.
3. Motor 1 Gain of Slip Compensation (F3.007) = 0% The acceleration rate applies when the frequency is changing
It should be noted that Motor 1 Rated Speed (FH.003) is used away from zero. It is the time to reach the Max Output
to calculate the rotor time constant of the motor which is then Frequency (F0.006), see t1 in Fig.5.1.
used to determine the flux build-up time at the start of the The deceleration rate applies when the frequency is changing
catch a spinning motor algorithm. If spinning start is required towards zero, see t2 in Fig.5.1.
(i.e. Start Mode (F2.000) ≥ 1) then Motor Rated Speed (FH.003) MEV serial inverter has defined 4 Acc./Dec. Rates, Acc./Dec.
should be set up correctly for the motor. If slip compensation Here only Acc/Dec rate 1 is defined. Rate 2~4 will be defined in
is not required it can be disabled by setting. F3.017~F3.022, please refer to section 5.4.
RFC-A mode
Motor Rated Frequency (F0.007), Motor Rated Speed (FH.003)  Note:
and Number of Motor Poles (FH.000) are used to calculate the See Acc./Dec. Rate Unit Selector (F9.011) for the definition of
rated slip of the motor which is used by the motor control Ramp rate frequency, and the default unit is second.
algorithm. An incorrect estimate of rated slip has the following
effects: F0.012 Motor 1 Range: Minimum reference clamp
1. Reduced efficiency maximum reference F0.013 ~Max output frequency F0.006
2. Reduction of maximum torque available from the motor clamp (50.00Hz)
3. Reduced transient performance F0.012 provides a limit on the maximum frequency reference.
4. Inaccurate control of absolute torque in torque control
modes F0.013 Motor 1
5. The drive will produce rated flux in the motor in the Range:.F0.006~Maximum reference
minimum reference
shortest possible time when it is enabled. Incorrect parameter Clamp F0.012 (0.00Hz)
clamp
values will affect the flux build-up time.
F0.013 is used to provide the minimum limit of the frequency
reference.
F0.008 Motor 1 rated Range:0~480V (Depend on drive
voltage variant)
F0.014 Motro 1 V/F
Please set F0.008 with reference to the values on the motor’s Range: 0~7 (0)
Curve Select
nameplate.
One user-defined curve, 3 preset curves and 4 open loop
vector control modes can be selected according to the setting
F0.009 Motor 1 low of F0.014.
Range:0~30.0% (3.0%)
frequency voltage boost 0:Fixed boost with multi-point V/F characteristic
Low Frequency Voltage Boost is used for torque compensation Please refer to function description of F0.015~F0.020
2
at low frequency. 1:Output voltage is proportional to f
See V/F Curve Select (F0.014). See curve 1 in Fig.5.2
1.7
2:Output voltage is proportional to f
 Note: See curve 2 in Fig.5.2
1.2
1 An incorrect setting of F0.014 can cause overheat or 3:Output voltage is proportional to f
over-current protection of the motor. See curve 3 in Fig.5.2
2 Default setting is 3.0% up to Size 4, 2.0% for Size 7 and 8, and 4: Open loop vector control mode (Ur)
1.0% for larger sizes. With resistance compensation but no stator resistance
measurement
5: Open loop vector control mode (Ur_S)
F0.010 Motor 1
Range:0.1~3200 s(min) (6.0s) With resistance compensation, stator resistance measured at
acceleration rate 1
each start
F0.011 Motor 1 6: Open loop vector control mode (Ur_I)
Range:0.1~3200s(min) (6.0s) With resistance compensation, stator resistance measured at
deceleration rate 1
power-up
7: Open loop vector control mode (Ur_Auto)

Resistance compensation, stator resistance measured on the If F0.014 is set to 0, you can define V/F curve via F0.15~F0.20,
first start. When the stator resistance is measure successfully, as shown in Fig.5.3. The V/F curve can be defined by
the measured value will store in the non-valotile memory. And connecting 3 points of (V1, F1), (V2, F2) and (V3, F3), to adapt
the control mode will automatically change to open loop to special load characteristics.
control mode (Ur). Default V/F curve set by factory is a direct line as show in
Fig.5.3 as curve 0.
Output voltage V
Output voltage
Vmax Motor rated
voltage V/F curve
5
(F0.008)
V3 Boost curve
4
V/F curve +
boost
V2 3
V1
Troque 2
boost
(F0.009) Output
Fb Output 1
frequency Hz F1 F2 F3
Motor rated frequency
Vmax ： Motor rated voltage F0.008 frequency(F0.
Manual troque 007)
Fb ： Motor rated frequency F0.007
boost (F0.021)
Fig.5.3 user-defined V/F curve

Fig.5.2 Torque-reducing curve
The voltage boost profile is defined independently using Low
 Note:
Frequency Voltage Boost (F0.009) and Boost End Frequency
1. The above One user-defined curve and 3 preset curves
(F0.021). The resulting V/F characteristic is the sum of the
are suitable for the variable-torque loads such as fan & pumps.
boost profile and the defined V/F curve.
You can select the curves according to the actual load so as to
achieve best energy-saving effects.
2. A fixed square frequency to voltage characteristic is used F0.021 Motor 1 Boost End Range: 0~50%
as shown below. When the |Output Frequency (F8.010)| is Frequency (10.0%)
below Motor Rated Frequency (F0.007) the Output Voltage F0.021 defines the ratio of the boost end frequency used for
(F8.011) is given by: manual torque boost to the rated operating frequency
Output Voltage (F8.011) = Low Frequency Voltage Boost (defined by F0.007), as shown in Fig.5.3 . This end frequency
(F0.009) + [ (Motor Rated Voltage (F0.008) - Low Frequency adapts to V/F curve 0, 1, 2 and 3 defined by F0.14.
Voltage Boost (F0.009)) x (Output Frequency (F8.010) / Motor Reference Frequency Parameters(Group F1)
n
Rated Frequency (F0.007)) ]
Where n has the value 1.2, 1.7 and 2.0 for values 3, 2 and 1 of F1.000 Maximum input Range:0.00~100.00kHz
V/F Curve Select (F0.014) respectively. pulse frequency (10.00kHz)
3. When operate with Ur I mode, Resistance compensation Input available for use as a pulse input are X3.
is used as in Ur S mode, but the Stator Resistance (FH.005) is The pulse reference input can be scaled to give the desired
only measured when the drive is enabled for the first time frequency reference using parameters F1.000 to F1.004 as
after each power-up. Another mode shall be selected if the shown in the
load changes after the inverter is power up. Otherwise, the Fig.5.4 and Fig.5.5.
motor can’t achieve a good performance, or OI.AC, It.AC or OU
trips will occur. Actual value of
reference at
pulse input
F0.015 Motor 1 V/F third 100%
Range:F0.017~F0.006 (0.00Hz)
point frequency
F1.004
F0.016 Motor 1 V/F third
Range:F0.018~100.0% (0.0%)
point voltage
F0.017 Motor 1 V/F
Range:F0.019~F0.015 (0.00Hz)
second point frequency
F0.018 Motor 1 V/F
Range:F0.020~F0.016 (0.0%) F1.002
second point voltage Maximum
input pulse
F0.019 Motor 1 V/F first frequency
Range:0~F0.017 (0.00Hz) 0% F1.001 F1.003
point frequency 100% (F1.000)
F0.020 Motor 1 V/F first

Range:0~F0.018 (0.0%)
point voltage
Fig.5.4 Positive

Actual value of
reference at pulse AI1 给定对应的
Actual value of
input 实际量
reference at AI1
100% 100%
F1.002 F1.008
正作用
Positive action
F1.006
AI1
AI1给定
F1.004 F1.005 0% F1.007 reference
-100% 100%
Maximum
input pulse
0% frequency Fig.5.6 Positive
F1.001 F1.003 (F1.000)
100%
AI1 给定对应的
Actual value of
实际量
reference at AI1
Fig.5.5 Negative 100%

F1.001 Minimum pulse
Range: 0.00~100.00% (0.00%) F1.006
frequency reference input
Please refer to F1.000 负作用action
Negative
F1.002 Actual value of F1.008

reference at minimum Range: 0.00~100.00% (0.00%) AI1
AI1给定
F1.005 0% reference
pulse frequency input -100%
F1.007
100%
Please refer to F1.000
Fig.5.7 Negative Action Features of AI1 Reference
F1.003 Maximum pulse
Range: 0.00~100.00% (100.00%) F1.006 Actual value of reference at
frequency reference input Range: 0.00~100.00%
minimum Analogue Input 1
Please refer to F1.000 (0.00%)
reference input
F1.004 Actual value of
reference at maximum Range:0.00~100.00% (100.00%)
F1.007 Maximum input of Range: -100.00%~100.0%
pulse frequency input
Analogue Input 1 (100.00%)
F1.005 Minimum input of

Range: 0.00~100.00% (0.00%) F1.008 Actual value of reference at
Analogue Input 1 Range: 0.00%~100.0%
maximum Analogue Input 1
Analogue Input 1 can be scaled and limited using the following (100.00%)
reference input
parameters: -
1. Minimum input of Analogue Input 1 (F1.005)
2. Actual value of reference at minimum Analogue Input 1
reference input (F1.006) F1.009 Minimum input of Range: 0.00%~100.0%
3. Maximum input of Analogue Input 1 (F1.007) Analogue Input 2 (0.00%)
4. Actual value of reference at maximum Analogue Input 1 Analogue Input 2 can be scaled and limited using the following
reference input (F1.008) parameters:
Parameters above can be selected to limit the range of 1. Minimum input of Analogue Input 2 (F1.009)
Analogue Input 1 and also scale it between the minimum and 2. Actual value of reference at minimum Analogue Input 2
maximum reference. reference input (F1.010)
If Minimum input of Analogue Input 1 (F1.005) ≥ Maximum 3. Maximum input of Analogue Input 2 (F1.011)
input of Analogue Input 1 (F1.007)then AI1 = 0.00% whatever 4. Actual value of reference at maximum Analogue Input 2
the input level. reference input (F1.012)
Input Level is limited between Actual value of reference at Parameters above can be selected to limit the range of
minimum Analogue Input 1 reference input (F1.006) and Analogue Input 2 and also scale it between the minimum and
Actual value of reference at maximum Analogue Input 1 maximum reference.
reference input (F1.008). If Minimum input of Analogue Input 2 (F1.009) ≥ Maximum
Analogue Input 1 Reference = [ (F1.008 – F1.006) / (F1.007 – input of Analogue Input 2 (F1.011)then Ai2 = 0.00% whatever
F1.005)] x (Analogue Input level – F1.005) + F1.006 as shown in the input level.
the Fig.5.6 and Fig.5.7 Input Level is limited between Actual value of reference at

minimum Analogue Input 2 reference input (F1.010) and 5.2 Starting and Braking Parameters(F2 Group)
Actual value of reference at maximum Analogue Input 2
reference input (F1.012). F2.000 Start Mode Range:0,1,4 (0)
Analogue Input 2 Reference = [ (F1.012 - F1.010)/ (F1.011 - 0:Normal
F1.009)] x (Input level - F1.009)+ F1.010 as shown in the Fig.5.8 Normal start without attempting to catch a spinning motor. If
and Fig.5.9. Start Mode (F2.000) = 0 the post ramp reference is set to zero
Actual value of or Start Frequency (F2.001) for the duration Start Frequency
reference at AI2
Hold Time (F2.002) when the drive is started.
1:Catch the spin motor
100%
Catch the motor and detect all possible frequencies. If Start
F1.012 Mode (F2.000) =1 a test is carried out to measure the
Positive frequency of the motor when the sequencer state machine
action enters the RUN state.
2:Reserved
F1.010 3:Reserved
4:DC Injection
AI2 reference
0% F1.009 F1.011
If Start Mode (F2.000) = 4, DC injection braking is applied (uses
100% Injection Braking Level (F2.011) and Injection Braking Time
(F2.012) and then the drive starts from the Start Frequency
Fig.5.8 Postive Action Features of AI2 Reference
(F2.001).
Actual value of
reference at AI2
Range:0 ~
F2.001 Start Frequency
Min{60,F0.012} (0.50Hz)
100%
Range:0.00~10.00s
F2.002 Start Frequency Hold Time
F1.010 (0.00s)
Negative action F2.001 determines the initial frequency when entering the
RUN state in all start modes, fS is the Start Frequency as
shown in Fig.5.10. F2.002 determines how long the final
F1.012 reference frequency will remain at the start value after
AI2
reference entering the RUN state, see t1 in Fig.5.10.
0% F1.009 F1.011
100% 频率Hz Hz
Frequency
Fig.5.9 Negative Action Features of AI2 Reference

F1.010 Actual value of fmax
reference at minimum
Range:0.00%~100.0% (0.00%)
Analogue Input 2 reference
input
fs
F1.011 Maximum input of
Range:0.00%~100.0% (100.00%)
Analogue Input 2
Please refer to F1.009 时间
Time
t1
F1.012 Actual value of Fig.5.10 Start Frequency Hold Time
reference at maximum
Range:0.00%~100.0% (100.00%)  Note:
Analogue Input 2
Start Frequency is not limited by the lower frequency
reference input
threshold.
F2.003 Spin Start Boost Range:0.0~10.0 (1.0)
F1.013 Analogue Input 1
Range: 0~6 (6) Spin Start Boost (F2.003) is used by the algorithm that detects
Mode
the frequency of a spinning motor when the drive is enabled
0:0~20mA and Start Mode (F2.000) = 1. For smaller motors the default
1:20~0mA value of 1.0 is suitable, but for larger motors Spin Start Boost
2:4~20mATrip (F2.003) may need to be increased.
3:20~4mATrip
4: Reserved  Note:
5: Reserved If Spin Start Boost (F2.003) is too small the drive will detect
6: 0~10V

zero speed whatever the frequency of the motor, and if Spin The End Time of S Curve (F2.009) and Falling Time of S Curve
Start Boost (F2.003) is too large the motor may accelerate (F2.010) can be set to define the time of sections 6 and 5
away from standstill when the drive is enabled. respectively of the profile shown above.
S-ramp Acc/Dec mode is suitable for the conveying load such
F2.005 Ramp Mode Select Range:0~2 (0) as elevator and conveying belt.
0:Linear
Linear speed ramps are used. See Fig.5.11. F2.008 Stop Mode Range:0~3 (1)
1:S-ramps 0:Coast
S-ramps of speed are used. Fig.5.12. if Ramp Mode Select 1:Ramp
(F2.005) = 1 an acceleration limit is applied to give S ramps. 2:DC injection with zero frequency detection
The S ramp function is disabled during deceleration when the Please refer to F2.011~2.012 for d.c injection function.
standard ramp voltage controller is active. When the motor is 3. Ramp followed by d.c. injection.
accelerated again the acceleration ramp used by the S ramp
function is reset to zero. Open-loop mode
2:ACC/DEC Stopping is in two distinct phases as shown in the table below
Accelerate under current limit and stop with standard ramp for each of the possible values of Stop mode (F2.008).
DC bus voltage control. If Ramp Mode Select (F2.005) = 2 then
the motor will will acc/dec in linear mode with acc/dec time Stop
configured, but will be accelerated under current limit and Mode Phase 1 Phase 2 Comment
stopped using standard ramp DC bus voltage control. (F2.008)
频率
Frequency Delay in phase
Inverter Drive cannot be
0: Coast 2 allows rotor
disabled re-enabled for 1s
flux to decay
Ramp down
Wait for 1s with
f max 1: Ramp to zero
inverter enabled
frequency
Low The drive
Inject DC at level
frequency automatically
2: DC defined by
current senses low
时间
Time injection Injection Braking
injection with speed and
with zero Level (06.006) for
t1 t2 frequency
detection of
time defined by
adjusts the
Fig.5.11 Linear speed ramps low speed injection time
detection Injection Braking
before next to suit the
Time (06.007)
Frequency phase application
fmax
Table.5.1 Open loop Stop Mode
3 4
RFC-A mode
There is only one phase during the stopping sequence as
2 5
shown in the table below for each of the possible values of
Stop Mode (F2.008).
In RFC-A mode, stop mode 2 will not use DC injection braking
1 6
but will instead stop under current limit.
time The following should be noted:
t1 t2 Stop Mode 0the inverter is inhibited immediately when the
Fig.5.12 S-ramps Final drive run is de-activated.
F2.009 End Time of S Curve Range:10.0~50.0% (20.0%)

F2.006 Start Time of S Curve Range:10.0~50.0% (20.0%)
F2.010 F2.010 Falling Time of
F2.007 Rising Time of S Curve Range:10.0~70.0% (60.0%) Range:10.0~70.0% (60.0%)
S Curve
F2.06 and F2.07 are only active when the Acc/Dec mode is See Start Time of S Curve (F2.006).
S-ramp Acc/Dec mode (F2.005=1), and F2.06+F2.07≤ 90%.
It is possible to limit the rate of change of acceleration and
Range:0.0~150.0%
hence produce an S-ramp of speed by setting Ramp Mode F2.011 DC Injection Braking Level
(100.0%)
Select (F2.005) = 1 and then setting the Start Time of S Curve
(F2.006), Rising Time of S Curve (F2.007), End Time of S Curve DC Injection Braking Level (F2.011) defines the level of current
(F2.009) and Falling Time of S Curve (F2.010). The Starting used for injection braking as a percentage of Motor Rated
Time of S Curve relates to the time to complete section 1 of Current (FH.002).
the curve (see Fig.5.12) and the Rising Time of S Curve relates See Stop Mode (F2.008)
to the time spent in the constant acceleration section (section
2 in the figure below). F2.012 DC Injection Braking Time Range:0.0~25.0s (1.0)

See Stop Mode (F2.008). from AC injection to DC injection.

Er.094 will be provided that monitors the AC injection phase
F2.013 Braking IGBT Lower Range:F0.008~999V (Drive and trips if the speed does not decrease for 60 seconds.
Threshold rating)
5.3 Auxiliary Operating Parameters(F3 Group)
Braking IGBT Lower Threshold (F2.013) defines the lowest level
of DC Link Voltage (F8.022) where the braking IGBT will F3.000 Reverse-Proof Selector Range:0,1 (0)
become active and Braking IGBT Upper Threshold (F2.014)
0: Run reverse enabled
defines the level of DC. Link Voltage (F8.022) where the
1: Run reverse disabled
braking IGBT will be on continuously. When the braking IGBT is
turned on it will remain on for at least 1ms. The braking IGBT
 Note:
on-time is defined by the thresholds and the DC link voltage as
This function is effective in all control modes
given in the table below where L = Braking IGBT Lower
Threshold (F2.013) and U = Braking IGBT Upper Threshold
(F2.014). F3.001 Delay Time Between Change
Range:0~3600s (0.0s)
Of Direction
DC link voltage level On-time The delay time is the transition time at zero frequency when
the drive switching the running direction as shown in Fig.5.13
DC Link Voltage (F8.022) 0%
as t1.
[ (DC Link Voltage (F8.022) –
L ≤ DC Link Voltage (F8.022)
L) / (U – L)] x 100%
输出频率
Output frequency
DC Link Voltage (F8.022) ≥ U 100%
Table.5.2 Switching on the Braking ICBT
As the DC Link Voltage (F8.022) rises above the lower
threshold the braking IGBT is active with an on/off ratio of
时间
Time
1/100. As the voltage rises further, the on/off ratio increases
until at the upper threshold the braking IGBT is on
continuously. The upper and lower voltage threshold can be
set up so that braking resistors in drives with parallel t1
connected DC links will share the braking load. Fig.5.13 Delay time from reverse running to forward running
If Braking IGBT Lower Threshold (F2.013) ≥ Braking IGBT Upper or from forward running to reverse running
Threshold (F2.014) then the braking IGBT is off when DC Link
Voltage (F8.022) Braking IGBT Upper Threshold (F2.014) and F3.002~F3.003 Reserved
on if DC Link Voltage (F8.022) ≥ Braking IGBT Upper Threshold Reserved function
(F2.014).
Unless sharing between braking resistors is required the F3.004 Low Frequency Slip
braking thresholds do not normally need to be adjusted. Care Range:0.0~100.0% (0.0%)
Boost
should be taken when reducing the thresholds because if
In stator resistor compensation open loop control (Control
either threshold is below the maximum value of the peak
Mode (F0.014) set to 0, 1, 3, and 4), the rated slip frequency
rectified supply voltage the braking resistor could take power
(see Motor Rated Frequency (FH.003) can be modified when
from the supply.
the output frequency is below one third of the motor rate
The list below gives conditions that will disable the braking
frequency to provide a torque boost.
IGBT:
1. Braking IGBT Upper Threshold (F2.014) = 0
 Note:
2. The drive is in the under-voltage state.
The modification consists of an addition to the calculated slip
3. A priority 1, 2 or 3 trip is active.
frequency controlled by the user parameter Low Frequency
4. There is a fault in the control system power supply.
Slip Boost (F3.004).The addition is equal to Low Frequency Slip
5. The hardware or software over-temperature systems
Boost (F3.004) at zero Hz falling linearly to 0.0% at one third of
indicate that the braking resistor is too hot.
the motor rated frequency.
6. A braking IGBT over-current trip is active OI Brake.
F3.005 Auto Energy Saving Operation Range:0,1 (0)
F2.014 Braking IGBT Upper Range:F0.008~999V (Depend
Threshold on drive rating) 0: disabled
1: enabled
See Braking IGBT Lower Threshold (F2.013)
When the motor operates without load or with light load, the
drive can adjust its output voltage by detecting the load
F2.015 DC inject start Range:0.00~60.00 Hz (5.00 current to achieve the energy-saving effects.
frequency Hz)
If F2.008 is 2 then F2.015 parameter is used to define the AC  Note:
injection frequency. This function is especially useful for the fan & pump loads.
If F2.008 is 3 then F2.015 is used as the threshold to switch

F3.006 Automatic Voltage Switching Frequency Decrease Increase

Range:0,1 (1)
Regulation Enable
Motor’s noise ↑ ↓
0: disabled
1: enabled all the time Leakage current ↓ ↑
When the input voltage deviates from the rated value,
enabling this parameter will keep the output voltage stable. Disturbance ↓ ↑
Especially in the case of input voltage more than the rated Table.5.3 Switching Frequency characteristics
value, this function should be enabled.
F3.007 Motor 1 Gain of Slip Setting Display Switching Frequency

Range:-150.0~150.0% (100.0%)
Compensation
The motor’s slip changes with the load torque, which results in 0 0.667 0.667 kHz
the variance of motor speed. The drive’s output frequency can 1 1 1 kHz
be adjusted automatically through slip compensation
2 2 2 kHz
according to the load torque. Therefore the change of speed
due to the load change is reduced as shown in Fig.5.14. 3 3 3 kHz
Slip 4 4 4 kHz
5 6 6 kHz
Positive slip 6 8 8 kHz
compensation
7 12 12 kHz
-100%
Motor's load
8 16 16 kHz
100% Table.5.4 Switching Frequency setting
 Note:
Negative slip 1. The switching frequency has a direct effect on the
compensation
sample rate for the current controllers (see Motor ACR-P
Fig.5.14 Auto slip compensation (F9.003)). All other control tasks are at a fixed rate of 1ms.
Motoring status: Increase the gain of slip compensation 2. In order to achieve better control performances, the
gradually when the actual speed is lower than the reference ratio of switching frequency to the maximum operating
speed (F3.007). frequency of the drive should not be less than 12:1.
Regenerating status: Increase the gain of slip compensation
gradually when the actual speed is higher than the reference F3.011 Auto-Switching Frequency
speed (F3.007). Range:0,1 (1)
Change Enable
Range of slip compensation: limit of slip compensation
0:Automatic switching frequency change is disabled
(F3.008)
1:Automatic switching frequency change is enabled
 Note:
Used in open loop mode to set the level of slip compensation F3.012 Motor Tone Adjustment Range:0,1 (0)
or droop control. 0:Motor Tone Adjustment is disabled
A value of 100.0% gives standard slip compensation. 1:Motor Tone Adjustment is enabled
A value of 0.0% disables slip compensation. Open loop mode only.
User set maximum switching frequencies 2kHz to 6kHz only.
F3.008 Motor 1 Slip Range:0.00~10.00Hz
Compensation Limit (10.00Hz) F3.013 Jog Reference Range:0.10~50.00Hz (5.00Hz)
Symmetrical maximum of the slip compensation frequency. F3.014 Jog Interval Range:0.0~100.0s (0.0s)
F3.015 Jog Acc Time Range:0.1~60.0s (6.0s)
F3.009 Motor 1 Slip Compensation
Range:0~3 (1) F3.016 Jog Dec Time Range:0.1~60.0s (6.0s)
Time Const
F3.013~F3.016 define the relevant parameters of Jog
0:64ms
operation.
1:128ms
As shown below, t1 and t3 are the actual Acc time and Dec
2:256ms
time respectively. t2 is the Jog operating time; t4 is the interval
3:512ms
of Jog operation (F3.014); f1 is the Jog operating frequency
A longer the Slip Compensation Time Const applied to the
(F3.013).
filter will result a slower slip compensation response.
Actual Acc time t1 can be determined by the following formula,
so does the actual Dec time t3 of jog operation.
F3.010 Switching Frequency Range:0~8 (3) F3.013*F3.015
t1=
F0.006

Frequency f1 Reference 4 F0.013~ Maximum Reference Clamp

F0.012 (30.00Hz)
Range: Minimum Reference Clamp
F3.027 Preset
F0.013~ Maximum Reference Clamp
Reference 5
F0.012 (40.00Hz)
t3 Time
F3.028 Preset
t1 t2 t4 F0.013~ Maximum Reference Clamp
Reference 6
F0.012 (45.00Hz)
Jog command Jog command Range: Minimum Reference Clamp
F3.029 Preset
Reference 7
F0.012 (50.00Hz)
Time These frequencies will be used in simple PLC operation and
Fig.5.15 Jog operating parameters multi-step speed operation, refer to the introductions of
F7.000~F7.005 and group FE parameters definition.
Interval of Jog operation (F3.014) is the interval from the time
when the last Jog operation command is ended to the time
when the next Jog operation command is executed. F3.030 Skip Reference 1 Range:0.00~550.00Hz (0.00Hz)
The jog command sent during the interval will not be executed. F3.031 Skip Reference
If this command exists until the end of the interval, it will be Range:0.00~30.00Hz (0.00Hz)
Band 1
executed.
F3.032 Skip Reference 2 Range:0.00~550.00Hz (0.00Hz)
 Note: F3.033 Skip Reference
1. In Jog operation process, the drive starts according to Range:0.00~30.00Hz (0.00Hz)
Band 2
starting mode 0 and stops according to stopping mode 0. The
unit of Acc/Dec time is second. F3.034 Skip Reference 3 Range:0.00~550.00Hz (0.00Hz)
2. Jog operation can be controlled by panel, terminals and F3.035 Skip Reference
serial port. Range:0.00~30.00Hz (0.00Hz)
Band 3
3. During the jog operation, if F2.005 is the S-ramps, the Acc F3.030~F3.035 defined the output frequency that will cause
time is F0.010 and F0.011. resonant with the load, which should be avoided. Therefore,
the drive will skip the above frequency as shown in Fig.5.16 Up
F3.017 Acceleration Time 2 Range:0.1~3200s(min) (6.0s) to 3 skip frequencies can be set.
Adjusted
F3.018 Deceleration Time 2 Range:0.1~3200s(min) (6.0s) Reference
Frequency
F3.019 Acceleration Time 3 Range:0.1~3200s(min) (6.0s)
Skip Reference
F3.020 Deceleration Time 3 Range:0.1~3200s(min) (6.0s) Skip Reference 3 Range 2
F3.021 Acceleration Time 4 Range:0.1~3200s(min) (6.0s)

F3.022 Deceleration Time 4 Range:0.1~3200s(min) (6.0s)
Skip Reference Range 2
Three kinds of Acc/Dec time can be defined, and the drive’s Skip Reference 2
Acc/Dec time 2~4 can be selected by different combinations of
control terminals. Refer to the introductions of F7.000~F7.005 Skip Reference Range 1
for the definitions of terminals used to select Acc/Dec time. Skip Reference 1
 Note:
Acceleration Time 1 and Deceleration Time are defined at Reference Frequency
F0.010 and F0.011.
Fig.5.16 Skip Reference and range
F3.023 Preset
Reference 1
F0.013~ Maximum Reference Clamp 5.4 Vector Control Parameters (Group F4)
F0.012 ( 5.00Hz)
F3.024 Preset F4.000 User Drive Mode Range:1,2 (1)
Reference 2
F0.012 (10.00Hz) 1:Open-loop Mode
Range: Minimum Reference Clamp 2:RFC-A Mode
F3.025 Preset
Reference 3
F0.012 (20.00Hz) Range:0.000~200.000s/rad (0.100
F4.001 Motor ASR-P1
s/rad)
F3.026 Preset Range: Minimum Reference Clamp

RFC-A Mode 1: Torque control

The drive holds two sets of these gains and either set may be The Final torque reference is the User torque reference. The
selected for use by the frequency controller with Motor ASR frequency is not limited by the drive but, the drive will trip at
Gain Select (F4.008). If Motor ASR Gain Select (F4.008) = 0, the over-frequency threshold if runaway occurs.
gains Kp1, Ki1 and Kd1 are used, and if Motor ASR Gain Select 2: Torque control with frequency override
(F4.008) = 1, gains Kp2, Ki2 and Kd2 are used. The Final torque reference is the Frequency controller torque
If Motor ASR Gain Select (F4.008) = 2, Kp1 etc are used while reference, but this reference is limited between 0 and the User
the modulus of the frequency demand is less than the value torque reference. The effect is to produce an operating area as
held by Motor ASR 1/2 Switching Frequency (F4.007), else Kp2 shown below if the Frequency controller torque reference and
etc will be used. the User torque reference are both positive. The frequency
If Motor ASR Gain Select (F4.008) is changed when the drive is controller will attempt to accelerate the motor to the Final
enabled, the controller output is kept constant by modifying demand reference with a torque equivalent to the User torque
the level of the integral term accumulator so that the transient reference. However, the frequency cannot be forced above the
produced is minimised. Final demand reference by the drive because the required
torque would be negative, and so it would be clamped to zero.
F4.002 Motor ASR-I1 Range:0.00~655.35 s²/rad (0.10)
See F4.001.
Torque
Range:0.00000~0.65535 1/rad User torque

F4.003 Motor ASR-D1
(0.00000) reference
See F4.001.
Frequency
Final Demand
F4.004 Motor ASR-P2 Range:0.000~200.000s/rad (0.100) Reference
(03.001)
See F4.001.
F4.005 Motor ASR-I2 Range:0.00~655.35 s²/rad (0.10)

See F4.001. Fig.5.17 Torque control with Frequency override
Depending on the sign of the Final demand reference and the
Range:0.00000~0.65535 1/rad User torque reference there are four possible areas of
F4.006 Motor ASR-D2
(0.00000) operation as shown below.
See F4.001.
Positive Final Demand Reference(03.001) Negative Final Demand Reference(03.001)
Positive User troque refernece Positive user troque refernece
F4.007 Motor ASR 1/2 Range:0.00~550.00 Hz Troque Troque
Switching Frequency (0.00Hz)
See F4.001. Frequency Frequency
Positive Final Demand Reference(03.001) Negative Final Demand Reference(03.001)

F4.008 Motor ASR Gain Select Range:0,1,2 (0) Negative User troque refernece Negative User troque refernece
RFC-A Mode Troque Troque

Frequency Frequency
See Motor ASR-P1 (F4.001).
0: ASR-P1 and ASR-I1 are used
1: ASR-P2 and ASR-I2 are used
2: Automatic gain change at frequency threshold defined by
Motor ASR 1/2 Switching Frequency (F4.007).
See F4.001 Fig.5.18 Torque control with Frequency override
3: Coiler/uncoiler mode
Range:0.00~4000.00 Positive Final demand reference: Positive User torque
F4.009 Motor ACR-P
(20.00) reference gives torque control with a positive frequency limit
The current loop controller proportional gain. defined by the Final demand reference. A negative User torque
reference gives torque control with a negative frequency limit
of -0.2Hz.
Range:0.000~600.000
F4.010 Motor ACR-I Negative Final demand reference: Negative User torque
(40.000)
The current loop controller integral gain. defined by the Final demand reference. A positive User torque
F4.011 Torque Mode Selector Range:0~6 (0) of + 0.2Hz.
0: Frequency control mode Example of coiler operation:
The Final torque reference is the Frequency controller torque This is an example of a coiler operating in the positive direction.
reference. The Final demand reference is set to a positive value just

above the coiler reference frequency. If the User torque 6: Torque mode with terminal switch functionality
reference is positive the coiler operates with a limited When drive starts, it first runs in speed control mode, when
frequency, so that if the material breaks the frequency does the torque reaches Speed To Torque Control Threshold (F4.017)
not exceed a level just above the reference. It is also possible and holds on for Speed To Torque Control Delay (F4.018), drive
to decelerate the coiler with a negative User torque reference. switches to torque control.
The coiler will decelerate down to - 0.2Hz until a stop is If terminal Xi is set to 36, it can be used to switch from torque
applied. The operating area is shown below: control to speed control, Speed To Torque Control Delay
(F4.018) is active before the switch takes action, F4.017 has no
effect in this condition.
 Note:
F4.011 shall be set to 0 under the special speed control
running modes, such as PLC, process closed loop, multi-speed,
swing frequency, etc.
F4.012 Torque Reference Selector Range:0~4 (0)

Fig.5.19 Coiler Operation
0:F4.014
Example of uncoiler operation: 1:AI1
This is an example for an uncoiler operating in the positive
2:AI2
direction. The Final demand reference should be set to a level 3:Reserved
just above the maximum normal frequency. When the User
4:PID1 output (F8.039)
torque reference is negative the uncoiler will apply tension and 5: Ex A1
try and rotate at 0.2Hz in reverse, and so take up any slack. The
External analogue reference 1 from SI.IO
uncoiler can operate at any positive frequency applying 6:Ex A2
tension. If it is necessary to accelerate the uncoiler a positive
External analogue reference 2 from SI.IO
User torque reference is used. The frequency will be limited to
the Final demand reference. The operating area is the same as
that for the coiler and is shown below: F4.013 Torque Reference
Range:0~65535ms (0 ms)
Filtering Time
Applies a first-order filter to the selected torque reference
before applying it to the current controllers.
Range:Depend on control
F4.014 Torque Reference
mode (0.0%)
See F4.012.
F4.016 Inertia Compensation

Fig.5.20 Uncoiler operation Range:0,1 (0)
Enable
4: Frequency control with torque feed-forward
If Inertia Compensation Enable (F4.016) is set to one Inertia
The Frequency control torque reference and User torque
Compensation is added to the output of the frequency
reference are summed so that the drive operates under
controller. Inertia Compensation Torque is calculated based on
frequency control, but a torque value may be added to the
the rate of change of the frequency reference. This can be
output of the frequency controller. This can be used to
used in frequency or torque controller applications to provide
improve the regulation of systems where the frequency
the torque necessary to accelerate or decelerate the load.
controller gains need to be low for stability.
5: Bi-directional torque control with frequency override
This mode is similar to coiler/uncoiler mode except that the F4.017 Speed To Torque Range:Depend on control
modulus of the Final demand reference is used in each Control Threshold mode (0.0%)
direction to give an operating area as shown below. The torque threshold when switching from speed control to
torque control.
F4.018 Speed To Torque

Range:0~1000ms (0 ms)
Control Delay
The delay when switching from speed control to torque
control.
F4.019 Flux Control

Range:0,1 (0)
Compensation Disable
If Flux Control Compensation Disable (F4.019) = 0 the
Fig.5.21 Bi-directional torque control with frequency override conversion from the Final Torque Reference (F8.043) to Final

Current Reference (F8.044) uses the estimated level of motor

flux. This is the preferred method of control as it ensures that
Power Drive M PG
the gain of the system remains constant in speed control mode supply
and it gives the correct relationship between torque and
current in torque control modes. However, it is possible to get N.C. B/B
X3 A/A
instability in speed control mode when flux weakening is active
at high speed if the Motor Rated Speed (FH.003) is set to an PG Power
24V
incorrect value. If Flux Control Compensation Disable (F4.019) 24V
= 1 the compensation for flux level is disabled which can 10V
FWD 1-3k
sometimes prevent instability under these conditions.
AI2 PG
PE GND GND
F4.020 User Current Maximum Range:Depend on the drive
Scaling variant (165.0%)
User Current Maximum Scaling (F4.020) defines the variable Fig.5.23 Wiring diagram of PG speed closed-loop control
maximum/minimums user current which is applied to system
Percentage Load (F8.046) and Percentage Torque (F8.013). This Analog feedback control system:
is useful when routing these parameters to an analogue output The analog feedback control system can be formed by using
as it allows the full scale output value to be defined by the the pressure transducer as the feedback sensor of built-in PI.
user. As shown in Fig.5.22, the pressure reference value is set by the
potentiometer and is input through AI1 port in the form of
 Note: voltage, and the pressure feedback value is input through AI2
The maximum value varies between drive sizes with default port in the form of 0 (4) ~ 20 mA current. Both the reference
parameters loaded. For some drive sizes the default value may value and the feedback value are collected through the analog
be reduced below the value given by the parameter range channel; and the terminal FWD controls start and stop of the
limiting. closed-loop running.
The above system can also be used as speed closed loop
Range:Depend on the drive control of TG (tachometer generator).
F4.021 Torque Offset
variant (0.0%) PG closed loop speed control system:
To enable Torque Offset (F4.021), set Torque Offset Select External control terminals X3 can be used together with the
(F4.022) to 1. pulse encoder (PG) to constitute a speed closed loop control
system.
F4.022 Torque Offset Select Range:0,1 (0) As shown in Fig.5.23, reference value of the speed closed loop
is set by the potentiometer in the form of voltage and is input
0:Disable torque offset
through analog channel AI2; but feedback value of PG closed
1:Enable torque offset
loop is set by the pulse encoder in the form of pulse and is
SeeF4.021.
input through external terminal X3, and the terminal FWD
5.5 PID Control Parameters(Group F5) controls start and stop of the closed-loop running.
A and B are bi-phase quadrature pulse outputs of PG (only one
Common closed-loop systems can be divided into two types: signal is used); 24V is connected with the working power
analog closed-loop and pulse closed-loop based on supply of PG; Speed reference adopts signals of 0 to 10 V
differentiation in feedback quantity. Wiring diagrams of the analog voltages; its linearity corresponds to of 0 to the
analog closed-loop control and the pulse feedback closed-loop maximum frequency (F0.006) of synchronous speed n0; fmax is
control, composed by MEV3000, are shown in Fig.5.22 and the maximum frequency (F0.006), and P is the motor’s pole
Fig.5.23 respectively. number (FH.000).
n0=120×fmax/P
Power M P For characteristics of input terminal X3, see function 51 of
Drive
Supply F7.002 speed testing input.
PE
24V  Note:
1. Reference can also adopt digital reference of the operation
24V AI1
panel and reference of the serial port.
10V Pressure 2. Bi-phase input pulse helps to improve speed testing
FWD
sensor
AI2 1-3k
accuracy and make the single-phase pulse input wiring simple.
3. Bi-phase input pulse is allowed to merely adopt quadrature.
GND
4. If terminal 24V of the inverter is used to power the encoder,
the load current maximum value of the optical encoder shall ≤
100 mA.
Fig.5.22 Schematic diagram of build-in PI analog feedback The functional block diagram of MEV2000 built-in PI is as
control system follows:

T F5.025 PID speed ref

F5.002=6
F F5.006
F5.036
PID Digital Reference
0 Preset close-loop ref.
Xi(30)
Xk Xj Xi Output selector 1
1 F5.061 PID Preset Reference 1 0
. Preset close-loop ref.
. Xj(31)
. selector 2
7
Xk(32)
Preset close-loop ref. F5.003 FeedForward
7 F5.067 PID Preset Reference 7 selector 3 F5.033 Selector
feedbk
feedbk
F5.010
F5.001 PID Reference F5.040
F5.031 Selector
0
F5.012 F5.007
F5.042 input F5.037
Digital FeedFoward reference 0
input
F5.009 F5.011
AI1 1 Filter F5.049 F5.041
T F AI1 1
AI2 2
F5.004 PID input filtering
F5.034 time
F5.001/F5.031 = 0 AI2 2
PID
reference F5.008/F5.038
F8.029 Feed Forward Gain
0 F8.037 F5.023
AI1 PID Characteristic selector
F5.053
F5.002 PID Feedback

AI2 1
F5.032 Selector
PID Error limitation F5.024 PID Integral Hold
feedback F5.022/F5.052
F5.021
F5.052
Sample time
AI1 + AI2 2 PID

F8.030
Filter F8.038 Controller
-1 Ts
AI1 – AI2 3 -F5.022/F5.052
F5.005 PID feedback

F5.035 filtering time F5.016
Min(AI1, AI2) 4 PID Gain2 Enable
F5.046
T : True F5.020
5 F5.050
PID Gain Switch Level
Max(AI1, AI2) F : False
F5.013/F5.043 Kp1 F5.017/F5.047 Kp2
X3(52) 6 F5.014/F5.044 Ki1 F5.018/F5.048 Ki2
F5.015/F5.045 Kd1 F5.019/F5.049 Kd2
PID
F4 Torque
Output
F5.060 control
f
F5.026
Preset
Close-loop
PID1 F8.039
0
F0
Reference
t
F5.027
F4.012 = 4 Xi(22)
F5.026 PID Preset frequency

Output from AO F7 Terminal F5.000
PID2 F8.040
F5.030
PID enable
or Yi Function
Fig.5.24 PI functional block diagram

In the above diagram, KP is the proportional gain; Ki is the After the system is determined, the basic process of
integral gain. parameter setting of the closed loop is as follows:
In Fig.5.24, definitions of closed loop reference value, ① Determine the reference channel and the feedback
feedback value, deviation limit and proportional-integral channel of the closed loop (F5.001/F5.031 and
parameter are the same as those of general PI regulation, F5.002/F5.032);
and see F5.001~F5.022 / F5.031~F5.052 for their definitions. ② Set the relationship between the closed loop reference
EV2000 built-in PI closed loop has the following two and the feedback as required by the closed loop
features: (F5.09~F5.012/ F5.039~F5.042);
The relationship between the reference value and the ③ Measure the encoder's revolution number as required
corresponding expected feedback value is defined through by the closed loop (F5.060);
F5.009~F5.012 / F5.039~F5.042. ④ Determine features of the closed loop adjustment. If
For example, in Fig.5.22, when the reference value is the the given motor rotating speed is reverse to the required
analog signal of 0~10V, the expected corresponding one, set the closed loop feature adjustment as the reverse
controlled value is 0~1 MP; the corresponding pressure action (F5.023/F5.053=1);
sensor signal is 4~20 mA; and the relationship between the ⑤ Set functions of the integral adjustment option and the
reference value and expected feedback value is shown in closed loop pre-set frequency (F5.024~F5.027) (limited to
Fig.5.25. PID1);
期望的反馈量
Expected feedback value And adjust the closed loop's filtering time, sampling cycle,
deviation limit, and gain coefficient (F5.013~F5.022).
20mA
F5.000 PID1 Enable Range: 0, 1 (0)

0:PID1 disable
1:PID1 enable
The output of PID1 is used as the speed reference or torque
reference, depending on the drive mode and torque mode.
4mA
F5.001 PID1 Reference Selector Range:0~4(0)
0:Digital
0 10V
Reference 给定量
value Value of F5.006, when F5.002=0~5;
Fig.5.25 Reference value and expected feedback value Value of F5.025, when F5.002=6;
1:AI1
Where, the reference value shall be determined by the
2:AI2
benchmark of 10V; and the feedback value shall be
3: Ex A1
determined by the benchmark of 20 mA.
That is: the reference value adjustment and feedback value 4: Ex A2
adjustment in Fig.5.24 indicate that values of reference and
feedback shall adopt an internal unified value.  Note:
1. The pulse feedback is used to control the speed, and
The closed loop feature is chosen through F5.023/053 to
the analog reference 10V (20mA) corresponds to the
meet demands in different applications.
synchronous speed n0 of motor (n0=60*fmax/p, where, P
In order to meet control requirements in actual control
refers to pole pairs).
systems, if the motor rotating speed increases as the
2. Ex A1/ Ex A2 are the external analogue reference 1/2
reference value increases, such feature of the closed loop is
from SI-IO
a positive action; on the contrary, if the required motor
rotating speed decreases as the reference value increases,
such feature of the closed loop is a reverse action. F5.002 PID1 Feedback Selector Range: 0~8 (0)
As shown in Fig.5.26, definitions of F5.023/F5.053 can meet 0:AI1
requirements of the two closed loop features. 1:AI2
Rotating speed
转速 2:AI1+AI2
正作用
Positive action 3:AI1-AI2
4:Min (AI1, AI2)
5:Max (AI1, AI2)
6:Pulse
7:Ex A1
Reverse
反作用 action
8:Ex A2
 Note:
Closed loop Ex A1/ Ex A2 are the external analogue reference 2 from
闭环给定
reference SI-IO
Fig.5.26 Schematic diagram of closed loop adjustment

F5.003 PID1 Feed Forward Selector Range:0~4 (0)
features

50 Chapter VI Troubleshooting and Abnormality Handling
0:Digital
1:AI1
2:AI2 PID1 max reference
3: Ex A1 corrsponding to
feedback value
4: Ex A2
 Note: PID1 min reference

Ex A1/ Ex A2 the external analogue reference 2 from SI-IO corrsponding to
feedback value
F5.004 PID1 Reference Filtering Range:0.01~50.00s (0.50s) PID1 min PID1 max
F5.005 PID1 Feedback Filtering Range:0.01~50.00s (0.50s) reference reference
Negative regulation of feedback
There are often some interference to the external reference
signal and feedback signal. The channels shall be filtered by
setting the filtering time constant of F5.003 and F5.004. The
PID1 max reference
longer the filtering time is, the stronger the anti-interference
corrsponding to
capacity is, and the slower the response is; the shorter the feedback value
filtering time is, the quicker the respongse is, but the weaker
the anti-interference capacity is.
PID1 min reference
F5.006 PID1 Digital Reference Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%) corrsponding to
feedback value
PID Digital Reference (F5.006) is active when PID Reference
Selector (F5.001) is set to 0. PID1 min PID1 max
reference reference
Fig.5.27 Schematic diagram for reference and feedback
F5.007 PID1 Feed Forward
Range: 0.00~100.00% (0.00%) curves
Reference
F5.007 is valid when F5.003=0. This function realizes the F5.013 PID1 Proportional Gain 1 Range:0.000~4.000 (1.000)
PID1 feedfoward setting of the operation panel or serial F5.014 PID1 Integral Gain 1 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.500)
port.
F5.015 PID1 Differential Gain 1 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.000)
F5.008 PID1 Feed Forward Gain Range:0.00~10.00 (1.00)
This parameter is used to adjust the proportion of the F5.016 PID1 Gain 2 Enable Range:0,1 (0)
feedforward reference. F5.017~F5.020 as well as switching to gain 2 by terminal will
only valid if parameter F5.016 is set to 1
F5.009 PID1 Minimum
Range: 0.0%~F5.011 (0.0%) F5.017 PID1 Proportional Gain
Reference Range:0.000~4.000 (1.000)
2
F5.010 Feedback
Corresponding to PID1 Range: 0.0~100.0% (20.0%) F5.018 PID1 Integral Gain 2 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.500)
Minimum Reference F5.019 PID1 Differential Gain 2 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.000)
F5.011 PID1 Maximum Range: F5.009~100.0%
Reference (100.0%) Range: 0.00~100.00%
F5.020 PID1 Gain switch level
F5.012 Feedback (50.00%)
Corresponding to PID1 Range: 0.0~100.0% (100.0%) Switch to Gain 2 when feedback reached F5.020 this level
Maximum Reference
F5.009 to F5.012 defines the relationship between the F5.021 PID1 Sampling Period Range:0.004~50.000s (0.500s)
reference and feedback value of analogue PID. When PID1 PID Sampling Period (F5.021/F5.051) defines the time period
Reference Selector (F5.001) is set to 0, these parameters are between successive executions of the PID algorithm. The
not active, see F5.001 and F5.002 for the details. The setting actual PID Sampling period has to be an integer multiple of
is the ratio (percentage value) of reference and feedback 4ms therefore if the value entered in this parameter is not
value to (10V or 20mA). an integer multiple of 4ms then it will be rounded down to
Positive regulation of feedback the nearest valid value.
F5.022 PID1 Error Limit Range:0.0~20.0% (2.0%)

This parameter is a percentage of PID reference. PI regulator
stops operation when the feedback value is within this range.
Setting this parameter correctly is helpful to improve the
system output accuracy and stability.

Feedback value  Note:

Error limit If there is no need to use the closed loop preset frequency
Ref function, you can simply set F5.026 and F5.027 to 0.
F5.030 PID2 Enable Range:0,1 (0)

0:PID2 disable
time 1:PID2 enable
Output
Freq  Note:
The output of PID2 can only be used as the source of AO.
F5.031 PID2 Reference Selector Range:0~4 (0)

0: Digital
time Value of F5.036, when F5.032=0~5;
Fig.5.28 Error limit Value of F5.025, when F5.032=6;
1:AI1
F5.023 PID1 Polarity Selector Range:0,1 (0)
2:AI2
0: Positive 3:ExA1
Set PID1 Polarity Selector (F5.023) to 0 if the motor speed is 4:ExA2
required to be increased with the increase of the reference.
1: Negative  Note:
Set PID1 Polarity Selector (F5.23) to 1 if the motor speed is PID2 can not use for speed control.
required to decrease with the increase of the reference.
F5.032 PID2 Feedback Selector Range:0~8 (0)
F5.024 PID1 integral hold Range:0,1 (0)
0:AI1
The integral hold function can be enabled by the user by 1:AI2
setting PID1 Integral Hold (F5.024) =1. 2:AI1+AI2
0: Stop integral regulation when the output frequency 3:AI1-AI2
reaches the upper or lower limits. 4:Min (AI1,AI2)
1: Continous integral regulation when the output frequency 5:Max (AI1,AI2)
reaches the upper or lower limits. 6:Pulse
F5.025 PID Speed Reference Range:0~39000rpm (0rpm) 7:ExA1
This parameter is active when PID reference Selector (F5.001) 8:ExA2
is set to 0 and PID feedback Selector (F5.002) is set to 6.
F5.033 PID2 Feed Forward Selector Range:0~2 (0)
F5.026 PID1 Preset 0:Digital
Range:0.00~F0.006 (0.00Hz)
Frequency 1:AI1
F5.027 PID1 Preset 2:AI2
Range:0.0~3600.0s (0.0s) 3:ExA1
Frequency Holding Time
4:ExA2
This function can make the PID loop to go stable quicker.
When the PID1 is enabled, the frequency will ramp up to the
preset frequency (F5.026) within the Acc time, and then the F5.034 PID2 Reference Filtering Range:0.01~50.00s (0.50s)
PID1 will start operating after the preset frequency (F5.026) F5.035 PID2 Feedback Filtering Range:0.01~50.00s (0.50s)
for certain time (F5.027). There are often some interference to the external reference
输出频率
Output frequency signal and feedback signal. The channels shall be filtered by
setting the filtering time constant of F5.034 and F5.035. The
longer the filtering time is, the stronger the anti-interference
预置频率
Pre-set frequency
capacity is, and the slower the response is; the shorter the
filtering time is, the quicker the respongse is, but the weaker
the anti-interference capacity is.
F5.036 PID2 Digital

时间
Time T Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
Reference
预置频率保持时间
Pre-set frequency retention time PID Digital Reference (F5.036) is active when PID Reference
Selector (F5.031) is set to 0.
Fig.5.29 Schematic Diagram of Closed Loop Preset Frequency
Running F5.037 PID2 Feed Forward Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)

Reference See F5.022 for the allowed maximum deviation for the
system output compared to the closed loop reference.
F5.037 is valid when F5.033=0. This function realizes the
PID2 feedfoward setting of the operation panel or serial
port. F5.053 PID2 Polarity Selector Range:0,1 (0)
0:Positive
F5.038 PID2 Feed Forward Set PID2 Characteristic Selector (F5.053) to 0 if the motor
Range:0.00~10.00 (1.00) Speed is required to be increased with the increase of the
Gain
This parameter is used to adjust the proportion of the reference.
feedforward reference. 1: Negative
Set PID2 Characteristic Selector (F5.053) to 1 if the motor
speed is required to decrease with the increase of the
F5.039 PID2 Minimum
Range:0.0%~F5.041 (0.0%) reference.
Reference
F5.040 Feedback F5.060 Pulse Lines Per Revolution Range:0~65535 (256)
Corresponding to PID2 Range:0.0~100.0% (20.0%)
This parameter defines the Lines per revolution of pulse
Minimum Reference
feedback when PID feedback Selector (F5.002) is set to 6
F5.041 PID2 Maximum (Pulse).
Range:F5.039~100.0% (100.0%)
Reference
F5.042 Feedback F5.061 PID Preset Reference1 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
Corresponding to PID2 Range:0.0~100.0% (100.0%)
F5.062 PID Preset Reference2 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
Maximum Reference
F5.039 to F5.042 define the relationship between the F5.063 PID Preset Reference3 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
reference and feedback value of analogue PID. When PID2 F5.064 PID Preset Reference4 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
Reference Selector (F5.031) is set to 0, these parameters are F5.065 PID Preset Reference5 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
not active, see F5.031 and F5.032 for the details. The setting
is the ratio (percentage value) of reference and feedback F5.066 PID Preset Reference6 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
value to (10V or 20mA). F5.067 PID Preset Reference7 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00%)
Except the three channels defined in F5.001 and F5.031, the
F5.043 PID2 Proportional Gain 1 Range:0.000~4.000 (1.000) multi-section closed loop reference defined in
F5.044 PID2 Integral Gain 1 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.500) F5.061~F5.067 can also be used as the closed loop reference
in closed loop reference channels.
F5.045 PID2 Differential Gain 1 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.000) The selection of 1~7 sections of the multi-section closed
loop reference can be switched flexibly through the external
F5.046 PID2 Gain 2 Enable Range:0,1 (0) terminals, please refer to F7.000~F7.005 terminal function
F5.47~F5.50 as well as switching to gain 2 by terminal will 30~32. It can also be used together with the simple PLC, as
only valid if parameter F5.046 is set to 1 shown in the description of Group FE parameter
The priority level of multi-section closed loop reference
control is higher than the reference channels defined in
F5.047 PID2 Proportional Gain 2 Range:0.000~4.000 (1.000)
F5.001 and F5.031.
F5.048 PID2 Integral Gain 2 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.500)
F5.049 PID2 Differential Gain 2 Range:0.000~4.000 (0.000)
5.6 Traverse Operating and BC Brake
Parameters (Group F6)
F5.050 PID2 Gain switch level Range:0.00~100.00% (50.00%)
Switch to Gain 2 when feedback reached F5.050 this level Traverse operation is widely used in textile and chemical
fiber industry. The typical application is shown in Fig.5.30.
Traverse operation process: First, the drive accelerates to
F5.051 PID2 Sampling Period Range:0.004~50.000s (0.500s)
the preset frequency of traverse operation (F6.002) within
PID Sampling Period (F5.051) defines the time period the Acc time and then waits for certain time (F6.003). The
between successive executions of the PID algorithm. The drive transits to the central frequency within Acc/Dec time,
actual PID Sampling period has to be an integer multiple of and at last the drive traverse according to the preset
4ms therefore if the value entered in this parameter is not traverse amplitude (F6.004), jitter frequency (F6.005),
an integer multiple of 4ms then it will be rounded down to traverse cycle (F6.006) and rising time of traverse operation
the nearest valid value. (F6.007) until it receives a stopping command and stops
within Dec time.
F5.052 PID2 Error Limit Range:0.0~20.0% (2.0%)
 Note:

Operating
freq. (Hz) Traverse operation
amplitude Aw=Fset*F6.004
Upper limit of
freq. FH
+ Aw
Central Freq. Fset
Lower limit of freq. FL - Aw a1
Preset freq. Jitter

freq.=AW*F6.005
a1
Accelerate Waiting time

Rising t
according F6.003 time=F6.006*F6.007 Decelerate
to Acc time According
Traverse to Dec time
Run operating
cycle
Command
Stop
Command
Fig.5.30 Traverse operation

The central frequency is actually the preset frequency of A B C D
simple operation (except PLC, traverse operation, jog),
multi-step speed operation or PLCc operations; Start Mode:
Traverse operating function is disabled automatically in Jog 0 = auto start
1 = manual start mode
operation or close-loop operation process.
If PLC operation and traverse operation start at the same time,
Traverse Operating
the traverse operation is disabled when the drive transits from
Amplitude Control:
one PLC operating stage to another stage. The drive will 0 = variable amplitude
accelerate to the preset frequency of PLC operation and then 1 = fixed amplitude
start traverse operation. The drive will decelerate to stop
within the Dec time set in PLC operating stage. Restart Mode:
0 = Restart at the
frequency and direction
F6.000 Traverse function memorized before stopping
Range:0~1 (0)
selection 1 = Restart
F6.000 decides whether the traverse operating function is
enabled Save Parameters on
0: disabled power down:
0 = Save
1: enabled 1 = No save
Fig.5.31 Traverse operating mode

F6.001 Traverse operating
Range: 0~15 (0) Where,
mode
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
F6.001 is used to set the traverse operating mode and the
meanings of LED display are shown in Fig.5.31. C: Ten’s place D: Unit’s place
Unit’s place(D): start mode
0: auto mode
The drive will first operate at preset frequency of traverse
operation (F6.002) for certain time (F6.003), and then enter
traverse mode automatically.
1: Manual mode
If the multi-function terminal (Xi is set to No.33 function) is
enabled, the drive will enter traverse mode. If the terminal is
disabled, the drive will end traverse operation and operate at
the pre-traverse frequency (F6.002).
Ten’s place(C): traverse operating amplitude
0: variable amplitude
Traverse operating amplitude AW changes with the central
frequency and the change rate is defined by F6.004.
1: Fixed amplitude

Traverse operating amplitude AW is determined by Max

frequency and F6.004.  Note
Hundred’s place(B): start mode of traverse operation You can select traverse mode and S curve at the same time to
0: The drive starts and runs at the frequency and direction enable smooth traverse operation.
before it stops
1: Restart F6.008 BC Brake Release Range:0,1 (0)
Thousand’s place(A): saving the traverse operating
The functions of BC Brake Release (F6.008) and BC Enable
parameters upon power outage
(F6.009) are the same in all drive modes and are described
The traverse operating parameters can be saved when power
below. The functions of other brake controller parameters vary
outage occurs. The function is effective when the hundred’s
between drive modes, and these are described in separate
place is set at 0.
sections. The mechanical brake control function can be used to
0: save
control an electro-mechanical brake via digital I/O.BC Brake
1: not save
Release (F6.008) = 0 when the brake should be applied and 1
when the brake should be released. Normally this should be
 Note
routed to a digital output to control the mechanical brake.
Terminal Xi (No. 34 function) can be used to reset the traverse
Open loop mode
operating status.
Current detection
The Current Magnitude (F8.013) is compared to an upper and
F6.002 Pre-traverse lower threshold by a comparator with hysteresis to give torque
Range:0.00Hz~F0.012 (0.00Hz)
frequency present and drive output open detection functions respectively.
F6.003 Holding time of BC Lower Current Threshold (F6.011) and BC Upper Current
Range:0.0~3600.0s (0.0s) Threshold (F6.010) are given as a percentage of Motor Rated
Pre-traverse frequency
F6.002 is used to define the drive’s operating frequency before Current (FH.002). BC Upper Current Threshold (F6.010) should
entering traverse mode. be set to the current level that indicates that there is
If auto-start mode is selected, F6.003 is used to define the magnetising current and sufficient torque producing current in
time when the drive operates at pre-traverse frequency. If the motor to deliver the required amount of torque when the
manual start mode is selected, F6.03 is disabled. brake is released. The output of the comparator remains active
Refer to Fig.5.30. after this level has been reached unless the current
subsequently falls below BC Lower Current Threshold (F6.011)
which should be set to the required level to detect the
F6.004 Traverse amplitude Range:0.0~50.0% (0.0%)
condition where the motor has been disconnected from the
Variable amplitude: AW = central frequency × F6.04 drive. If BC Lower Current Threshold (F6.011) ≥ BC Upper
Fixed amplitude: AW = Max operating frequency Current Threshold (F6.010) then the upper threshold applies
F0.006×F6.004 with a hysteresis band of 0. If BC Lower Current Threshold
(F6.011) = BC Upper Current Threshold (F6.010) = 0 then the
 Note output of the comparator is always one.
The traverse operating frequency is restricted by the upper Frequency detection
and lower limit of frequency. Traverse operation will be The frequency comparator is used on starting, to detect when
abnormal if the frequency is set incorrectly. the motor frequency has reached a level where the motor can
produce the required amount of torque to ensure that the
F6.005 Jitter Range: 0.0~50.0% (ratio to amplitude) motor rotates in the demanded direction when the brake is
frequency (0.0%) released. BC Brake Release Frequency (F6.012) should be set
As shown in Fig.5.30 there is no jitter frequency if F6.005 is set to a level slightly above the motor slip frequency that is likely
to 0. to occur under the highest expected load that is applied to the
motor when the brake is released.
F6.006 Traverse operating Range:0.0~999.0s (10.0s) The brake apply frequency threshold is used to ensure that the
cycle brake is applied before the motor frequency reaches zero and
F6.006 defines a complete cycle of traverse operation to prevent the motor rotating (in the reverse direction due to
including rising and falling processes. an overhauling load for example) during the brake apply time.
If the frequency falls below BC Brake Apply Frequency (F6.013),
 Note but the motor is not required to stop (i.e. reversing direction
In traverse mode, do not select auto Acc/Dec operating mode, without stopping) then reference system will be enabled, and
otherwise the traverse operating cycle will be abnormal. so the brake is not applied. This prevents the brake from
activating and de-activating as the motor passes through zero
F6.007 Rising time of frequency. If the frequency falls below BC Brake Apply
Range:0.0~100.0% (50.0%) Frequency (F6.013) and the reference is off then the brake will
triangle wave
Rising time of traverse operation=F6.006×F6.007. be applied. The current detection, frequency detection and
Falling time of traverse operation=F6.006× (1-F6.007). Drive Active levels are used to allow the brake to be released.
The unit is second. Refer to Fig.5.30

Brake controller sequence

The brake controller sequence is shown for forward movement in Fig.5.32.
BC Brake Apply
BC Brake Release Frequency (F6.013)
Frequency (F6.012)
Output Frequency (F8.011)

BC Upper Current
Threshold (F6.010)
Current Magnitude (F8.013)
Drive Active
Reference On
BC Brake Release (F6.008)
Ramp Hold
BC Pre-brake Release BC Post-brake Release

Delay (F6.014) Delay (F6.015)
Brake controller sequence: Open-loop mode
Fig.5.32 Brake controller sequence: Open-loop mode
F6.009 BC Enable Range:0,1 (0) Release Delay

0:BC Brake controller disable F6.016 BC Initial Direction Range:0~2 (0)
1:BC Brake controller enable 0:Ref
If BC Enable (F6.009) = 0, the brake controller is disabled. 1:Forward
If BC Enable (F6.009) = 1, the brake controller is enabled with 2:Reverse
I/O set up to control the brake via the relay output or via Defines the initial direction of the brake.
digital I/O. (eg. Set F7.000 = 68 or F7.011 = 20). Forced initial direction
If BC Initial Direction (F6.016) = 0 then the brake controller
F6.010 BC Upper Current operates as shown in Fig.5.33 and the user reference is used
Range:0~200% (50%)
Threshold to define the direction of operation. If BC Initial Direction
F6.011 BC Lower Current (F6.016) = 1 then Force Reference Direction (FX. XXX) is used
Range:0.0~200.0% (10.0%) force the frequency reference to the positive modulus of its
Threshold
value until the end of the post-brake release period whatever
F6.012 BC Brake Release
Range:0.00~20.00 Hz (1.00 Hz) the direction of the reference from the user. This can be used
Frequency
for example to ensure that in a vertical application the motor
F6.013 BC Brake Apply will definitely hold the load at the point when the brake is
Range:0.00~20.00 Hz (2.00 Hz)
Frequency released. The diagram below shows the brake controller
F6.014 BC Brake Delay Range:0.0~25.0 s (1.0 s) sequence when BC Initial Direction (F6.016) = 1, but the user
reference direction is reverse.
F6.015 BC Post-brake Range:0.0~25.0 s (1.0 s)

BC Brake Release
Frequency (F6.12)
BC Brake Apply
Frequency (F6.13)
Output Frequency (F8.11)
BC Upper Current
Threshold (F6.10)
Current Magnitude (F8.13)
Drive Active
Reference On
BC Brake Release (F6.08)
Ramp Hold
Force Reference Direction

(F6.016=1)
BC Pre-brake Release
Delay (F6.14) BC Post-brake Release
Delay (F6.15)
Fig.5.33 Brake controller sequence with BC Initial Direction (F6.16) = 1 and reverse reference

Chapter VI Troubleshooting and Abnormality Handling 57
RFC-A Setting Functions Mode

In closed loop mode, the torque produced may reduce as the
External terminals for Forward jog
frequency passes through zero. A brake controller similar to 9 Digital input
operation
the one used for open loop mode is provided as shown in the
diagram below. External terminals for reverse jog
10 Digital input
The brake controller operates in the same way as the open operation
loop mode brake controller except for the following 11 Coast-to-stop (FRS) Digital input
differences. 12 Frequency ramp up (UP) Digital input
1 Final Demand Reference (F8.009) is used instead of
Output Frequency (F8.010). 13 Frequency ramp down (DN) Digital input
2 The frequency thresholds are replaced with estimated 14 Pause the PLC operation Digital input
frequency thresholds. 15 Acc/Dec prohibit Digital input
3 Current detection is replaced with flux and current
16 3-wire operation control Digital input
detection as described below.
Flux and current detection External interrupt signal
17 Digital input
The flux and current detection signal is made active to allow normally-open input
the brake to be released when the motor flux exceeds 90% of External interrupt signal
its rated level. The flux and current detection signal remains 18 Digital input
normally-close input
active unless the motor current falls below BC Lower Current
19 DC injection braking command (DB) Digital input
Threshold (F6.011) or the drive is disabled. BC Lower Current
Threshold (F6.011) is used to detect if the motor has been 20 Close-loop disabled Digital input
disconnected from the drive and should be set to a suitable 21 PLC disabled Digital input
level to detect this condition. 22 Frequency selector 1 Digital input
23 Frequency selector 2 Digital input
F6.017 BC Brake Apply
Range:0.00~25.00 Hz (0.00 Hz) 24 Frequency selector 3 Digital input
Through Zero Threshold
BC Brake Apply Through Zero Threshold Frequency reference is input via
25 Digital input
To prevent the load from falling during this period in a vertical terminal Ai1 forcibly
application, it is possible to apply the brake momentarily to 26 Reserved Digital input
hold the load. If F6.017 = 0.00 then the brake is not applied
Terminal control mode is forcibly
when the frequency passes through zero unless the reference 27 Digital input
enabled
isn’t active. If F6.017 has a non-zero value then the brake is
applied while |Output Frequency (F8.010)| <= F6.017. F6.017 28 Control mode selector 1 Digital input
should be not be set to a value lower than BC Brake Release 29 Control mode selector 2 Digital input
Frequency (F6.012) otherwise the brake will never be 30 Preset close-loop reference 1 Digital input
released.
31 Preset close-loop reference 2 Digital input
5.7 Terminal Function(Group F7) 32 Preset close-loop reference 3 Digital input
33 Start traverse operation Digital input
F7.000 Multi-function terminal X1/Y1 Range:0~101(0)
34 Reset the traverse operating status Digital input
F7.001 Multi-function terminal X2 Range:0~46(0)
35 External stop command Digital input
The functions of multi-function input terminal X1~X6 are
extensive. You can select functions of X1/Y1, X2 according to 36 Speed control to torque control. Digital input
your application by setting F7.000 ~F7.001. Refer to Table.5.5. 37 Drive operation prohibiting Digital input
38 Reserved Digital input
Setting Functions Mode
39 Length clearing Digital input
0 No function Digital input
Auxiliary reference frequency
1 Preset frequency 1 Digital input 40 Digital input
clearing
2 Preset frequency 2 Digital input 41 Reset PLC stopping status Digital input
3 Preset frequency 3 Digital input 42 Counter’s zero-clearing signal input Digital input
4 Acc/Dec time 1 Digital input 43 Counter’s trig signal input Digital input
5 Acc/Dec time 2 Digital input 44 PID1 switch to gain 2 Digital input
External fault signal normally-open 45 PID2 switch to gain 2 Digital input
6 Digital input
input
46 PID2 prohibiting Digital input
External fault signal normally-close
7 Digital input 47 Motor map selection Digital input
input
48~49 Spares Digital input
8 RESET signal Digital input

Setting Functions Mode Setting Functions Mode

50 to 54 Reserved Reserved 0 ~ 100% output
55 to 59 Spares Digital input Analog Input AI2 Pulse frequency
99
60 Drive running signal (RUN) Digital output 0 ~ 100% output
61 Frequency arriving signal (FAR) Digital output Output power [0~2 times of rated Pulse frequency
100
power] output
Frequency detection threshold
62 Digital output Serial communication (F7.040) Pulse frequency
(FDT1) 101
[0~65535] output
Frequency detection threshold
63 Digital output Table.5.5 Multi-function selection
(FDT2)
64 Overload signal (OL) Digital output Introductions to functions listed in Table.5.5.
1~3: setting speed reference
65 Low voltage lock-up signal (LU) Digital output Up to 8 speed references can be set through different ON/OFF
66 External stopping command (EXT) Digital output combinations of terminals K3, K2 and K1.
67 High limit of frequency (FHL) Digital output 4~5: selecting Acc/Dec time
68 Lower limit of frequency (FLL) Digital output
K3 K2 K1
Frequency setting
69 Zero-speed running Digital output
Common operating
70 Completion of simple PLC operation Digital output OFF OFF OFF
frequency
71 PLC cycle completion indication Digital output OFF OFF ON Preset frequency 1
72 Early counting value arriving Digital output OFF ON OFF Preset frequency 2
OFF ON ON Preset frequency 3
73 Last counting value arriving Digital output
ON OFF OFF Preset frequency 4
74 Preset length arriving indication Digital output ON OFF ON Preset frequency 5
75 Drive ready (RDY) Digital output ON ON OFF Preset frequency 6
76 Drive fails Digital output ON ON ON Preset frequency 7
77 Extended function 1 of host Digital output Table.5.6 On/Off combinations of terminals
Upper and lower limits of traverse The frequency references will be used in MS speed operation
78 Digital output and simple PLC operation. Take MS speed operation for
operating frequency
example:
79 Preset operating time out Digital output
Definitions of terminals X1, X2 and X3:
80 Brake release Digital output After setting F7.00 to 1, F7.01 to 2 and F7.03 to 3, terminals X1,
81~89 Spares Spare X2 and X3 can be used in MS speed operation, as shown in
Table.5.6.
Output frequency before slip 7速
Pulse frequency Speed 7
90 compensation Output
输出频率
6速
Speed 6
output frequency 5速
Speed 5
[0~Max output frequency] Speed 3

4速
Speed 4
3速
Output frequency after slip Common
2速
Speed 2
Pulse frequency 普通运

running
Speed 1
1速
91 compensation 行频率
frequency
output
[0~Max output frequency] Running
command
Time
时间
运转命令
Final reference selected [0~Max Pulse frequency
92 K1
output frequency] output
K2
Output current
Pulse frequency K3
93 [0~1.75 times of drive rated current Fig.5.34 Multi-step speed operation
output
(OL)]
In Fig.5.34 terminal control is selected. The operating direction
Output current can be controlled by K4 and K5. Common operating frequency
Pulse frequency
94 [0~1.75 times of drive rated current and preset frequency 1~7 can be selected through different
output
(OL)] On/Off combinations of K1, K2 and K3.
Output torque
Pulse frequency
95 [0~1.75 times of drive rated torque
output
(OL)]
Output voltage [0~1.35 times of Pulse frequency
96
drive’s rated voltage] output
Bus voltage [0~√3 times of drive’s Pulse frequency
97
rated voltage] output
98 Analog Input AI1 Pulse frequency

If the setting is 11, the function of the terminal is the same

U
Three with that defined by F2.008. It is convenient for remote
phase AC
supply
V
W
M control.
12~13: Frequency ramp UP/DN
PE If the setting is 12~13, the terminal can be used to increase or
decrease frequency. Its function is the same with  and 
K1 keys on the panel, which enables remote control. This terminal
X1
K2 K4
is enabled when F0.000=1 or F9.001=2. Increase or decrease
X2 FWD rate is determined by F7.009.
K3 K5
X3 REV 14: Pausing PLC operation:
24V 24V If the setting is 14, the terminal is used to pause the PLC
operation and the drive operates at zero frequency when the
Fig.5.35 Wiring for multi-speed operation terminal is enabled. There is no timing of PLC operation. If the
terminal is disabled, the drive will start on the fly and continue
the PLC operation. Refer FE.000~FE.014 to how to use this
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Acc/Dec time selection terminal.
OFF OFF Acc time 1/Dec time 1 15: Acc/Dec prohibiting command
OFF ON Acc time 2/Dec time 2 If the setting is 15, the terminal can make the motor operate
at present speed without being influenced by external signal
ON OFF Acc time 3/Dec time 3 (except stopping command).
ON ON Acc time 4/Dec time 4
Table.5.7 Acc/Dec time selection  Note:
This terminal is disabled in normal Dec-to-stop process.
Through the On/Off combinations of terminals, Acc/Dec time
16: 3-wire operation control.
1~4 can be selected.
Refer to F7.008, operation mode 2 and 3 (3-wire operation
6~7: inputting external fault signal (normally-open/close input)
mode 1 and 2).
If the setting is 6~7, the fault signal of external equipment can
17~18: inputting external stopping signal
be input via the terminal, which is convenient for the drive to
(Normally-open/close input)
monitor the external equipment. Once the drive receives the
During operating, the drive stops its output when it receives
fault signal, it will display “Er.0006”. The fault signal has two
external STOP signal. Once the signal is removed, the drive will
inputting modes: normally-open and normally-close input.
start on the fly and resume normal operation.
There are two inputting modes of external stopping signal:
normally-open and normally-close input. As shown in Fig.5.36
As shown in Fig.5.36. X2 is normally-open contact and X3 is
normally-close command. KM is the relay for inputting
external fault signal.
8: inputting external reset signal
If the setting is 8, the drive can be reset via this terminal when
the drive has a fault. The function of this terminal is the same
with that of RESET on the panel.
9~10: inputting jog operation signal (JOGF/JOGR)
If the setting is 9~10, this terminal can enable jog operation.
JOGF is for inputting forward jog command and JOGR is for
reverse jog command. Jog frequency, interval and Acc/Dec
time of jog operation are defined in F3.013~F3.016.
Fig.5.36 Normally-open/close input 11: Coast-to-stop
As shown in Fig.5.36 X2 is normally-open contact and X3 is If the setting is 11, the function of the terminal is the same
normally-close command. KM is the relay for inputting with that defined by F2.008. It is convenient for remote
external fault signal. control.
8: inputting external reset signal 12~13: Frequency ramp UP/DN
If the setting is 8, the drive can be reset via this terminal when If the setting is 12~13, the terminal can be used to increase or
the drive has a fault. The function of this terminal is the same
with that of RESET on the panel. keys on the panel, which enables remote control. This terminal
9~10: inputting jog operation signal (JOGF/JOGR) is enabled when F0.000=1 or F9.001=2. Increase or decrease
If the setting is 9~10, this terminal can enable jog operation. rate is determined by F7.009.
JOGF is for inputting forward jog command and JOGR is for 14: Pausing PLC operation:
reverse jog command. Jog frequency, interval and Acc/Dec If the setting is 14, the terminal is used to pause the PLC
time of jog operation are defined in F3.013~F3.016. operation and the drive operates at zero frequency when the
11: Coast-to-stop terminal is enabled. There is no timing of PLC operation. If the
terminal is disabled, the drive will start on the fly and continue

the PLC operation. Refer FE.000~FE.014 to how to use this If the setting is 25, the frequency reference will be input via
terminal. terminal AI1 forcibly. The frequency selector will be changed
15: Acc/Dec prohibiting command to the previous one if this terminal function is disabled.
If the setting is 15, the terminal can make the motor operate 26: Reserved
at present speed without being influenced by external signal 27: Terminal control mode is forcibly enabled
(except stopping command). When this terminal function is enabled, the operating
Note: command is input through this terminal forcibly. The
This terminal is disabled in normal Dec-to-stop process. frequency selector will be changed to the previous one if this
16: 3-wire operation control. terminal function is disabled.
, X5 is normally-open contact and X6 is normally-close contact. 28~29: On/Off combinations of terminals 1 and 2 for different
control modes selection
 Note:
Different with No. 6~7 functions, the external stopping signal Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Control modes
will not trigger alarm and the drive can resume normal
OFF OFF Hold the control mode
operation after the signal is removed.
19: DC injection braking signal OFF ON Panel control mode
If the setting is 19, the terminal can be used to perform DC ON OFF Terminal control mode
injection braking to the motor that is running so as to realize ON ON Serial port control mode
the emergent stop and accurate location of the motor. Initial
Table.5.9 Control modes
braking frequency and braking current are defined by F2.015
and F2.011. Braking time is the greater value between F2.12 The control modes in Table.5.9 can be selected by the
and the effective continuous time defined by this control different On/Off combinations of terminals 1 and 2.
terminal. 30~32: Selecting preset close-loop reference frequencies via
20: disabling close-loop function On/Off combinations of terminals 1~3.
If the setting is 20, the terminal can be used to realize the
flexible switching between close-loop operation and low level Terminal Terminal Terminal Preset close-loop reference
operating mode. 3 2 1 selection
21: disabling PLC Close-loop reference is
OFF OFF OFF
If the setting is 21, the terminal is used to realize the flexible decided by F5.01
switching between PLC operation and low level operating Preset close-loop reference
OFF OFF ON
mode 1
Preset close-loop reference
OFF ON OFF
 Note: 2
The switching between operation modes can be enabled only Preset close-loop reference
in PLC operation (unit’s place of FE.000 is not 0). OF ON ON
3
When the drive is switched to low level operating mode, its Preset close-loop reference
start/stop, operating direction, ACC/Dec time should be ON OFF OFF
4
compliant with corresponding operating modes accordingly. Preset close-loop reference
22~24: Terminals 1~3 for reference frequency selector. ON OFF ON
5
Different ON/OFF combinations of terminals 1, 2 and 3 can Preset close-loop reference
select different reference frequency selectors as shown in ON ON OFF
6
Table.5.8. The drive will act to the command from the terminal Preset close-loop reference
or F0.000, whichever comes late. ON ON ON
7
Table.5.10 Preset close-loop reference selection
Terminal 3 Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Freq. selector The preset close-loop references in Table.5.10 can be selected
OFF OFF OFF Hold the setting by the different On/Off combinations of terminals 1~3.
33: Start traverse operation
OFF OFF ON Digital setting 1 When the traverse operation is set to “manual start”, the
traverse function can be enabled if this terminal is enabled,
OFF ON OFF Digital setting 2
see Group F6 parameters for details.
OFF ON ON Digital setting 3 34: Reset the traverse operating status
If traverse operation is enabled, switching on this terminal can
ON OFF OFF AI1 analog input clear the memorized information about traverse operation no
ON OFF ON AI2 analog input matter the drive is in auto start or manual start mode.
Traverse operation restarts after this terminal is disconnected.
ON ON OFF PULSE terminal input See group F6 parameters.
ON ON ON PULSE terminal input 35: external stopping command
This stopping command is active in all control modes. When
Table.5.8 requency selectors this terminal is enabled, the drive will stop in the mode
25: Frequency reference is input via terminal AI1 forcibly defined in F2.008.

36:Speed control to torque control. 68: Lower limit of frequency (FLL)

See F4.020, F4.021 for details The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the preset
37: disabling the drive’s operation frequency is higher than lower limit of frequency and the
If this terminal is enabled, the drive that is operating will coast operating frequency reaches the lower limit of frequency.
to stop and is prohibited to restart. This function is mainly 69: Zero-speed running
used in application with requirements of safety protection. The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive’s output
Note: if this function is enabled the keypad will display frequency is 0 and the drive is in operating status.
“prohibition” 70: Completion of simple PLC operation stages
38: Reserved The terminal outputs the indicating signal (pulse signal, 500ms
39: Clear the length information width) if the present stage of PLC operation is finished.
When this terminal is enabled, the setting (length) of F9.017 71: PLC cycle completion indication
will be cleared to zero. The terminal outputs the indicating signal (signal pulse, 500ms
40: Clear the setting of auxiliary reference frequency width) if one cycle of PLC operation is finished.
This function is only active for auxiliary reference frequency 72: Early counting value arriving
(F9.001=1, 2 and 3). When this terminal is enabled, the See F7.033 and F7.034 for details.
auxiliary frequency is cleared to zero and the reference is 73: Last counting value arriving
determined by main reference frequency. See F7.033 and F7.034 for details.
41: Reset the stopping status of PLC operation 74: Preset length arrival indication
In stopping status of PLC operation, the memorized PLC The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the actual length
operating information (operating stage, operating time, defined by F9.017 is longer than the length defined by F9.016.
operating frequency, etc.) will be cleared when this terminal is Function of terminal X4 should be set to No.50 function.
enabled. See Group FE parameters. 75: Drive ready (RDY)
42: clearing the counter to zero. If RDY signal is output, it means the drive has no fault, its DC
When the setting is 42, this terminal is used to clear the bus voltage is normal and it can receive starting command.
counter to zero. 76: Drive fails
43: inputting triggering signal to counter The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive has
When the setting is 43, this terminal is used to input pulse faults.
signal to the internal counter of the drive. The highest pulse 77: Extended function 1 of host
frequency is 200Hz. The present counting value can be saved he output signal of terminal Y1, Y2, TC1 or TC2 is directly
at power off. See F7.033 and F7.034 for details. controlled by a serial port. See F7.036 for details.
This function is available on terminal X1~X5. 78: Upper and lower limits of traverse operating frequency
44:PID1 switch to gain 2 If traverse operating function is selected, an indicating signal
45:PID2 switch to gain 2 will be output if the traverse operating frequency calculated
46:PID2 inhibit by central frequency is higher than upper limit of frequency
47:Motor map selection. (F0.012) or lower than the lower limit of frequency (F0.013), as
48~59:Reserved shown in Fig.5.37
60: Drive running signal (RUN).
Upper limit frequency
When the drive is in operating status, there will be running 上限频率
indication signal output by this terminal.
61: Frequency arriving signal (FAR) swing 频率
Central中心
摆频 frequency
See F7.013 for details.
62: Frequency detection threshold (FDT1)
See F7.014 to F7.015 for details. 下限频率
Lower limit frequency
63: Frequency detection threshold (FDT2)
See F7.016 to F7.017 for details.
64: Overload signal (OL)
When the inverter output current exceeds the overload
detection level of FL.005, and the retention time exceeds the Y1：摆频超出上下限阀值
The swing frequency exceeds the
upper and lower limit thresholds
overload detection time of FL.006, the relevant indication Fig.5.37 Swing Amplitude Limit
signal will be output. It is usually used for overload pre-alarm.
Refer to Fig. 5-49 in group FL. 79:Preset operating time out
65: Low voltage lock-up signal (LU). The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive’s total
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the DC bus voltage operating time (Fn.01) reaches preset operating time (Fn.00).
is lower than the low voltage limit, and the LED displays “UU”. 80:Brake release output
66: External trip (EXT) See F6.008 for details.
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the drive outputs 81~89:Reserved
tripping signal caused by external fault (Er.0006). 90-100:Frequency output. See table 5-5 which indicates the
67: High limit of frequency (FHL) scope. Max frequency is defined by F7.032.
The terminal outputs the indicating signal if the preset 101:Frequency output controlled by F7.040. See F7.040 for
frequency is higher than upper limit of frequency and the details. Max frequency is defined by F7.032..
operating frequency reaches the upper limit of frequency.

F7.002 Multi-function input terminal X3 Range:0~55(0) MEV2000

The functions of digital input X3 are defined by the parameter Running
F7.002,Settings and functions are shown in Table.5.11 K2 K1 Command K1
0 0 Stop FWD
Setting Functions Mode 1 0 Run K2
Reverse REV
0 No function Digital input 0 1 Run
Forward
1-47 Consistent with F7.000=1-47 Digital input 1 1 Stop 24V
47-52 Reserved
Fig.5.38 2-wire operating mode 1
Temperature measurement input
Thermistor 1:2-wire operating mode 2
53 with short circuit detection
input
(Resistance <50Ohm)
Temperature measurement input MEV2000
Thermistor
54 without short circuit detection but
input K2 K1 Running
with Thermistor trip Command K1
Temperature measurement input Thermistor 0 0 Stop FWD
55 K2
with no trips input 1 0 Stop
REV
Table.5.11 Multi-function input selection menu
0 1 Run
Forward
1-47:Consistent with F7.000=1-47 . Run 24V
48-52:Reserved 1 1 Reverse
53-55:Thermistor input Fig.5.39 2-wire operating mode 2
See FL.037-FL.041 parameter setting.
2:3-wire operating mode 1
F7.003 Reserved MEV2000
SB2
FWD
F7.004 Reserved
SB1
Xi
F7.005 Multi-function input terminal
Range:0~50(0) SB3
Ai2/X4* REV
The Ai2/X4 functions are defined by the setting values of
F7.005. The setting values and functions are given in 24V
Table.5.12.
Value Functions Mode Where:
0 No function Digital Input SB1:Start button
1-46 Similar to F7.000 = 1 to 47 Digital Input SB2:Run forward button
SB3:Run reverse button
47-49 Reserved Digital Input
Terminal Xi is the multi-function input terminal of X1~X5. At
50 Analog input mode Analog input this time, the function of this terminal should be defined as
Table.5.12 Multi-function input selection table No.16 function of “3-wire operation”.
1-47:See F7.000 3:3-wire operating mode 2
48-49:Reserved MEV2000
SB2
50:Analog input mode.
FWD
Running
K Command
F7.008 FWD/REV operating SB1
Range:0~3(0) 0 Run Forward Xi
modes setup
This parameter defines four operating modes controlled by 1 Run Reverse K
REV
external terminals.
0:2-wire operating mode 1 24V

where:
SB1:Start button
SB2:Run button
Terminal Xi is the multi-function input terminal of X1~X5. At this

time, the function of this terminal should be defined as No.16 F7.012 Multi-function relay 2 terminal Range: 0~20(0)
function of “3-wire operation”. The output functions of relay 2 terminal are the same as the
functions in F7.011.
 Note:
In terminal control mode, for 2-wire operating mode 1 and 2,  Note:
although the terminal is enabled, the drive will not run The relay 2 terminal is owned only by large frames from Frame
forward or reverse when the drive stops due to the STOP 5 to Frame 8.
command from other stop command, such as: terminal
function 11 or 35 (see F7.000~F7.005), PLC stop after single
F7.013 Frequency arriving signal Range:0.00~550.00Hz(2.50H
cycle, stop due to the arrival of fixed length, pressing STOP key
(FAR) z)
(see F9.007). If you need to start the drive again, enable
If the drive’s output frequency is within the detecting range of
FWD/REV again. However, when the drive stops due to a fault,
preset frequency, a pulse signal will be output. Set F7.000,
it will start immediately if the terminal FWD/REV is enabled
F7.001 = 61 and F7.011 = 1,a pulse signal will be output
and the fault is cleared.
through Y1, Y2 and relay terminal.
F7.009 UP/DN rate Range:0.01~99.99Hz/s(1.00Hz/s) Output

F7.009 is used to define the change rate of reference
frequency that is changed by terminal UP/DN.
Preset 1/2
freq.
 Note: detecting range
When this function is used if the time to go from 0.00Hz to full
Time
speed takes more than 250 seconds then it is saturated to 250
seconds. If the time to go from 0.00Hz to full speed takes less Y
than 1 second then it is saturated to 4 milliseconds.
Time
Fig.5.42 Frequency arriving signal
F7.011 Multi-function relay 1 terminal Range: 0~20(0)
The output function of relay1 terminal is defined by F7.011. F7.014 FDT1 level Range: 0.00~550.00Hz(50.00Hz)
The setting values and functions are given in Table.5.13. F7.015 FDT1 lag Range: 0.00~550.00Hz(1.00Hz)
F7.016 FDT2 level Range: 0.00~550.00Hz(25.00Hz)
Value Functions Value Functions F7.017 FDT2 lag Range: 0.00~550.00Hz(1.00Hz)
0 Drive running signal 1 Frequency arriving Take F7.14~F7.15 for example: when the drive’s output
(RUN) signal (FAR) frequency reaches a certain preset frequency (FDT1 level), it
2 Frequency detection 3 Frequency detection outputs an indicating signal until its output frequency drops
threshold (FDT1) threshold (FDT2) below a certain frequency of FDT1 level (FDT1 level-FDT1 lag),
as shown in Fig.5.43. For FDT1, Y1 and relay output terminal is
4 5 Low voltage lock-up
Overload signal (OL) set by F7.000=62, F7.001=62 and F7.011=2, respectively. As for
signal (LU)
FDT2, Y1 and relay output terminal is set by F7.000=51,
6 External stopping 7 High limit of frequency F7.001=63 and F7.011=3, respectively.
command (EXT) (FHL) Output
frequency
8 Lower limit of 9
Zero-speed running
frequency (FLL) FDT1 level FDT1 lag
10 Completion of simple 11 PLC cycle completion
PLC operation indication
Time
12 Early counting value 13 Last counting value
arriving arriving Y
14 Preset length arriving 15 Time

Drive ready (RDY)
indication Fig.5.43 FDT level
16 17 Extended function 1 of
Drive fails
host F7.018~F7.024 Reserved
18 Upper and lower 19 Reserved
Preset operating time
limits of traverse
out
operating frequency
F7.025 Multi-function analog
20 Brake release Range: 0~13(0)
output terminal AO1
Table.5.13 relay 1 terminal output funcion AO1 is the analog output terminals. Its output scaling is
The description of function 0~20 is the same as function 60~80 defined by F7.030. The same terminal Y3 can be selected as a
in F7.000,F7.001. digital output. The relationship between the displaying range
and the output values of AO1 and DO are given in Table.5.14.

frequency of Y1
Setting Functions Mode 0:1KHz
Output frequency before slip 15.1 bit resolution at Fmax
0 compensation Analog output 1:2 KHz
(0~Max output frequency) 14.1 bit resolution at Fmax
Output frequency after slip 2:5 KHz
1 compensation Analog output 12.8 bit resolution at Fmax
(0~Max output frequency) 3:10KHz
11.8 bit resolution at Fmax
Preset frequency Defines the maximum frequency required at the frequency
2 Analog output
(0~Max output frequency) output if Y1’s function is a frequency output. Due to
Output current limitations in the hardware, higher output frequencies do not
3 (0~1.75 times of drive rated Analog output offer the best resolution at the top end of the frequency
current (OL)) range.1, 2, 5, and 10kHz (0~3).
Output current
4 (0~1. 75 times ofmotor rated Analog output F7.033 Preset last counting value Range: F7.034~9999(0)
current (RFC-A)) F7.034 Preset early counting value Range: 0~F7.033 (0)
Output torque Preset last counting value: it defines after Xi receives the
5 (0~2 times of motor rated torque Analog output number of pulse F7.033, the relay or Yi (bi-direction
(OL)) input/output terminal)will give a signal.
Output voltage For example: as shown in Fig.5.44, when the eighth pulse
6 (0~1.35 times of drive’s rated Analog output signal is received by terminal Xi, Y1 outputs an indicating signal.
voltage) At this time F7.033=8.
Bus voltage Preset early counting value: when Xi receives the number of
7 (0~√3 times of drive’s rated Analog output pulse F7.034, Yi will give a signal which will last until F7.033
voltage) arrives.
As shown in Fig.5.44, when Xi receives the 5th pulse, Y2
8 AI1 Analog output outputs an indication signal. It lasts until X1 receives the 8th
9 AI2 Analog output pulse. In this case, F7.034=5, F7.033=8. F7.034 is invalid if it is
Output power bigger than F7.033.
10 Analog output
(0~2 times of rated power)
Serial communication AO1 Xi输入
Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
11 (F7.037) Analog output

(0~65535) Y1
12 Reserved Analog output
13 PID2 Output Analog output
Table.5.14 Displaying range of output terminals Y2
The description of these functions in Table.5.14 is the same as Fig.5.44 Schematic Diagram of Set Count Value Reference and
corresponding description of functions in F7.000~F7.001. Designated Count Value Reference
 Note:
F7.026 ~F7.029 Reserved The terminals X1~X5 are available, with the maximum
frequency of 200Hz.
F7.030 Analogue output 1 Range:
scaling 0.0~4000.0%(100.0%) Range:
F7.035 Digital IO invert
For the AO1 analog output, if you need to change the display 000000000000~111111111111
control
range or correction meter error, you can adjust the output (000000000000)
gains and output offset. F7.035 defines the terminal’s positive and negative logic.
Positive logic: Terminal Xi is enabled if it is connected to the
 Note: common terminal;
The parameters will affect the analog output in real time Negative logic: Terminal Xi is disabled if it is connected to the
during the change.If the output value is negative after common terminal;
adjusting, the absolute value should be output. If the bit is set at 0, it means positive logic; if set at 1, it means
negative logic.
F7.031 Reserved If F7.039=0 the common terminal is 0V. If F7.039=1 the
common terminal is 24V.
The corresponding relation between bit and terminal in F7.035
F7.032 Maximum output Range: 0~3(0) is given in Table.5.15.

Bit Terminal Condition

Bit Controlled Terminal 8 TC1 F7.011 = 17 Set 1
0 X1/Y1 9 TC2 F7.012 = 17 Set 1
1 X2 10 Reserved
2 X3 11 Reserved
3 X4 Table.5.16 Definition of the Terminal Control Word and
4 Reserved Condition for Triggering The Corresponding Terminals
5 Reserved  Note:
6 FWD If F7.000=65 and FF.006=1 as well as the corresponding bits of
the terminal control word are set simultaneously, the status of
7 REV
terminals Y1 , instead of X1 , will be triggered,. The terminals
8 TC1 X1 will be triggered only when the values of F7.000 are not set
9 TC2 to 65.
10 Reserved
F7.037 serial communication
11 Reserved Range:0~65535 (0)
AO1 scaling
Table.5.15 The corresponding relation between bit and
The value of this parameter, which controls the analog output,
terminal
shall be set manually or through serial communication.
 Note: If F7.025 = 11, the output signal is controlled by F7.037 which
Factory setting of all the terminals is positive logic. can be controlled by serial port. Full scale 65535 corresponds
to the Max output of 10V (or 20mA).
Range:
F7.036 Terminal
000000000000~111111111111(00000000 F7.038 Reserved
Control Word
0000)
The terminal control word is an analog of actual terminals
F7.039 Reserved
upon receiving the commands from the upstream devices.
Each bit of the terminal control word represents one terminal,
with the value representing the terminal status: bit0~11: F7.040 serial communication
Range:0~65535 (0)
terminal X1~X4, FWD, REV, TC1, TC2, Y1. When the virtual pulse frequency output scaling
terminal of the upstream device is valid, the actual terminal is The value of this parameter, which controls the pulse
invalid, which means the virtual terminal can be applied as the frequency output, shall be set manually or through serial
actual terminal. communication.
When FF.006=1, the status of the terminals X1~X4, FWD and If F7.001 = 80, the frequency output signal is controlled by
REV corresponding to the bits of the terminal control word will F7.040 which can be controlled by serial port. Full scale 65535
be triggered. corresponds to the max frequency output set by F7.032.
When F7.011, F7.012=17, the status of the terminals TC1 and
TC2 corresponding to the bits of the terminal control word will F7.041 Analogue Output 1
be triggered. Range: -100.0~100.0%(0.0%)
Offset
When F7.000,=65, the status of the terminals Y1
See F7.030.
corresponding to the bits of the terminal control word will be
triggered.
See Table.5.16 for the definition of the terminal control word F7.042 Range: -100.0~100.0%(0.0%)
and the condition for triggering the corresponding terminals:
F7.043 Y1 output on delay Range: 0.0~3600.0s(0.0s)
Bit Terminal Condition Y1 output can be delayed to turn on by F7.043 or turn off by
X1 FF.006 = 1 Set 1 F7.044.
0 If the demand turns off before F7.043 then the demand is
Y1 F7.000 = 77
ignored.
X2 FF.006 = 1 Set 1
1
2 X3 FF.006 = 1 Set 1 Demand
3 X4 FF.006 = 1 Set 1
Y1 invert
4 Reserved F7.035 bit 0
5 Reserved Y1 terminal
6 FWD FF.006 = 1 Set 1 F7.043 F7.044 F7.043 F7.043 F7.044 F7.043 F7.044
7 REV FF.006 = 1 Set 1

Bit Parameter
Fig.5.45 Output on/off delay 6 External Counting Value
F7.044 Y1 output off delay Range: 0.0~3600.0s(0.0s) 7 Terminal Status
8 Actual Length
5.8 Display (Group F8) 9 Preset Length
F8.001 Displayed parameter Range:0000000000~1111111 10 PID2 feecback%
group 1 during operation 111 (1111111111) 11 PID2 Reference %
12 Reserved
Bit Parameter 13 Reserved
Output Frequency (before 14 Reserved
0
compensation)
15 Reserved
Output Frequency (after Table.5.18 Displayed parameter group 2 during operation
1
compensation)
 Note
2 Set Frequency
When the rotating speed and line speed are displayed, these
3 Output Current (A) values can be revised by pressing ▲ and ▼ directly (no need
4 Actual Speed (rpm) to switch to frequency displaying status).
5 Set Speed (rpm) When F8.001 and F8.002 are all set to 0, the frequency before
compensation will be displayed.
6 Actual Line Speed (m/s)
Press key to scroll through the parameters set in
7 Set Line Speed (m/s) F8.002 during operation.
8 Output Power
9 Output Torque (%) F8.003 Customer Defined
Range:0.0~1000.0% (100.0%)
10 Reserved Speed Scaling
11 Reserved Customer defined speed scaling (F8.003) is used to calibrate
the speed values that are displayed in status mode. There is no
12 Reserved impact on the actual speed of the motor.
13 Reserved The relationship between other parameters and these 3
14 Reserved parameters (F8.003, F8.004, F8.005) is shown in Table.5.19:
Result Parameter = Original Parameter * Scaling
15 Reserved
Table.5.17 Displayed parameter group 1 during operation
Result parameter
Result
VF Scaling
Displayed parameter group 1 during operation (F8.001) and parameter RFC
PG Non-PG
Status Mode Parameter 2 (F8.002) control the parameters that F8.014 Measured
can be cycled through using the ESC/BACK ( ) button F8.010 *
(Actual frequency F8.003
whilst the drive is running and in status mode. 60 / p1
speed) *60 / p
If Bit is 0, the parameter will not be displayed; Final Final
If Bit is 1, the parameter will be displayed. F8.015 (Set Demand Demand
For example, Unit place of LED (Bit0) is to display the “output F8.003
speed) Reference Reference
frequency before compensation”, if Bit0=0, the parameter will * 60 / p * 60 / p
not be displayed, if Bit0=1, the parameter will be displayed. F8.016
Measured
(Output F8.010 F8.004
frequency
F8.002 Displayed parameter Range:0000000000~1111111 line speed)
group 2 during operation 111 (000000000000) Final Final
F8.017 (Set
Demand Demand F8.004
line speed)
Reference Reference
Bit Parameter F8.029
PID 1
(PID1 PID 1 reference
0 Output Voltage (V) reference F8.005
Reference)
1 Bus Voltage (v) F8.030
2 Analog Input 1 (%) PID 1
(PID1 PID 1 feedback
feedback F8.005
3 Analog Input 2 (%) Feedback)
4 PID1 feedback (%) Table.5.19 The relationship between scaling and result
5 PID1 Reference (%)
1
P is number of motor’s pole-pairs

parameter Displays the output frequency of the drive

Open-loop mode
The Output Frequency (F8.010) is the sum of the post ramp
F8.004 Customer Defined
Range:0.0~1000.0% (100.0%) reference and the motor slip compensation frequency.
Line Speed Scaling
RFC-A mode
Customer defined Line speed scaling (F8.004) is used to The output frequency is not controlled directly, but the Output
calibrate the line speed values that are displayed in status Frequency (F8.010) is a measurement of the frequency applied
mode. There is no impact on the actual speed of the motor. to the motor.
See F8.003.
F8.011 Output Voltage Range:-650V~650V
F8.005 Customer Defined
Range:0.0~1000.0% (100.0%) The Output Voltage (F8.011) is the r.m.s line to line voltage at
Analog Scaling
the a.c. terminals of the drive.
Customer Defined Analog Scaling (F8.005) is used to calibrate
the values of Analogue Closed-Loop Feedback and Analog
F8.012 Current Magnitude Range:-999.99~999.99A
Closed-Loop Setting that are selected using parameter Status
Mode – Running Parameters 2 (F8.002) and that are visible in Current Magnitude (F8.012) is the instantaneous drive output
status mode with the drive running. See F8.003 current scaled so that it represents the r.m.s. phase current in
Amps under steady state conditions.
F8.006 Reference Selected Indicator Range:0~11
F8.013 Percentage Torque Range:−1000.0~1000.0%
Reference Selected Indicator (F8.006) is used to displays which
reference is currently selected Percentage Torque (F8.013) gives the torque producing
0:Keypad current as a percentage of the rated torque producing current
Digital reference 1. Keypad reference selected. for the motor, but with an additional adjustment above rated
1:Terminal frequency so that it gives percentage torque. Above rated
Digital reference 2. Terminal reference selected. frequency, the Percentage Torque (F8.013) is adjusted as
2:Comm follows:
Main reference is from comm reference. Percentage Torque (F8.013) = percentage load x Motor Rated
3:AI1 Frequency (F0.007) / Output Frequency (F8.010)
Main reference is from Analogue reference 1
31 31
4:AI2 F8.014 Actual speed Range:-2 ~2 – 1 rpm
Main reference is from Analogue reference 2 The actual speed (F8.014) is the value scaled by the actual
5:Pulse speed coefficient (F8.003). See F8.003.
Main reference is from Pulse input reference
6::ExAi1 F8.015 SET speed
31 31
Range:-2 ~2 – 1 rpm
External analogue reference 1
The set speed (F8.015) is the value scaled by the actual speed
7: ExAi2
coefficient (F8.003). See F8.003.
External analogue reference 2
8:Preset 31 31
Main reference is from preset F8.016 Output line speed Range:-2 ~2 – 1 mm/s
9:PLC The output line speed (F8.016) is the value scaled by the line
Main reference is from PLC function speed coefficient (F8.004). See F8.004
10:PID1
Main reference is from PID1 F8.017 Set line speed
31 31
Range:-2 ~2 – 1 mm/s
11: Jog
The set line speed (F8.017) is the value scaled by the line
Jog reference
speed coefficient (F8.004). See F8.004.
F8.007 Main Reference Range:0.00~550.00Hz

F8.018 Output Power Range:−999.99~999.99KW
Displays the main reference from the reference system
The Output Power (F8.018) is the power flowing via the a.c.
terminals of the drive. The power is derived as the dot product
F8.008 Auxiliary reference Range:0.00~550.00Hz of the output voltage and current vectors, and so this is correct
Displays the auxiliary reference from the reference system even if the motor parameters are incorrect and the motor
model does not align the reference frame with the flux axis of
F8.009 Final Reference Selected Range:0.00~550.00Hz a motor. A positive value of power indicates power flowing
from the drive to the motor, a negative value of power
Final Reference Selected (F8.009) displays the final reference
indicates power flowing from the motor to the drive.
from the mathematical calculation of Main Reference (F8.007)
and Auxiliary Reference (F8.008)
F8.019 Reset Energy Meter Range:0,1 ( 0 )
F8.010 Output Frequency Range:0.00~550.00Hz Energy Meter: MWh (F8.020) and Energy Meter: kWh (F8.021)
accumulate the energy transferred through the drive. A

positive energy value indicates net transfer of energy from the Bit Terminal name
drive to the motor. If Reset Energy Meter (F8.019) = 1 then
0 X1/Y1
Energy Meter: MWh (F8.020) and Energy Meter: kWh (F8.021)
are held at zero. If Reset Energy Meter (F8.019) = 0 then the 1 X2
energy meter is enabled and will accumulate the energy flow. 2 X3
If the maximum or minimum of Energy Meter: MWh (F8.020) 3 X4
is reached the parameter does not rollover and is instead 4 Reserved
clamped at the maximum or minimum value.
5 Reserved
6 FWD
F8.020 Energy Meter: MWh Range:-999.9~999.9MWh
7 REV
See Reset Energy Meter (F8.019)
8 TC1
F8.021 Energy Meter: kWh Range:-99.9~99.9KWh 9 Reserved
See Reset Energy Meter (F8.019) 10 Reserved
11 Reserved
F8.022 DC Link Voltage Range:0~999V 12 Reserved
DC Link Voltage (F8.022) gives the voltage across the DC link of 13 Reserved
the drive. Table.5.21 Digital I/O Read Word
Range:000000000000000~1111
F8.023 Status Word F8.025 Analog Input 1 Range:-100.00~100.00% (0.00% )
11111111111
The value for Analog Input 1 (F8.025) is defined for the
The bits in Status Word (F8.023) mirror the status bit
different modes in the table below.
parameters as shown in Table.5.20. Where the parameters do
not exist in any mode the bit remains at zero.
Mode Input Level
Bit Description Voltage (Input Voltage/ 10V) x 100.00%
0 Drive healthy 0-20mA (Input Current / 20mA) x 100.00%
1 Drive Active 20-0mA (20mA - Input Current) / 20mA x 100.00%
2 At zero frequency 4-20mA (Input Current - 4mA) / 16mA x 100.00%
3 Running at or below minimum frequency 20-4mA (20mA - Input Current) / 16mA x 100.00%
4 Lower limit of frequency (FLL) Table.5.22 Analog Input AI1 calculation
5 At frequency F8.026 Analog Input 2 Range:0.00~100.00% (0.00% )
6 High limit of frequency (FHL) See calculation in Table.5.22.
7 Rated load reached
 Note:
8 Current limit active
Digital mode: This input can also be configured as a digital
9 Regenerating input in which case this parameter will indicate 0.00% or
10 Braking IGBT active 100.00% depending on the state of the input.
11 Braking resistor alarm
F8.027 Analog output 1 Range:0.0~100.0% (0.0% )
12 Reverse direction commanded
Displays the value of analog output 1. This value refers to the
13 Reverse direction running AO output value adjusted by F7.030 and F7.041.
14 Supply loss
Table.5.20 Status Word functional descriptionDigital I/O Read F8.028 Reserved
Word (F8.024) reflects the state of X1-X6 and both relays as The AO output value adjusted by F7.031 and F7.042.
given in Table.5.21. Each bit matches the value of the actual
input before any inversion or toggle selections are applied. F8.029 PID1 Reference Range:-100.00~100.00% (0.00%)
The bit value for digital outputs will include the state inversion
It’s used for displaying the percentage of PID1 reference. The
if selected in the invert/toggle parameter.
PID1 reference (F8.029) is the value scaled by PID1 coefficient
(F8.005).
Range:00000000000000~11111
F8.024 Digital I/O Read Word
111111111
F8.030 PID1 Feedback Range:-100.00~100.00% (0.00% )
It’s used for displaying the percentage of PID1 feedback. The
Bit Terminal name PID1 feedback (F8.030) is the value scaled by PID1 coefficient
(F8.005).

F8.031 Motor Temperature Range:-50~300°C (0 ) F8.037 PID2 Reference Range:-100.00~100.00% ()

Displays the temperature of the motor based on the Displays the value of the reference for PID2
thermistor resistance to temperature characteristic in motor.
F8.038 PID2 Feedback Range:-100.00~100.00% (%)
F8.032 Total power-on time Range:0~65535h ( 0 ) Displays the value of the feedback for PID2
F8.033 Total fan operation time Range:0~65535h ( 0 ) F8.039 PID1 Output Range:-100.00~100.00% (%)
Displays the output for PID1
F8.034 Status Mode – Stop Range:00000000000000~111111
Parameters 11111111 (00000111111111) F8.040 PID2 Output Range:-100.00~100.00% (%)
Displays the output for PID2Displays the output for PID2
Bit Parameter
F8.041 Magnetising Current Range:-999.99~999.99A (A)
0 Final selected reference
Shows the instantaneous level of magnetising current
1 External counting value
2 Running rotating speed (rpm) F8.042 Torque Producing
Range:-999.99~999.99A (A)
3 Preset rotating speed (rpm) Current
4 Running line speed (m/s) Shows the instantaneous level of torque producing current
5 Preset line speed (m/s)
F8.043 Final Torque Reference Range:-999.99~999.99% (%)
6 Analog input 1 (%)
Open-loop modes
7 Analog input 2 (%)
The Final Torque Reference (F8.043) will display the same as
8 PID1 Feedback (%) Torque Reference (F4.013) as a percentage.
9 PID1 Reference (%)
10 Actual length RFC modes
The Frequency Controller Output can include a feed forward
11 Preset length
torque that will provide the torque necessary to accelerate the
12 Terminal status load inertia. This can be combined with the Torque Reference
13 DC bus voltage (F4.013) as defined by the Torque Mode Selector (F4.011) to
14 Reserved give the Final Torque Reference (F8.043) as a percentage of
the rated torque for the motor..
15 Reserved
Table.5.23 Status Mode – Stop Parameters F8.044 Final Current
Range:-999.9~999.9% (%)
F8.034 define the parameter that can be displayed by keypad Reference
in stop status. Open loop:
If Bit is 0, the parameter will not be displayed; Output Frequency (F8.010)| ≤ Motor Rated Frequency
If Bit is 1, the parameter will be displayed. (F0.007)
For example, Unit place of LED (Bit0) is to display the “Final
selected reference”, if Bit0=0, the parameter will not be Current reference = Final Torque Reference (F8.043)
displayed, if Bit0=1, the parameter will be displayed. |Output Frequency (F8.010)| > Motor Rated Frequency
(F0.007)
 Note:
This parameter controls the parameters that can be cycled Current reference = Final Torque Reference (F8.043) x Motor
through using the ESC/BACK ( ) button whilst the drive is Rated Frequency (F0.007) / Output Frequency (F8.010)
in the READY state and the keypad is in status mode. RFC modes:
Current reference = Final Torque Reference (F8.043) x Motor
Range:0.0~100.0% Rated Flux / Motor FluxNote:
F8.035 Motor thermal accumulator It is possible to disable the flux compensation by setting Flux
(0.0%)
Control Compensation Disable (F4.023) to 1. This is only
Shows the level of the motor protection accumulator.
normally required to prevent motor instability when an
inaccurate value for Motor Rated Speed (FH.003) is being used
F8.036 Command Selected Indicator Range:0~2 in RFC-A mode.
Displays which command source is currently selected
0: Keypad F8.045 Final Current Limit Range:-999.9~999.9% (175.0%)
1: Terminals
Shows the final current limit that is applied to the torque
2: Comms
producing current.

F8.046 Percentage Load Range:-999.9~999.9% (%) Remote

远程 Local
本地
Shows the level of torque producing current as a percentage of
Terminal
端子控制操作面板
rated torque producing current for the motor control方式
mode Multi-functional input Operation
多功能输入端子Xi
terminal Xi 控制方式
panel control
mode
5.9 Enhanced Parameter (Group F9)
Modified function
修改功能码F0.004
code F0.004
F9.000 Command to
Range:000~666 (000) A1 setting mode Programming/exit,
编程/退出、功能/数据 Digital setting
Reference Binding A1设定方式 function/data 数字设定方式1
mode 1
This function defines the combination between three running
command channels and six frequency reference channels,
which facilitates the synchronous switching.
Thousand Hundre Ten Unit
place d place place place Power
上电 up
Frequency reference selection in key pad
mode:
0:No binding
1:Keypad
Fig.5.47 Remote and Local Control
2:Terminal To do that, perform the following setting:
3:Preset (used for comms as well)
4: Ai1 When F0.004=1, set to terminal control mode, and it will be
5: Ai2 under remote control after power-up;
6:Pulse input
7:ExA1 When F7.000=28 and F7.001=29, set multi-functional input
8:ExA2
terminal X1 and X2 to the selection of running command
Frequency reference selection in terminal
mode:
channels;
0~8:Same as above When F7.008=1, set to two-wire control mode 2, and it will
Frequency reference selection in comm run forward when FWD is enabled, and run backward when
mode:
0~8: Same as above
REV is enabled.
When F9.000=041, set the terminal control mode to bundle
Reserved
the AI1 analog reference, and operation panel control mode to
Fig.5.46 Running Command Channels Bundled with Frequency bundle digital setting 1.
Reference Channels
The above frequency reference channels have the same U
Three
method as the frequency reference mode F0.000.
Different running command channels can be bundled with the
phase AC
supply
V
W
M
same frequency reference channel.
PE
The online synchronous switching after bundling can be
achieved by the following methods:
Method 1: modify the parameter “Motor 1 operating K1
0V
Command Source Selector F0.004”; K2 K1
Ai1 FWD
Method 2: select the combination of the terminals using the
K3 K2
running command channels (the terminal function should be +10V REV
defined, and X1~X5 should be set to 28, 29). K3
X1
For example: X2 K4
To facilitate the local and remote control, the following 24V
requirements should be met:
①Switch the running command channels: terminals for Fig.5.48 Hardware Wiring Diagram for Remote & Local Control
remote switching, and modified parameter “Motor 1  Note:
operating Command Source Selector F0.004” for local 000 is the default setting: frequency reference channel
switching. synchronous switching is disable
② Use operation panel for local control: press RUN button to
run, and STOP button to stop, and the frequency is adjusted by
F9.001 Auxiliary reference selector Range:0 ~ 8(0)
and .
0: None
③ use external terminals for remote control: close FWD
Without auxiliary frequency reference channel
button to run forward, and REV button to run backward, and
1: Operation panel
the frequency is adjusted by AI1.
Digital reference 1. Operation reference selection. The initial
④After power-up the drive should be terminal control mode.
value of the reference comes from F9.002 and the setting
frequency can be changed through the operation panel
and key.
2: Terminal UP/DN regulation
Digital reference 2. Terminal reference selection.

The initial value of the reference comes from F9.002 and the 0: Inactive
setting frequency can be changed through the terminal Do not adjust the combined frequency after combining the
Up/Dn. main and auxiliary reference frequencies.
3: Serial port reference 1: Adjust according to the maximum output frequency F0.006
Digital reference 3. Serial port reference selection. The initial Final reference frequency = combined frequency + F0.006 ×
value of the reference comes from F9.002 and the setting F9.007
frequency can be changed through FF.009. 2: Adjust according to the current frequency
4: AI1 analog reference Final reference frequency = combined frequency + combined
AI1 analog reference frequency × F9.007
5: AI2 analog reference
AI2 analog reference F9.007 Final Reference Range:-100.0%~100.0%
6: Terminal pulse reference adjustment coefficient (0.0%)
Terminal pulse input reference
7:ExA1 See the description of the selection parameter (F9.006) for
8:ExA2 final reference adjustment.
F9.008 STOP/RESET Key Function

Range: 0 ~ 2 (0)
 Note: Selector
The auxiliary reference channel is invalid when it is the same It is used to set the function scope and working mode of the
with the main frequency reference channel. STOP/RESET button on the operation panel as the STOP
button.
F9.002 Auxiliary digital Range:F0.012~F0.013 Hz 0: Valid only in the running command channel of the operation
reference (0.00) panel
F9.003 is enabled only when F9.001=1~3 and is the initial 1: Valid in the running command channel of the operation
value of the auxiliary frequency reference under these three panel/terminal/serial port
modes. When this button is pressed, the inverter will stop according to
the stop mode.
2: Valid in the running command channel of the operation
F9.003 Digital Auxiliary
Range:0,1 (0) panel/terminal/serial port
Reference Save Selector
When this button is pressed in the running command channel
F9.004 is enabled only when F9.003.001=0,1. With this of the operation panel, the inverter will stop according to the
function, you can choose whether to save the auxiliary stop mode; when this button is pressed in the running
frequency into F9.002 when the inverter is power-down. command channel of the terminal or serial port, the inverter
0: The auxiliary frequency will be saved upon power-down will alarm (failure code: Er.0006) and stop freely.
The auxiliary frequency will be saved into F9.002 upon
power-down  Note:
1: The auxiliary frequency will not be saved upon power-down When the STOP/RESET button is used as the failure reset
The auxiliary frequency will not be saved into F9.002 upon button “RESET”, it is enabled in all the running command
power-down channels.
F9.004 Digital Auxiliary F9.009 Keypad lock selector Range:0 ~ 2 (0)

Range:0,1 (0)
Reference Stop Selector
It is used to set the locking range of buttons on the operation
F9.004 is enabled only when F9.001=1, 2. panel.
0: The auxiliary frequency will be maintained upon stop 0: Lock all the buttons on the operation panel. When the
1: The auxiliary frequency will be reset upon stop locking function is enabled, all the buttons on the operation
panel are disabled.
F9.005 Auxiliary Reference Invert Range:0,1 (0) 1: Lock all the buttons except the STOP/RESET button. When
0: Postive the locking function is enabled, only the STOP/RESET button
The sum of the main frequency and the auxiliary frequency is can be used.
used as the setting frequency. 2: Lock all the buttons except the RUN and STOP buttons.
1: Negative When the locking function is enabled, only the RUN and STOP
The difference between the main frequency and the auxiliary buttons can be used.
frequency is used as the setting frequency.
 Note:
F9.006 Final Reference This parameter is only used to select the locking function. The
Range:0 ~ 2 (0) locking & unlocking functions are enabled through the
adjustment selector
operation panel. The operation panel will be locked when
This function determines the adjustment mode of the final
pressing and holding both the ENTER and UP buttons for 3
reference frequency (the combined frequency after the main
seconds. The operation panel will be unlocked when pressing
reference frequency is added with the auxiliary reference
and holding both the ENTER and DOWN buttons for 3 seconds.
frequency).

When the load of one inverter is heavier, the inverter will

F9.010 Cooling fan control Range:0~4 (2) automatically reduce the output frequency according to the
parameter set via this function to remove some load. During
0: Not running.
commissioning, this value can be adjusted gradually from the
1: Force the heatsink fan to run at full speed.
small value. See Fig.5.50 for the connection of the load and
2: The heatsink fan runs automatically.
output frequency:
The inverter controls the heatsink fan to run at full speed or
low speed or stop it according to the temperature (Fn.003) of 转矩
Torque Drooping control action
下垂控制动作
heatsink 1. No drooping control
无下垂控制
3: The heatsink fan runs automatically.
The inverter controls the heatsink fan to run at full speed or 额定转矩
Rated
torque
low speed according to the temperature (Fn.003) of heatsink
1.
4: The heatsink fan keeps running at low speed.
5: Same as 2 but with lower threshold using minimum speed.
o Speed
转速
 Note: 同步转速
Synchronous
speed
1. When F9.010 = 0, the inverter equipped with an option
card will send an alarm of fault Er. 0219 if the temperature of
the heatsink 1 is high, and the option card will switch to
standby mode; when F9.010=0, under certain conditions, the
heatsink fan runs at low speed if there is an option card
installed in the inverter. Fig.5.50 Features of Drooping Control Motor
2. When the temperature of the heatsink 1 is low, the
heatsink fan will stop running if the mode 2 is selected. F9.013 Over-Modulation Enable Range:0,1 (1)
However, the heatsink fan will keep running at low speed if the The inverter boosts the output voltage through improving the
mode 3 is selected. utilization of its bus voltage under long-term low grid voltage
3. The heatsink fan of Size1 inverter runs only at full speed (below 85% of the rated voltage) and overload. This function
or no speed, but not at multi speed. determines whether to enable the overmodulation function.
0: disabled, the overmodulation function is disabled.
F9.011 Acc/Dec rate unit selector Range:0,1 (0) 1: enabled, the overmodulation function is enabled.
This function is used to determine the unit of
acceleration/deceleration time.  Note:
0: s The output current harmonics will increase slightly when the
1: min overmodulation function is enabled.
This function applies to all the acceleration/deceleration F9.014 Zero-frequency
Range:0.00~550.00Hz (0.00Hz)
processes other than the jog running. threshold
The longest acceleration/deceleration time is 3200min, which F9.015 Zero-frequency
is suitable to the situation where the Range:0.00~550.00Hz (0.00Hz)
hysteresis
acceleration/deceleration is required for a long time.
These two parameters are used to set the zero frequency
hysteresis control function.
 Note:
The example is analog AI1 current reference channel, see
It’s recommended to choose the second as the time unit.
Fig.5.51:
Starting process:
F9.012 Droop Frequency Range:0.00~10.00Hz (0.00Hz) After the running command is sent, the motor begins to start
This function is applicable to the application of multiple and accelerate to the frequency corresponding to analog AI1
inverters driving the same load. It can realize the uniform current input according to the acceleration time only when the
distribution of power. The example is the driving device in analog AI1 current input reaches or exceeds the specified
Fig.5.49 (5 inverter drives the conveyors of 5 motors) value Ib, and the corresponding setting frequency reaches fb.
Stop process:
负载
Load During operation, the inverter will not stop immediately when
the current value of AI1 is reduced to Ib, and it will stop
传送带
Conveyor
outputting only when the current value of AI1 keeps reducing
to Ia and the corresponding setting frequency is fa.
电机
Motor fa, defined by F9.014, refers to the zero frequency running
threshold. fb-fa, defined by F9.015, refers to the zero
2 3 4 5 frequency hysteresis.
变频器
Inverter 1
With this function, the inverter can enter sleep mode to
achieve energy-saving operation, and avoid the frequent
Fig.5.49 Schematic Diagram of Drooping Control

starting at the threshold frequency through the width of the calculation function will be enabled only after the terminal is
hysteresis. disconnected.
A1Current input The actual length F9.017 will be automatically saved upon
power-down.
The fixed-length stop function is disabled when the setting
length F9.016 is 0, but the length calculation function remains
enabled.
Example of the application of fixed-length stop:
Spindle
Original setting
frequency
Speed sensor Speed shaft
Actual setting
frequency
Motor
Inverter
Fig.5.52 Application of Fixed-length Stop

Original setting
frequency In Fig.5.52, the inverter drives the motor which drives the
Zero frequency hysteresis
threshold
spindle shaft to rotate with the conveyor. The speed shaft
Zero frequency hysteresis contacts the spindle to measure its linear speed and transfer it
threshold
Ic corresponding frequency to the inverter by pulses using the counting terminal. The
of A1 input
inverter detects the pulses and calculates the actual length.
Fig.5.51 Zero Frequency Hysteresis Running When the actual length ≥ setting length, the inverter will
F9.016 Length Reference Range:0~65535m (0m) automatically send a command to stop to end the spinning
process. The operator removes the spindle and closes the
F9.017 actual length Range:0~65535m (0m) length reset terminals (X1~X3, X5 should choose the
parameter 39) to clear the actual length. After it starts again,
F9.018 Ratio of length Range:0.001~30.000 (1.000) the next production continues.
F9.019 Length correction
Range:0.001~1.000 (1.000)
coefficient F9.022 Low-voltage compensation Enable Range:0,1 (0)
F9.020 Perimeter of axis Range:1~1000mm (100mm) The instantaneous stop non-stop function is used for defining
whether the inverter automatically performs low voltage
F9.021 Number of pulses per compensation in case of volatage decreasing or instantaneous
Range:1~9999 (1)
cycle undervolatege. The tripless operation shall be kept for the
These functions are used to achieve the fixed-length stop. inverter via the load feeback energy by properly decreasing
The inverter inputs the count pulse from terminal X4 (defined the output frequency.
as the function 44) and calculates the length based on the 0: No action
number of pulses per revolution of the speed shaft (F9.021) 1: Action (low voltage compensation)
and shaft circumference (F9.020).
Calculated length = number of count pulses ÷ number of F9.023 Restart after power down
pulses per revolution × measured shaft circumference Range:0,1 (0)
selector
And the calculated length is corrected with the length
multiples (F9.018) and length correction coefficient (F9.019) to F9.024 Delay time for restart after
Range:0.0~10.0s (0.5s)
obtain the actual length. power down
Actual length = calculated length × length multiples ÷ length This parameter is used to set whether the inverter will start to
correction coefficient run automatically and the waiting time before the automatic
When the actual length (F9.017) ≥ setting length (F9.016), the running under different running command channels upon the
inverter will automatically send the stop instruction to stop. power-up after power failure.
The actual length is required to be reset or modified to actual When F9.023 is set as 0, the inverter will not run automatically
length (F9.017) < setting length (F9.016) before running again, upon the power-up after power failure.
otherwise, the inverter can’t start. When F9.023 is set as 1, if the startup conditions are met, the
inverter will run automatically after the waiting time defined
 Note: by F9.024 upon the power-up after power failure.
The multi-function input terminal can be used to reset the The setting of this parameter, running status upon
actual length (Xi is defined as function 39). The counting and power-down and control command status upon the power-up

determine whether the inverter runs automatically after the See FH.003
power-up. Please refer to Table.5.24.
FC.005 M2 Motor Rated
Range: 0.00~1.00 (0.85)
Operat Two-wire Power Factor
Status ion Serial Three-wire See FH.004
terminals 1
F9.023 before panel port terminals 1 & 2 &2
setting power
FC.006 M2 Motor Rated Range: 0~480 V (drive
failure Running command upon the None
Avail
power-up: none able Voltage determine)
See F0.008
Stop 0 0 0 0 0
0
Run 0 0 0 0 0 FC.007 M2 Motor Rated
Range: 1.00~550.00 Hz (50.00 )
Frequency
Stop 0 0 0 0 1
1 See F0.007
Run 1 1 1 0 1
Table.5.24 Startup Conditions for Re-start upon Power Failure FC.008 M2 Motor Stator Range: 0.0000~99.9999Ω
Resistance (0.0000 )
 Note: See FH.005
Table.5.24 shows the actions of the inverter upon power-up: 0:
enter the standby mode; 1: start running automatically. FC.009 M2 Transient Range: 0.000~500.000 mH
When the start/stop is controlled through the operation panel, Inductance (0.000 )
serial port and three-wire terminal 1 & 2, the command type is See FH.006
pulse type and there is no running command upon power-up.
Stop has the priority if there is any stop command.
FC.010 M2 Stator Range: 0.000~500.000 mH
When the function of re-start upon power failure is enabled, if
Inductance (0.000 )
the inverter is powered up again after it is not completely
powered down (i.e. the inverter LED displays UU process), it See FH.007
will restart under the rotating speed tracing mode; if the
inverter is powered up again after it is completely powered FC.011 Motor and Load Range: 0.00~1000.00 kgm²
down (i.e. the LED on the operation panel is completely off), it Inertia (0.00 )
will restart under the mode set by F2.000. The motor and load inertia represents the total inertia driven
by the motor. This is used to set the frequency controller gains
5.10 Option Module Parameter Setting (Group (see Motor ASR-P1 (F4.001)) and to provide torque
feed-forwards during acceleration when required (see Torque
FA) Mode Selector (F4.011)). It is possible to measure the inertia
as part of the auto-tune process, see Auto-tune (FH.008).
FA.001 option module ID Range:0~999 (0)
FC.012 M2 Saturation
Range: 0.0~100.0% (50.0% )
Breakpoint 1
5.11 Motor 2 parameters(Group FC)
FC.000 Select Motor 2 Parameters Range: 0,1 (0) FC.013 M2 Saturation
Range: 0.0~100.0% (75.0% )
0:Motor 1 Breakpoint 3
1:Motor 2
Range: 0.0~100.0% (00.0% )
FC.001 M2 Number of Motor Poles Range: 0~32 (0) Breakpoint 2
See FH.000
Range: 0.0~100.0% (00.0% )
FC.002 M2 Motor Rated Breakpoint 4
Range: 0.25~999.9 kw(0.00)
Power  Note:
See FH.001 FC.011~FC.015 are only for RFC-A mode.
FC.003 M2 Motor Rated FC.016 M2 Main Reference

Range: 0.1~999.9 A(0.00) Range: 0~5 (0)
Current Selector
See FH.002 0:Keypad
Digital reference 1. Keypad reference selected.
FC.004 M2 Motor Rated The reference gets initial value from F0.003 and is changed by
Range: 0-36000rpm(1500.0) keypad ▲,▼.
Speed
1:Terminal

Digital reference 2. Terminal reference selected. Frequency

The reference gets initial value from F0.003 and is changed by See F0.021
terminal up/down.
2:Serial port
FC.031 M2 Low Frequency
Digital reference 3. Serial port reference selected. The Range: 0.0~30.0%(3.0%)
Voltage Boost
reference gets initial value from F0.003 and is changed by
serial port. See F0.009
3:AI1 Analogue reference
AI1 Analogue reference  Note:
4:AI2 Analogue reference 3.0% up to Size D, 2.0% for Size 7 and 8, and 1.0% for larger
AI2 Analogue reference sizes.
5:Pulse FC.032 M2 Gain of Slip
Range: -150.0~150.0%(100.0%)
Digital pulse input reference Compensation
Serial port reference is chosen for Modbus, Profibus, FC.033 M2 Slip
Devicenet, CANopen. Range: 0.00~10.00Hz(10.00Hz)
Compensation Limit
See F0.000
FC.034 M2 Slip
Range: 0~3 (1)
Compensation Time Const
FC.017 M2 Maximum Range: FC.018~F0.006
Reference Clamp ( 50.00Hz) See F3.007
See F0.012
 Note:
FC.032~FC.034 are only for open loop mode.
FC.018 M2 Minimum
Range: 0~FC.017 ( 0.00Hz)
Reference Clamp
FC.035 M2 ASR-P1 Range: 0.000~200.000s/rad(0.100s/rad)
See F0.013
See F4.001
FC.019 M2 Command
Range: 0~2 (0) FC.036 M2 ASR-I1 Range: 0.00~655.35 s²/rad(0.10)
Source Selector
See F4.002
See F0.004.
Range: 0.00000~0.65535
FC.020 M2 Command to FC.037 M2 ASR-D1
Range: 000~666 (000) 1/rad(0.00000)
Reference Binding
See F4.003
See F9.000
 Note:
FC.021 M2 Acceleration Rate 1 Range: 0.1~3200.0s (6.0) FC.035~FC.037 are only for RFC-A mode.
See F0.010. FC.038 M2 ACR-P Range: 0.00~4000.00(20.00)
FC.022 M2 Deceleration Rate 1 Range: 0.1~3200.0s (6.0)

FC.039 M2 ACR-I Range: 0.000~600.000(40.000)
See F0.011.
FC.040 M2 Motoring Current Range:

FC.023 M2 V/F Open loop
Range: 0~7 (0) Limit -1000.0~1000.0%(165.0%)
control mode
See FL.007
FC.024 M2 V/F Third Point
Range: 0.00~550.00(0.00Hz)
Frequency
FC.041 M2 Regenerating Range:
FC.025 M2 V/F Third Point Current Limit -1000.0~1000.0%(165.0%)
Range: 0.0~100.0%(0.0%)
Voltage
See FL.008
FC.026 M2 V/F Second Point
Range: 0.00~550.00(0.00Hz)
Frequency FC.042 M2 Symmetrical Current Range:
FC.027 M2 V/F Second Point Limit -1000.0~1000.0%(165.0%)
Range: 0.0~100.0%(0.0%)
Voltage See FL.009
FC.028 M2 V/F First Point
Range: 0.00~550.00(0.00Hz)
Frequency FC.043 Reserved
FC.029 M2 V/F First Point
Range: 0.0~100.0%(0.0%)
Voltage FC.044 Motor Thermal Time
Range: 1~3000(179)
See F0.014 Constant 1
Consult the motor manufacturer
FC.030 M2 Boost End Range: 0~50.0%(10.0%)

FC.045 M2 Low Frequency

Range: 0,1 (0) C
Thermal Protection Mode A B D
See FL.000
PLC operating mode selection
0: No action
FC.046 M2 Low Frequency Range: 0.0~100.0%(0.0%) 1: stop after single cycle
Slip Boost 2: Hold final value after 1-cylce running
3: continuous operation
In stator resistor compensation open loop control (Control
Mode (FC.023) set to 4, 5, 6, and7), the rated slip frequency PLC restarting mode selection:
(see Motor Rated Frequency (FC.004) can be modified when 0: Restart from 1st stage
the output frequency is below one third of the motor rate 1: Continue to run at the frequency in the stage
when the drive stops
frequency to provide a torque boost. 2: Continue to run at the frequency when the
drive pauses
 Note:
The slip boost is linearly decreasing with the increase of the Save PLC operating parameters upon power
output frequency, with 0Hz corresponding to F3.004, and one outage:
0: No save
third of the motor rated frequency corresponding to 0.0%. 1: Save the frequency and running stage upon
power outage
5.12 Simple PLC Parameters(Group FE)
Simple PLC function can enable the drive change its operating Unit of running time:
0: Second
frequency and directions automatically according to the 1: Minute
operating time to satisfy the manufacturing requirements.
Before, this function is realized by PLC, now the drive itself can
realize such function, as shown in Fig.5.53. Fig.5.54 Simple PLC operation mode
Simple PLC operation
f6 Where,
d7
f2 a6 f7 A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place
a2 f5 C: Ten’s place D: Decimal’s place
f1 d7 Decimal’s place: PLC operation mode
a1 d3 a5
0: Disabled
a3 f 3 PLC operation mode is disabled.
a4 d5 1: Stop after single cycle
f4
As shown in Fig.5.55, the drive stops automatically after one
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
cycle of operation and will start when receiving RUN command
again.
f6
d7
f2 a6 f7
a2
Indicating signal for complating f5 d7
one stage of PLC operation
500ms a1 f 1 d3 a5
Indicating signal for completing a
cycle of PLC operation a3 f 3 d5
Fig.5.53 Simple PLC operation a4
f4
In Fig.5.53, a1~a7 and d1~d7 are the Acc time and Dec time in
different stages. f1~f7 and T1~T7 will be defined in the
following parameters. T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7
Multi functional output terminal Y1 and Y2 or the relay that
output the 500ms pulse can indicate the completion of PLC
operation, refer to the introductions of F7.000, F7.001, F7.011. RUN
command
FE.000 Simple PLC operation Fig.5.55 Stopping mode after single cycle of PLC
Range: 0000~1123(0000)
mode 2: Maintain the final value after single cycle of operation
As shown in Fig.5.58, the drive will maintain the operating
frequency and direction of last stage after completing one
cycle of operation.

f6 When the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving

d7
f 2 a6 f7 STOP command or fault, it will record the operating time and
a2 f5 the current frequency. It will continue running at the recorded
f1 d3 a5 frequency from the stage where it just stops upon restart, as
a1
shown in Fig.5.59.
a3 f 3 d5
a4  Note:
f4
The difference between mode 1 and mode 2 is that in mode 2,
T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 the drive can record the operating frequency when the drive
stops and will run at the recorded frequency after restart.
RUN
command Stopping signal
Fig.5.56 Maintaining the frequency after single cycle Output freq. Hz f1
3 (continuous operation):Fig.5.57, the drive will start next a1 d2
cycle of operation automatically after completing one cycle of a3 f 3 ...
... d2
a2 f2
operation until receiving STOP command.
f6 f6
f7 f7 Stage 1 Operating Remnant time of Time
f2 f2
time of stage 2
f5 f5 d1 stage 2
f1 f1 a 1: Acc time of stage 1 a 2 : Acc time of stage 2
f1
PLC d1d 2 a 3: Acc time of stage 3 a 2 : Dec time of stage 2
operation f 1 : Freq. of stage 1 f 2 : Freq. of stage 2
f3 f3 f 3 : Freq. of stage 3
f4 f4 Fig.5.59 PLC starting mode 2

T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T1
Hundred’s place: Store the PLC status after power failure
First cycle Second cycle ... 0: Not save
The drive does not save the PLC operating status after power
RUN failure and start operating in first stage after restart.
command 1: Save
STOP
Memorize the operating parameters of PLC operation after
command power failure, including the operating stage, operating
Fig.5.57 Continuous operation of PLC frequency, and operating time. The drive will continue to
Tens’ place: Restart after PLC operation pause operate in the mode defined by the ten’s place.
0: Operate from first section Thousand’s place: time unit
If the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving STOP 0: Second
command, fault or power failure, it will run from the first stage 1: Minute
after restarting. This unit is only valid for defining the PLC operating time. The
1: Continue from the stage where the drive stops unit of Acc/Dec time in PLC operation is determined by F9.011.
When the drive stops during PLC operation due to receiving
STOP command or fault, it will record the operating time and  Note:
will continue from the stage where the drive stops after 1. The stage is ineffective if the time of this stage of PLC
restart at the frequency defined for this stage, as shown in operation is set to 0.
Fig.5.58. 2. You can use terminals to pause and disable PLC operation,
and clear the memorized parameters. See the introductions to
Stopping signal
group F7 parameters.
Output freq.Hz f1
a1 d2
f 3 ... FE.001 PLC Stage 1 Setting Range: 000~323(000)
...
f2 a3
FE.002 PLC Time Of Stage 1 Range: 0~6500s(min)(20.0s)
a2 Time
FE.003 PLC Stage 2 Setting Range: 000~323(000)
Stage 1 Operating Remnant time of
time of stage 2 FE.004 PLC Time Of Stage 2 Range: 0~6500s(min)(20.0s)
stage 2
a 1: Acc time of stage 1 a 2: Acc time of stage 2

a 3: Acc time of stage 3 d 2: Dec time of stage 2
f 1: Freq. of stage 1 f 2 : Freq. of stage 2
f 3: Freq. of stage 3
Fig.5.58 PLC start mode 1
2: Continue to operate at the frequency when the drive stops FE.008 PLC Time Of Stage 4 Range: 0~6500s(min)(20.0s)

FE.009 PLC Stage 5 Setting Range: 000~323(000) external terminals. For example: to run forward by closing
FWD-COM terminal, and run reverse by closing REV-COM. If
FE.010 PLC Time Of Stage 5 Range: 0~6500s(min)(20.0s) no command is given, the drive will run in the direction of last
stage.
FE.012 PLC Time Of Stage 6 Range: 0~6500s(min)(20.0s) 5.13 Communication Parameters (Group FF)
FE.013 PLC Stage 7 Setting Range: 000~323(000) FF.000 Communication Reset Range: 0,1 (0)
0:Not perform communication reset function
1:perform communication reset function
FE.001,FE.003,FE.005,FE.007,FE.009,FE.011,FE.013 are used to
configure the operating frequency, direction and Acc/Dec time  Note:
of each PLC operating stage. These functions are all selected Setting parameter Communications Reset (FF.000) = 1 will
by digits, as shown in Fig.5.60, The 7 stages of PLC can reset the serial communications system on the drive allowing
correspond to MS or close loop running. any changes to the serial communications settings to take
AB C D effect. This parameter will be automatically reset to 0 after the
reset has occurred and the new settings are in effect.
Frequency setting FF.001 Communication baud rate
0: Preset reference i Range: 0~8 (8)
selector
1: Determined by F0.00
2: Preset close-loop reference i
3: Determined by F5.01 Value Text
Running direction selection 0 1200 BPS
0: Forward 1 2400 BPS
1: Reverse
2: Determined by operating 2 4800 BPS
command
3 9600 BPS
Acc/Dec time selection
4 19200 BPS
0: Acc/Dec 1
1: Acc/Dec 2 5 38400 BPS
2: Acc/Dec 3
3: Acc/Dec 4 6 57600 BPS
7 76800 BPS
Reserved
8 115200 BPS
Fig.5.60 Settings of PLC stage i (i=1~7) Table.5.25 Communication baud rate selector
Where,
A: thousand’s place B: Hundred’s place FF.002 Communication data
C: Ten’s place D: Decimal’s place Range: 0~11 (5)
format
Decimal’s place for setting stage i:
0: Select preset reference i, for example: FE.001 sets the
parameter of stage 1, so the reference frequency is preset Text Description
reference 1 set by F3.023. Please refer to F3.023~F3.029 for Dat
Value LE Stop Parit Addressing
definitions of preset reference. LCD a
D Bits y Mode
1: The frequency is determined by parameter F0.000 bits
2: Preset close-loop reference i, for example: FE.003 sets the 82 Standard
0 0 2 None
parameter of stage 2, so the reference frequency is close-loop NP RTU
reference 2 set by F5.062. Please refer to F5.061~F5.067 for 81 Standard
1 1 1 None
definitions of preset close-loop reference. NP RTU
3: Determined by Parameter F5.001 Standard
PLC can realize close-loop operation in a certain stage. 2 2 8 1 EP 1 Even
RTU
Close-loop reference selectors can be preset close-loop 81 Standard
reference i or determined by parameter F5.001; and the 3 3 1 Odd
OP RTU
feedback is determined by F5.002. When the reference 8
82
selector is determined by parameter F5.001, the terminals can 4 4 2 None Modified
NP M
be selected via preset close-loop reference. See F7.000~F7.002, 81
F7.005, F5.061~F5.067 for details. 5 5 1 None Modified
NP M
8 1 EP
 Note: 6 6 1 Even Modified
M
When the PLC operating direction is determined by operating 81
commands, the direction of the motor can be controlled by 7 7 1 Odd Modified
OP M

Text Description If the drive has not detected the communication signal from
Dat the serial port for certain time, it will judge that
Value LE Stop Parit Addressing
LCD a communication failure occurs. The time threshold is defined
D Bits y Mode by FF.004.
bits
Standard If FF.004 is set to 0, the drive will not detect the
8 8 7 1 EP 1 Even communication signal of serial port and this function is
RTU
71 Standard disabled. The behaviour of the communication failure is
9 9 1 Odd controlled by FL.013, see FL.013.
OP RTU
7 Changing this parameter does not immediately change the
7 1 EP
10 10 1 Even Modified serial communications settings. See Communication Reset
M
71 (FF.000) for more details.
11 11 1 Odd Modified
OP M
Table.5.26 Communication data format FF.005 Local reply delay Range: 0~250ms(5ms)
The drive uses the Modbus RTU protocol and is always a slave. There will always be a finite delay between the end of a
Changing this parameter does not immediately change the message from the host (master) and the time at which the
serial communications settings. See Communication Reset host is ready to receive the response from the drive (slave).
(FF.000) for more details. The drive does not respond until at least 1ms after the
Communication data format (FF.002) defines the data format message has been received from the host allowing 1ms for the
used by the serial interface as follows. host to change from transmit to receive mode. This initial
There are two addressing modes supported, standard or delay can be extended using Local reply delay (FF.005) if
modified register mode. The RTU register value is derived from required.
the numerical equivalent of the function group (ne) and Changing this parameter does not immediately change the
parameter number (pn) as given in the table below. Modified serial communications settings. See Communication Reset
mode is provided to allow parameter numbers up to 255 to be (FF.000) for more details.
addressed. If any function groups with equivalent numbers
above 63 should contain more than 99 parameters, then these Local reply
Action
parameters cannot be accessed via Modbus RTU. delay (FF.005)
The transmitters are turned on and data
0ms transmission begins immediately after the
Numerical equivalent of function groups
initial delay (≥1ms)
Numerical Equivalent
Function group The transmitters are turned on after the
(ne)
1ms initial delay (≥1ms) and data transmission
F0 0
begins 1ms later
F1 1
The transmitters are turned on after a
⁞ ⁞ delay of at least the time specified by Local
F8 8 ≥2ms
reply delay (FF.05) and data transmission
F9 9 begins 1ms later
F[a,A] 10 Table.5.29 Local reply delay description
F[b,B] 11
The drive holds its own transmitters active for up to 1ms after
⁞ ⁞
it has transmitted data before switching to the receive mode;
F[y,Y] 34
the host should not send any data during this time.
F[z,Z] 35
Changing this parameter does not immediately change the
Table.5.27 Numerical equivalent of function groups
serial communications settings. See Communication Reset
Addressing (FF.000) for more details.
Modbus RTU Register Address
Mode
(ne x 100) + pn FF.006 Virtual terminal Range: 0,1 (0)
Standard
where ne ≤ 162 and pn ≤ 99
Setting FF.06 to 1 allows all serial digital input and output to
(ne x 256) + pn – 1 be controlled by serial by writing to F7.036. See F7.036.
Modified (M)
where ne ≤ 63 and pn ≤ 255
Table.5.28 Communication addressing Mode
FF.007 Comms Control Word Range: 0~32767 (0)
FF.003 Local address Range: 1~247 (1) The control word will only take effect if the command source
In serial communication, FF.003 is used to identify the drive’s is selected as ‘Comms’ (F0.004 = 2) except bit 12,13,14.
address in the range from 1 to 247. Changing this parameter Bit12,13,14 will always take effect when any command source
does not immediately change the serial communications is selected.
settings. See Communication Reset (FF.000) for more details. The bit of control word(FF.007)are used instead of their
corresponding parameters function as show in the Table.5.30.
FF.004 Communications
Range: 0.0~1000.0s(0.0s)
timeout time

To set the rated power of the motor 1

Bit Corresponding function
 Note
0 Reserved If the stator inductance parameter (FH.007) is non zero, the
1 Run Forward power factor (FH.004) and motor characteristic will be set up
2 Jog Forward using FH.007.
3 Run Reverse Else, if Rated Power (FH.001) is non zero, the power factor
(FH.004) and motor characteristic will be set up using FH.001.
4 Forward/Reverse
Else, the power factor (FH.004) will be used directly to
5 Run determine the motor characteristic.
6 Not Stop
7 Reserved FH.002 rated current of Range: 0.00~999.99A (dependent
8 Reserved motro 1 on drive’s model)
9 Jog Reverse Rated current of motor 1 (FH.002) is used as following:
10 Reserved To define the rated operating conditions for motor thermal
protection. See Low Frequency Motor Thermal Protection
11 Reserved
Selector (FL.000).
12 Trip drive To define the range of the current limits.
13 Reset drive In the motor control algorithm for Open-loop and RFC-A
14 Watchdog modes.
Table.5.30 Comms Control Word description
 Note:
Bit 0:Reserved To ensure the control performance, be sure to set the correct
Bit 1-6 and bit 9: Sequencer control values for FH.000~FH.002 according to the nameplate
Bit 7:Reserved parameters of the motor. The power class of the motor shall
Bit 8: Reserved be configured according to that of the inverter.
Bit 10 and bit 11: Reserved Generally, it can only be two classes lower or one class higher
The values of these bits have no effect on the drive. than that of the inverter. Otherwise, the control performance
Bit 12: Trip drive cannot be ensured.
If bit 12 = 1 then a Control Word trip is repeatedly initiated.
The trip cannot be cleared until bit 12 = 0.
Bit 13: Reset drive FH.003 Motor 1 Rated Speed Range:0.0~33000.0 (1500.0)
If bit 13 is changed from 0 to 1 a drive reset is initiated. Open loop mode
Bit 14: Watchdog See Motor rated frequency (F0.007).
A watchdog system can be enabled or serviced each time bit RFC-A mode
14 is changed from 0 to 1. Once bit 14 has been changed from Motor 1 Rated Speed (FH.003) is not used by the motor
0 to 1 to enable the watchdog, this must be repeated every 1s control algorithms, but it is used by the motor thermal
or else a Watchdog trip will be initiated. The watchdog is protection system.
disabled when the trip occurs and must be re-enabled if
required when the trip is reset. FH.004 Motor 1 Rated Power Factor Range:0.00~1.00 (0.85)
Motor 1 Rated Power Factor (FH.004) is the power factor of
FF.008 Communication Main Range: 0.00~550.00 Hz the motor under rated conditions.
Reference (0.00) If Motor 1 Stator Inductance (FH.007) is set to a non-zero value
When F0.000 = 2 (Preset), main reference gets value from then the stator inductance is used to calculate the rated
FF.008. magnetising current for the motor and the rated power factor
can be calculated by the drive.
FF.009 Communication Range: 0.00~550.00 Hz If Motor 1 Stator Inductance (FH.007) is set to zero then Motor
Auxiliary Reference (0.00) 1 Rated Power Factor (FH.004) is used to estimate the rated
magnetising current which is an approximation and not as
When F9.001 = 3 (Preset), auxiliary reference gets value from
accurate. Motor 1 Stator Inductance (FH.007) can be measured
FF.009.
by the drive during auto-tuning and this is the preferred option,
5.14 Motor parameters (Group FH) however, if it is not possible to obtain the value for Motor 1
Stator Inductance (FH.007) then Motor 1 Rated Power Factor
FH.000 Number of polarities of motor 1 Range:0~32 (0) (FH.004) should be set to the motor nameplate value.
To set the numbert of motor 1 poles
If Number of Motor Poles (FH.000) = 0 the number of motor FH.005 Motor 1 Stator Range:0.0000~99.9999Ω
poles are calculated automatically Resistance (0.0000Ω)
The Motor 1 Stator Resistance (FH.005), Motor 1 Transient
FH.001 Motor 1 Rated Range: -999.99~999.9kW Inductance (FH.006) and Motor 1 Stator Inductance (FH.007)
Power (dependent on drive’s model) are derived from the star connected per phase equivalent

circuit of an induction motor shown below. calculate Motor 1 Rated Power Factor (FH.004). The motor
should be unloaded for this test.
The table below shows the trips that can occur during an auto
tune test:
Trip Reason
Autotune The final drive enable or the final drive run was
Stopped removed before the test was completed.
The measured value of the Motor 1 Stator
Resistance Resistance (FH.005) exceeded the range of the
Fig.5.61 Equivalent Circuit Diagram for Asynchronous Motor in parameter.
Steady State Table.5.31 Description of Self-Setting Failure in Open Loop
The steady state parameters are converted to equivalent Mode
transient model parameters: The following describes how an auto-tune test can be initiated
Rs = R1 and normal operation can be resumed after the test for Open
Lm = Lm loop:
Ls = L1 + Lm 1. Correctly set mortor rated frequency, mortor rated
Lr = L2 + Lm voltage, mortor Number of polarities, mortor rated current
σLs = Ls - (Lm2 / Lr) and mortor rated speed.
The equivalent drive parameters are: 2. An auto-tune test cannot be initiated if the drive is
Motor 1 Stator Resistance (FH.005) = Rs tripped or the drive inverter is active.
Motor 1 Transient Inductance (FH.006) = σLs 3. An auto-tune test is initiated by setting Auto-tune
Motor 1 Stator Inductance (FH.007) = Ls (FH.008) to a non-zero value and making the Final drive enable
and the Final drive run active.
FH.006 Motor 1 Transient Range: 0.000~500.000 mH (0.000 4. All tests that move the motor will move the motor in the
Inductance mH) forward direction.
See Motor 1 Stator Resistance (FH.005). 5. If the auto-tune sequence is completed successfully the
Final drive enable is set to the inactive state and Auto-tune
(FH.008) is set to zero from nonzero.
FH.007 Motor 1 Stator Range:0.00~5000.00 mH (0.000
6. If a trip occurs during the auto-tune sequence the drive
Inductance mH)
will go into the trip state and Auto-tune (FH.008) is set to zero.
See Motor 1 Stator Resistance (FH.005). After the trip has been reset, FH.008 need be set again, and
the auto-tune can be continued. However, care should be
Range:open loop mode:0~2,RFC taken because if the auto-tune was not completed the drive
FH.008Auto tune
model: 0~3 (0) parameters that should have been measured and set up will
The function can enable auto tuning of motor’s parameters still have their original values.
and write the results in the related parameters automatically. The following describes the effects of the auto-tune test on the
The following describes how an auto-tune test can be initiated drive:
and normal operation can be resumed after the test for Open 1. All auto-tune tests rely on the motor being stationary
loop and RFC-A mode: when the test is initiated to give accurate results.
Open loop model 2. If Select Motor 1 Parameters (FC.000 = 0) then the
0: Auto-tuning is disabled parameters associated with motor map 1 are updated as a
1: Stationary auto-tuning (Start auto-tuning to a standstill result of the test, and if Select Motor 2 Parameters (FC.000) = 1
motor) the parameters associated with motor map 2 are updated.
This test measures the basic control parameters without Only when the whole test is completed, are the results written
moving the motor. to the appropriate parameters and these parameters saved in
A stationary test is performed to measure Motor 1 Stator the drive non-volatile memory.
Resistance (FH.005), Motor 1 Transient Inductance (FH.006), RFC-A model
maximum dead-time compensation and the current at 0: Auto-tuning is disabled
maximum dead-time compensation. 1: Stationary auto-tuning (Start auto-tuning to a standstill
2: Rotating auto-tuning motor)
This test measures the parameters for improved performance This test measures the basic control parameters without
by rotating the motor. moving the motor.
Firstly auto-tune test 1 is performed. A stationary test is performed to measure Motor 1 Stator
Secondly a rotating test is performed in which the motor is Resistance (FH.005), Motor 1 Transient Inductance (FH.006),
accelerated with the currently selected ramps up to a maximum dead-time compensation and the current at
frequency of Motor Rated Frequency (F0.007) x 2/3, and the maximum dead-time compensation.
frequency is maintained at that level for 4 seconds. Motor 1 Stator Resistance (FH.005) and Motor 1 Transient
Motor 1 Stator Inductance (FH.007) is measured and this value Inductance (FH.006) are used to set up Motor ACR-P (F4.005)
is used in conjunction with other motor parameters to and Motor ACR-I (F4.006). This is only performed once during

the test, and so the user can make further adjustments to the 2. If Select Motor 1 Parameters (FC.000 = 0) then the
current controller gains if required. parameters associated with motor map 1 are updated as a
2:Rotating auto-tuning result of the test, and if Select Motor 2 Parameters (FC.000) = 1
This test measures the parameters for improved performance the parameters associated with motor map 2 are updated.
by rotating the motor. Only when the whole test is completed, are the results written
Firstly auto-tune test 1 is performed. to the appropriate parameters and these parameters saved in
Secondly a rotating test is performed in which the motor is the drive non-volatile memory.
accelerated with the currently selected ramps up to a
frequency of Motor Rated Frequency (F0.007) x 2/3, and the  Note:
frequency is maintained at that level for 4 seconds. Motor 1 When FH.008 is set as 2, if overcurrent or overvoltage occurs
Stator Inductance (FH.007) is measured and this value is used during the self-setting, properly increase the
in conjunction with other motor parameters to calculate acceleration/deceleration time.
Motor 1 Rated Power Factor (FH.004). Also, Saturation When FH.008 is set as 2 for rotation setting, disconnect the
Breakpoint 1 (FH.009), Saturation Breakpoint 2 (FH.010), motor shaft from the loads. It is prohibited to carry out
Saturation Breakpoint 3 (FH.011), Saturation Breakpoint 4 rotation setting when the motor is connected to loads.
(FH.012) were measured. The motor should be unloaded for Before the self-setting, the motor shall be in static status,
this test. otherwise, the self-setting cannot be normally conducted.
The table below shows the trips that can occur during an In certain situations (for instance, the motor cannot be
auto-tune test: disconnected from the loads) where it is inconvenient to
conduct rotation setting, or the users does not have high
Trip Reason Measured in motor control performance requirement, static setting can be
test selected, or the setting can be exempted. In this case, please
Autotune The final drive enable or All enter the proper nameplate parameter of the motor
Stopped the final drive run was (FH.000~FH.003).
removed before the test
was completed. FH.009 Saturation
Range:0.0~100.0% (50.0 )
Resistance The measured value of 1,2 Breakpoint 1 of motor 1
the Motor 1 Stator FH.010 Saturation
Resistance (FH.005) Range:0.0~100.0% (00.0 )
Breakpoint 2 of motor 1
exceeded the range of
the parameter. FH.011 Saturation
Range:0.0~100.0% (75.0 )
Breakpoint 3 of motor 1
The following describes how an auto-tune test can be initiated FH.012 Saturation
Range:0.0~100.0% (00.0 )
and normal operation can be resumed after the test for RFC-A Breakpoint 4 of motor 1
model: FH.013 Motor 1 and Load Range:0.00~1000.00 kgm²
1. Correctly set mortor rated frequency, mortor rated Inertia (0.00 )
voltage, mortor Number of polarities, mortor rated current
The motor and load inertia represents the total inertia driven
and mortor rated speed.
by the motor. This is used to set the frequency controller gains
2. An auto-tune test cannot be initiated if the drive is
(see Motor ASR-P1 (F4.000)) and to provide torque
tripped or the drive inverter is active.
feed-forwards during acceleration when required (see Torque
3. An auto-tune test is initiated by setting Auto-tune
Mode Selector (F4.008)). It is possible to measure the inertia
(FH.008) to a non-zero value and making the Final drive enable
as part of the auto-tune process, see Auto-tune (FH.008).
and the Final drive run active.
4. All tests that move the motor will move the motor in the
 Note:
forward direction.
FH.009~FH.013 is only available in RFC-A mode.
5. If the auto-tune sequence is completed successfully the
Final drive enable is set to the inactive state and Auto-tune 5.15Protection parameters(FL Group)
(FH.008) is set to zero from nonzero.
6. If a trip occurs during the auto-tune sequence the drive FL.000 Low Frequency Thermal
will go into the trip state and Auto-tune (FH.008) is set to zero. Range:0,1 (0)
Protection Mode
After the trip has been reset, FH.008 need be set again, and
If Low Frequency Thermal Protection Mode (FL.000) = 0 the
the auto-tune can be continued. However, care should be
characteristic is intended for a motor which can operate at
taken because if the auto-tune was not completed the drive
rated current over the whole frequency range. Induction
parameters that should have been measured and set up will
motors with this type of characteristic normally have forced
still have their original values.
cooling.
The following describes the effects of the auto-tune test on the
If Low Frequency Thermal Protection Mode (FL.000) = 1 the
drive:
characteristic is intended for motors where the cooling effect
1. All auto-tune tests rely on the motor being stationary
of motor fan reduces with reduced motor frequency below
when the test is initiated to give accurate results.
half of rated frequency.

FL.001 Motor Thermal Time will output pre-alarm signal.

Range:1~3000s (179) When the overload prealarm status is enabled, it means that
Constant 1
the inverter operating current is higher than the overload
detection level, and its retention time exceeds the overload
FL.001 Motor Thermal Time Constant Range:1~3000s (179) detection time.
FL.002 Over-Voltage Output current

Range:0,1 (1)
Protection At Stall Detect threshold
FL.003 Over-Voltage Range:-999V~999 V , DC voltage
Protection Point at Stall (750V)
0: Disabled Detect time Detect time Time
1: Enabled
Action
During deceleration, the motor’s decelerate rate may be lower
than that of drive’s output frequency due to the load inertia. Enabled
At this time, the motor will feed the energy back to the drive, Time
resulting in the voltage rise on the drive's DC bus. If no
Fig.5.63 Overload pre-alarm function
measures taken, the drive will trip due to over voltage.
During the deceleration, the drive detects the bus voltage and  Note:
compares it with the over voltage point at stall defined by Overload pre-alarm detection threshold should be lower than
FL.003. If the bus voltage exceeds the stall overvoltage point, the overload protection threshold;
the drive will stop reducing its output frequency. When the During the overload detection time, if the drive’s current is
bus voltage become lower than the point, the deceleration smaller than FL.05, the drive will time again for FL.06 and will
continues, as shown in Fig.5.62. not alarm.
Range:-1000.0~1000.0%
FL.007 Motoring Current Limit
Overvolt (165.0%)
point at The Motoring Current Limit: limits the current from the drive
stall to motor when the motor is being accelerated away from
standstill.
The Regenerating Current Limit: limits the current from the
Time motor to drive when the motor is being decelerated towards
standstill.
If the Symmetrical Current Limit is below the Motoring Current
Limit then it is used instead of the Motoring Current Limit. If
Output the Symmetrical Current Limit (F4.017) is below the
freq. Regenerating Current Limit (F4.016) then it is used instead of
the Regenerating Current Limit (F4.016).
The maximum values of these parameters depend on the
Time motor rated current and the inverter rated current and power
Fig.5.62 Over-voltage at stall factor. Increasing the motor rated current which is higher than
 Note: the overload ratings (default) will lower the current limit
If the stall point is set too low, you can prolong the Acc and values of FL. 007 to FL. 009.
Dec time properly.
 Note:
The parameter range of FL.007, FL.008 and FL.009 are
FL.004 Overload Pre-alarm Selector Range:0,1 (0) determined by the inverter model and motor rated current.
FL.005 Overload Pre-alarm Range:20~150%
Detection Threshold (130.0%) FL.008 Regenerating Current Range:-1000.0~1000.0%
FL.006 Overload Pre-alarm Limit of motor 1 (165.0%)
Range:0.0~60.0s (5.0s)
Detection Time See FL.007.
FL.004~FL.006 can monitor the overload condition before
overload protection happens. FL.009 Symmetrical Current Range:-1000.0~1000.0%
FL.004=0, Percentage of motor rated current Limit (165.0%)
FL.004=1, Percentage of drive rated current See FL.007.
FL.005 defines the current threshold for overload pre-alarm
protection. The setting range is a percentage value of rated FL.010 Number of Auto-reset Attempts Range:0~6 (0)
current, please refer to FL.004.
0:Disabled
FL.006 defines the time during which the drive current exceeds
1: 1
FL.005. If the status remains after this period of time, the drive
2: 2

3: 3 2:Trip and coast to stop(Er.0030)

4: 4 3:Stop and trip according to stop mode(Er.0030)
5: 5
6:Infinie FL.014 Auto-reset Fault
If Number Of Auto-reset Attempts (FL.010) = 0 then no Range:0,1 (0)
Indication Selector
auto-reset attempts are made. Any other value will cause the If Auto-reset Fault Indication Selector (FL.014) = 0 then drive
drive to automatically reset following a trip for the number of fault is set every time the drive trips regardless of any
times programmed after a delay defined by Auto-reset Delay auto-reset that may occur.
(FL.011) subject to the minimum reset time allowed for the If Auto-reset Fault Indication Selector (FL.014) = 1 then drive
type of trip. fault is cleared on a trip if any further auto-reset attempts are
Note that for some trips the minimum is 10s. The auto-reset possible.
count is only incremented when the trip is the same as the This parameter allows the user to select for the healthy
previous trip otherwise it is reset to 0. indication to remain active until all auto-reset attempts have
When the auto-reset count reaches the programmed value, been used up.
any further trip of the same value will not cause an auto-reset. Note that if the under voltage state becomes active drive fault
If there has been no trip for 5 minutes then the auto-reset is always set to zero.
count is cleared. Auto reset will not occur after any trips with
priority levels 1, 2 or 3. When a manual reset occurs the
FL.015 Phase Failure
auto-reset counter is reset to zero. Range:0~3 (0)
Protection Selector
If Number of Auto-reset Attempts (FL.010) = 6 the auto-reset
counter is held at zero, and so there is no limit on the number 0:Both input and output phase loss failure protection are
of auto-reset attempts. enabled
1:Input phase loss failure protection disabled
 Note: 2:Output phase loss failure protection disabled
If the inverter is in running status upon the occurrence of 3:Both phase loss failure protection disabled
failure, it will automatically run at the rotating speed tracing
the starting speed after being automatically reset. FL.016 Trip 1 Range:0~255 (0)
FL.011 Auto-reset Delay Range:0.0~600.0s (1.0s) FL.017 Sub Trip 1 Range:0~255 (0)
See FL.010.
FL.018 Trip 2 Range:0~255 (0)
FL.012 Action on Non-Important
Range:00~11 (00)
Fault Detection
FL.019 Sub Trip 2 Range:0~255 (0)
Bit1 Bit0 FL.012(Bit1,0)
0 0 00 FL.020 Trip 3 (Last trip) Range:0~255 (0)
0 1 01
1 0 10 FL.021 Sub Trip 3 (Last trip) Range:0~255 (0)
1 1 11
Table.5.32 FL.012 description
FL.022 DC Bus Voltage On Last Trip Range:0~999V
Bit Description
FL.023 Output Current On Last Trip Range:0.00~999.99A
0 If bit 0 is set, the following trips forces the motor to
stop before tripping:
Trip 26, 27, 35, 96, 112 to 167, 173, 189 and 190 FL.024 Output Frequency On Last Range:0.00~550.00Hz
1 If bit 1 is set, the following trips trigger an alarm for Trip
4seconds. The drive will carry on running. The alarm
persists if the trip condition persists. FL.025 Drive State Word On Last Range:0000~FFFF (0000)
Trip 174, 175, 177 to 188 Trip
Table.5.33 FL.012 Bit description
FL.013 Communication FL.026 Braking Resistor Rated Range:0.0~99999.9 kW (0.0
Range:0~3 (2)
Failure Protection Selector Power kW)
When the serial communication signal disappears, and its A thermal protection system is provided for the braking resistor.
retention time exceeds the set value of FF.004, the inverter If Braking Resistor Rated Power (FL.027) is set to zero this
will perform the corresponding actions shown in the table protection system is disabled and the Braking Resistor Thermal
below. Accumulator is held at zero. If braking resistor thermal
0:Protection disabled and keep running protection is required the Braking Resistor Rated Power
1:Alarm and keep running (FL.026), Braking Resistor Thermal Time Constant (FL.027) and

Braking Resistor Resistance (FL.028) should be set up with the FL.033 Low Load Detection Range:0.00~550.00Hz (0.00)
braking resistor parameters. Frequency Threshold
If Low Load Detection Level (FL.034) is set to 0.00 the low load
The thermal time constant of the resistor can be calculated detection system is disabled, otherwise the low load detection
from the single pulse energy rating (E) and continuous power system is enabled. The low load detection system is provided
rating (P) of the resistor. Braking Resistor Thermal Time so that loss of load can be detected and action taken. So that
Constant (FL.027) = τ = E / P the detector can be used with fan and pump type loads, where
The braking resistor is protected with a single time constant the load is relatively light at low motor frequency, the detector
model as shown below. is only active when the output frequency is above the level
Consult the manufacturer of the resistor for the single pulse defined by Low Load Detection Frequency Threshold (FL.033).
energy rating (E). The detector is also only enabled when the motor is at the
100% Braking required frequency (i.e. not accelerating or decelerating). Once
Power into 1 – e-t/τ resistor thermal the detector is active, the low load condition is detected when
braking resistor Braking Resistor Rated accumulator
Power (FL.026) the percentage load falls below the threshold defined by Low
Load Detection Level (FL.034). Therefore the condition for
Fig.5.64 single time constant model detecting low load is given by
The diagram below shows a typical fan type load and the
The inverter monitors the power flowing into the braking shaded areas define where low load is detected.
resistor and updates the braking resistor thermal accumulator.
If the accumulator reaches 100%, a “Brake R Too Hot” trip is
initiated.
If bit 1 of Action On Trip Detection (FL.012) = 1 and the
accumulator reaches 100% the braking IGBT is disabled until
the accumulator falls below 95.0%.
FL.027 Braking Resistor

Range:0.00~1500.00s (0.00s)
Thermal Time Constant
See Braking Resistor Power (FL.026)
FL.028 Braking Resistor

Range:0.00~9999.99Ω (0.00Ω) Fig.5.65 Low Load Detection
Resistance
See Braking Resistor Power (FL.026) FL.034 Low Load Detection Level 0.00~100.00 % (0.00)
See FL.033.
FL.030 Keypad Reference Range:0~3 (2)
Failure Protection Selector FL.035 Upon Fault Frequency Selector 0~4 (0)
If the reference comes from the keypad and the keypad is If the action of the active alarm has been set to “Alarm and
removed the drive behavior will be determined by FL.030. keep running” (See FL.031 Option 1), then use this parameter
0 Protection disabled and keep running to specify the running frequency.
1 Alarm “Pad mode” and keep running 0:Maintain present reference value
2 Trip “Pad mode” and coast to stop 1:Main digital reference (F0.003)
3 Stop according to stop mode and trip Pad mode 2:Maximum reference clamp (F0.012)
3:Minimum reference clamp (F0.013)
FL.031 Current Reference 0~3 (2) 4:Standby frequency for abnormality (FL.036)
Lost Protection Selector
If the current reference is lost then the drive behavior will be FL.036 Standby Frequency 0.0~100.0% (100.0)
determined by FL.031. for Abnormality
0:Protection disabled and keep running Defines the standby frequency for abnormality
1:Alarm “An Input 1 Loss” or “An Input 2 Loss” and keep
running
FL.037 Motor Thermistor Type 0~4 (0)
2:Trip “An Input 1 Loss” or “An Input 2 Loss” and coast to stop
3:Stop according to stop mode and trip “An Input 1 Loss” or Motor Thermistor Type (FL.037) defines the operation of the
“An Input 2 Loss” temperature feedback interface for X3 when Digital X3 mode
(F7.002) is 47, 48 or 49.
0:DIN44081
FL.032 Enable Trip On Low Load 0,1 (0)
1:KTY84
0:Low-load alarm active upon detection of low load 2:PT1000
1:Low-load trip activated upon detection of low load 3:PT2000
See FL.033 4: Other
If Motor Thermistor Type (FL.037) = 0, the thermistor

DIN44081 is designed to react like a temperature switch and

therefore Motor Temperature (F8.031) always reads 0.0°C. Fn.003 Heat sink 1 temperature Range:-250~250ºC ( )
If Motor Thermistor Type (FL.037) = 1 to 3 is selected, the
Temperature of heat sink 1 is the temperature of IGBT
digital input operation of the terminal is disabled.
modules.
If Motor Thermistor Type (FL.037) = 4, any thermistor can be
used but Motor Temperature (F8.031)) always reads 0.0°C.
Fn.004 Heat sink 2 temperature Range:-250~250ºC ( )
FL.038 Feedback of motor thermistor 0~4000Ω ((0Ω) Temperature of heat sink 2 is the temperature of IGBT
modules.
FL.038 Motor Thermistor Feedback 0~4000Ω (0)

Rang:00.00.00.00~99.99.9
Fn.005 User Firmware Version
9.99 ( )
FL.039 Reserved
Rang:00.00.00.00~99.99.9
Fn.006 Power Firmware Version
FL.040 Motor Thermal Trip Threshold 0~4000Ω (3300Ω) 9.99 ( )
FL.041 Motor Thermal Reset 0~4000Ω (1800Ω)

5.17 User Security Parameters(FP Group)
Threshold
FP.000 User security code Range:0~9999 ()
* Default is loaded if FP.000=0 at power up or if default is
FL.042 Over Frequency 0.00~550.00Hz ( 0.00Hz) loaded (FP.002=2)
Threshold Defines the user security code of the drive.
If the Post Ramp Reference in Open-loop or Estimated 0: no security applied
Frequency in RFC-A mode exceeds this threshold in either Non zero: security applied
direction an Over Speed Err.007 trip is produced. The User Security Code, when set, prevents write access to any
of the parameters in any menu.
 Note: Setting User Security Code:
If Over Frequency Threshold (FL.042) is set to 0.0 the threshold Enter a value between 1 and 9999 in FP.000 and press the
is based on the variable minimum/maximum for the button; the security code has now been set to this
references and is equal to 1.2 x VM_SPEED_FREQ_REF[MAX]. value. In order to activate the security, the Security level must
If Over Frequency Threshold (FL.042) is set to a non-zero value be set to desired level in FP.001. When the drive is reset, the
it defines the over frequency threshold. security code will have been activated and the drive returns to
Menu F0. The value of FP.000 will return to 0 in order to hide
5.16 Drive’s Parameters (Group Fn) the security code.
Unlocking User Security Code
Fn.000 preset operating time Range:0~65535 hour (0) Select a parameter that needs to be edited and press the
Preset operating time (Fn.000) should be set to a non-zero button, the display will now show ‘Co’. Use the arrow
value to enable the operating timer system. Each time Reset buttons to set the security code and press the button.
operating time (Fn.002) is changed by the user from 1 to 0 the With the correct security code entered, the display will revert
value of Preset operating time (Fn.000) is copied to parameter to the parameter selected in edit mode. If an incorrect security
Remaining Operation Time Left (Fn.001). For each hour while code is entered, the following message ‘Co.Err’ is displayed,
the drive is running the Remaining Operation Time Left (Fn.001) and the display will revert to parameter view mode.
is reduced by 1 until it reaches zero. When Remaining Disabling User Security
Operation Time Left (Fn.001) changes from 1 to 0 Reset Unlock the previously set security code as detailed above. Set
operating time (Fn.002) is set to 1 to indicate that the FP.001 to 0 (no security) and press the button. The
operating time is reached. The operating time can be reset User Security has now been disabled, and will not have to be
again by resetting Reset operating time (Fn.002) to 0. unlocked each time the drive is powered up to allow read /
write access to the parameters
 Note:
When Remaining Operation Time Left (Fn.001) changes from 1  Note:
to 0 Reset operating time (Fn.002) is set to 1 to indicate that Please keep the user security code safe.
the operating time is reached.
See F7.000~F7.001,F7.011 FP.001 Parameter protection Range:0~3 (0)
This parameter is described as follows:
Fn.001 Total operating time Range:0~65535 (0) 0:No security
See Fn.000 All writable parameters are visible and available to be edited.
1:Read-only
Fn.002 Reset operating time Range:0,1 ( ) All parameters are read-only however all menus and
See Fn.000 parameters are visible. Only F0.003 can be modified without
entering the code.

2:Status Only 1:Upload all

The keypad remains in status mode and no parameters can be Setting Parameter upload (FP.004) = 1 will transfer all
viewed or edited. cloneable (NC=0) parameters from the drive to a parameter
3:No Access file with file identification number 1. The file will be
The keypad remains in status mode and no parameters can be overwritten if it already exists. When the action is complete
viewed or edited. Drive parameters cannot be accessed via a Parameter upload (FP.004) is automatically reset to zero.
comms/fieldbus interface in the drive or any option module. The action is triggered on exit from edit mode on a keypad or
comms write.
FP.002 Parameter Initiate Range:0~4 (0)
0:No action FP.005 Drive actions Range: 0~65535 (0)
1:Clear trips Drive actions (FP.005) can initiate various actions by setting a
Clear fault records (FL.16 to FL.21) value in this parameter and then performing a drive reset. If
2:Default the action is completed successfully Drive actions (FP.005) is
The parameters are reset to default values. The motor must cleared when the action is complete. If the action is not
not be running started because the value does not correspond to an action, or
3:Save All because the action is not allowed (i.e. an attempt is made to
All user save parameters are saved load defaults and the drive is enabled), Drive actions (FP.005)
4: Default All is not cleared. If the action is started and then fails a trip is
The parameters are reset to default values including motor produced and Drive actions (FP.005) is not cleared.
parameters. The motor must not be running. Table.5.34 shows the possible actions that can be initiated
with Drive actions (FP.005).
 Note:
1. In order to activate the setup, need to reset the drive after Drive actions Possible
setting FP.002 to 1 or 2. Action
(FP.005) value failures
2. When clear the memory or set the drive to default setting,
Save drive user save
FP.002 will automatically reset to 0.
parameters to
No action if
non-volatile memory.
FP.003 Parameter download Range:0~2 (0) the drive is in
1000 Power-down save
the under
0: None parameters are saved
voltage state
No action when the drive enters the
1: Download all under voltage state.
Provided a parameter file with file identification number 1 Save drive parameters to
exists on the NV media card then setting Parameter download non-volatile memory. It
(FP.003) = 1 will transfer the parameter data to the drive. should be noted that
When the action is complete Parameter download (FP.003) is power-down save
automatically reset to zero. The action is triggered on exit from 1001 parameters are also saved
edit mode on a keypad or comms write. which will result in one
2: Download setup background task scan
Provided a parameter file with file identification number 1 being extended to 100ms.
exists on the NV media card then setting Parameter download (Same as FP.002=3)
(FP.003)= 2 will transfer all parameters from the parameter file 1070 Reset option module
to the drive except the motor parameters (FH & FC). When the Load 50Hz defaults (Same
action is complete Parameter download (FP.003) is 1233
as FP.002=2)
automatically reset to zero. The action is triggered on exit from Load 50Hz defaults to all
edit mode on a keypad or comms write. 1234 menus except option
module menu (FA and FB)
FP.004 Parameter upload Range:0,1 (0) 1299 Reset [Trips 221] trip.
0: None Table.5.34 FP.005 description
No action

Chapter VI Troubleshooting and Abnormality Handling

All possible MEV failure types are summarized in Table.6.1. The failure code display ranges from 1 to 255. Before seeking for service,
the user can perform self-check according to Table.6.1 and record the failure symptoms in detail. Please contact the supplier for
service support.
All possible MEV Alarm code are summarized in Table.6.3. The failure code display ranges from 1 to 14.
Failure
Failure code Failure type Failure cause Diagnosis
subcode
Check whether the control line
wiring is correct;
When analog input AI1 is set as Check whether the control line is
Missing of analog input 4-20 mA or 20-4 mA, current is damaged;
Er.0028
AI1 current not detected (current is below 3 Check analog input AI1 mode:
mA). F1.013;
Check whether the current signal
exists and whether it is above 3 mA.
Overcurrent of analog Current input of analog input AI1
Er.0189
input AI1 is over 24 mA.
Er.0013 Check whether the motor wiring is
1 Inertia ultralimit The detected inertia is ultralimit.
correct.
Check whether the inverter enable
The running signal or enable is
Er.0018 Self-tuning termination signal (Terminal T31 and T34) is valid
removed in self-tuning.
in self-tuning.
Check whether set values of FL.026,
FL.027 and FL.028 is correct;
If an external thermal protector is
Timeout of brake resistor The brake resistor accumulator used, and software protection
Er.0019 2
overload (I t) reaches 100%. function of the brake resistor is not
required, set the value of FL.026,
FL.027 or FL.028 as 0 to settle the
trouble.
Check whether the SD card
Er.0185 SD card write failure installation is correct;
Replace the SD card.
Check whether Pr11.042 is set
correctly, and then reset the inverter
No.0 menu parameter has
to generate the corresponding boot
Er.0177 changed and cannot be
file on SD card;
saved in SD card.
Re-modify the parameter of No.0
menu.
SD card is not accessible It is trying to access the SD card, Try to access the required function
Er.0178 for it is accessed by other but the SD card is being accessed after the option card completes
option cards. by the option card. access to SD card.
The resulting parameters are not Set FP.005 as 0 to reset the failure;
Files/data in SD card is not
consistent with each other via Check whether the correct dada
Er.0188 consistent with those in
comparison between files/data in block of SD card are used in
inverter.
SD card and those in inverter. comparison.
It is trying to save data to SD
The data block of SD card Clear the data block;
Er.0179 card, but other data blocks exist
has been occupied. Save the data to another position.
in the position.
Check whether the target inverter
parameter supports the file control
mode;
SD card parameter setting
Set FP.005 as 0 and press the reset
Er.0187 mismatches the present
button;
inverter mode.
Confirm the target inverter control
mode is consistent with that of the
source parameter file.

Failure
subcode
The file folder and its structured
1 Erase all data blocks and re-execute
text to be accessed do not exist;
the operation;
2 Error in SD card data HEADER.DAT file is damaged;
Er.0182 Confirm the SD card is installed
structure Two and more files in
properly;
3 OLDATA\DRIVE folder have the
same identification number.
Delete part or all SD card data to
The SD card free space is not
Er.0184 SD card is full. vacate space;
enough.
No data is found in SD It is trying to access files or data Confirm the data block No. is
Er.0183
card. blocks not existing in SD card. correct.
Confirm the proper option card is
installed;
SD card failure and
Press the reset button and confirm
inconsistency between
the option parameter inconsistent
Er.0180 option cards of the source
with the SD card data block will be
inverter and the target
set as default;
inverter.
Set FP.005 as 9666 and press the
reset button.
The SD card data block is
Use another SD card;
not compatible with the
Er.0175 Set FP.005 as 9666 and press the
target inverter model
reset button.
version.
SD card failure and
Reset the inverter to solve the
inconsistency between the
trouble;
Er.0186 source file and the target
Confirm the inverter rated
inverter in rated voltage
parameter is properly transmitted.
or current
Set FP.005 as 9777 and press the
The read-only bit of SD reset button to clear all read-only
Er.0181
card is set as valid. identifiers in the data card of SD
card.
It occurs when
uploading/downloading the
SD card failure and failure option card parameter fails for Check the option card with the
Er.0174 in option card file improper response of the option failure related slot based on the
transmission card. It is followed by the failure failure subcode.
subcode which indicates the slot
number where the failure lies.
th
Set the 12 digit of control word
Control word failure bit is
Er.0035 FF.007 as valid, and then the Check FF.007 value.
valid.
control word failure appears.
Check whether the inverter is
possible to output current without
Error in current feedback Current Offset indicates the
Er.0225 any enable;
offset current offset is overlarge.
Contact the inverter supplier for
hardware failures.
Confirm the inverter executes
The inverter parameter is
Er.0097 parameter downloading without any
being altered.
enable.
1 Error in the inverter model The model file is different;
Er.0246
2 file The model file is missing.
Contact the inverter supplier.
Error in the inverter model An error in the inverter model
Er.0248
image file image file is detected.
Set FP.005 as the target parameter
The target parameter is
or 12001, and then check whether
Er.0199 written by 2 or more
any write conflict lies in the visible
parameters.
parameters of all menus.

Failure
subcode
Inverter configuration The software ID mismatches the
Er.0232 Contact the inverter supplier.
failure hardware ID.
Restore the inverter factory set
parameter and reset the inverter;
In saving the parameter, the inverter
“EEPROM Fail” indicates that the
The factory set parameter power supply shall not be
Er.0031 factory set parameter is
is downloaded. disconnected before confirming the
downloaded.
parameter saving is completed;
If the trouble cannot be eliminated,
return the inverter to the supplier.
After the inverter runs via
channels other than the panel,
2
Er.0006.2 is reported by pressing
The external failure is
Er.0006 the Stop/Reset button.
valid.
If the set value for F7.000 to F7.005
The set value for F7.000 to
3 is 6 or 7, cancel it to solve the
F7.005 is 6 or 7.
trouble.
Confirm the fan has been installed
and wired properly;
Er.0173 Fan failure Confirm the fan is not stuck;
Contact the supplier to replace the
fan.
Power on the inverter after it is
Er.0247 File changing
powered off.
It indicates the user firmware & Upgrade the inverter to latest
Er.0237 Firmware incompatibility
power firmware incompatibility. firmware version.
Data processing error: The inverter control panel is Contact the inverter supplier for
HF01
CPU hardware error damaged. hardware failures.
Data processing error: DMAC address error occurs. It
HF02 CPU memory indicates that the inverter
hardware failures.
management error control panel is damaged.
The bus failure exists. It indicates
Data processing error: Contact the inverter supplier for
HF03 that the inverter control panel is
CPU detects the bus error hardware failures.
damaged.
The use failure occurs. It
HF04 indicates that the inverter
CPU detects the use error hardware failures.
control panel is damaged.
HF05 Reserved
HF06 Reserved
The watchdog failure occurs. It
HF07 indicates that the inverter
watchdog failure hardware failures.
control panel is damaged.
The CPU interruption error
Data processing error: occurs. It indicates that the Contact the inverter supplier for
HF08
CPU interruption error inverter control panel is hardware failures.
damaged.
Overflow in the free memory
Data processing error: free Contact the inverter supplier for
HF09 area occurs. The inverter control
memory area overflow hardware failures.
panel is damaged.
HF10 Reserved
It is the nonvolatile memory
1 Contact the inverter supplier for
Data processing error: communication failure;
hardware failures.
HF11 nonvolatile memory EEPROM capacity is not
Upgrade with the compatible user
2 communication error compatible with the user
firmware.
firmware.
Data processing error: It is caused by the background
1 Contact the inverter supplier for
HF12 main program stack task;
hardware failures.
2 overflow Reserved

Failure
subcode
The master system is
3
interrupted.
HF13 Reserved
HF14 Reserved
HF15 Reserved
Data processing error:
It is caused by the control panel Contact the inverter supplier for
HF16 RTOS error
failure. hardware failures.
HF17 Reserved
The option card initialization is
1
timeout;
The program error occurs in
2 writing menus in writing flash
memory;
Error occurs in clearing flash
3 memory data blocks containing
HF18 the setup menu;
internal flash error hardware failures.
Error occurs in clearing flash
4 memory data blocks containing
the application menu;
Improper setup menu CRC exists
5
in the flash memory;
Improper application menu CRC
6
exists in the flash memory.
Upgrade the inverter firmware;
Data processing failure: HF19 indicates the inverter CRC
HF19 Contact the inverter supplier for
firmware CRC failure failure.
hardware failures.
Rectification Overheat in input rectification or
Er.0250
overheat/brake overheat brake IGBT is detected.
Error occurs in the current scale
Er.0231 Current scale range
range.
Output current of the 24 V user Check the total load of the digital
power supply or the digital output terminal;
output terminal is over the limit, Check whether the control line
Er.0026 Digital output overload
and maximum current output of wiring is correct;
individual digital output terminal Check whether the output wiring is
is 100 mA. damaged.
When the inverter is in the
When the inverter is set Reinstall and reset the operation
operation panel mode (F0.000=0
by the operation panel, panel;
Er.0034 or F0.004=0), the operation panel
the operation panel is Set values of F0.000 and F0.004 as
is removed or disconnected with
removed. nonzero.
the inverter.
Re-flash the power board procedure;
The power board is in
Er.0245 power off the inverter and then
boot mode.
power it on.
There is no communication
00001 between the control segment
Communication missing
and the power segment;
error occurs among the
A communication error occurs Contact the inverter supplier for
Er.0090 power board, control
00002 among the control segment and hardware failures.
panel and rectifier
the power segment;
module.
The rectifier module detects a
01100
communication error.

Failure
subcode
Confirm the overload is not clogged
Motor overheat failure indicates or absorbed;
that the motor suffers thermal Check whether the motor load
Output current overload overload, which is based on the changes; Adjust the rated motor
Er.0020 2
timeout (I t) calculated result of rated motor speed parameter (FH.003) (only in
current (FH.002) and time RFC-A mode);
constant FL.001. Confirm the rated motor current is
not zero.
There is no communication
Check wiring between the power
Er.0236 No power board between the power board and
board and control panel.
control panel.
Check whether the brake resistance
The inverter thermal model
Er.0101 Brake IGBT overheat value is equal to or over the
detects the Brake IGBT overheat.
minimum resistance value.
If the cooling fan control value
F9.010 is 0, this failure indicates Set the cooling fan control value
Er.0219 Control segment overheat
that the control panel is over 0 to increase ventilation.
overheated.
Check the DC input voltage level and
balance;
Check the DC bus ripple level;
Lower the load cycle;
Lower the motor load;
Check the current stability, and
check the motor parameter setting is
consistent with the nameplate
(FH.000, FH.001, FH.002, FH.003 and
It is the thermal model output FH.004 – all modes) if the current is
Er.0027 00200 DC bus overheat failure in the DC bus, and the not stable;
failure subcode is 0. Prohibit slip compensation: (F3.007 =
0) – (open loop mode);
Prohibit auto energy saving running:
(F3.005 = 0) – (open loop mode);
Select the fixed lifting mode: (F0.014
= Fixed) – (open loop mode);
Completely take off the load to
rotate for self-tuning (FH.008);
Lower the speed loop gain: – (RFC –
A).
Lower the inverter carrier frequency;
Confirm the auto switch to carrier
frequency (F3.011) is prohibited;
It is the thermal model output
The thermal model Increase acceleration / deceleration
Er.0021 00100 {Oht.I} failure in the inverter, and
detects inverter overheat time;
the failure subcode is 0.
Check the DC bus ripple level;
Confirm the three-phase input is
intact and equalized.

Failure
subcode
Confirm the cabinet / inverter fan
work normally;
Force the cooling fan to run at the
maximal speed;
Check the cabinet air duct;
Check whether the cabinet air inlet is
clogged;
Increase ventilation;
Overheat of the power The thermistor location is Lower the carrier frequency;
Er.0022 010ZZ
segment determined by zz. Lower the load cycle;
Increase acceleration / deceleration
time;
Refer to the inverter derating table
to confirm the inverter model is
correctly selected;
Select an inverter with higher
current/power.
Use the insulation tester to test the
motor & its wiring insulativity;
Install the output choke or sine filter;
Set F9.010 = 1 and force the cooling
fan to run at its maximal speed;
Check whether the cabinet / driving
fan works normally;
XX is the module code; YY is the
Er.0102 XXYZZ Rectifier overheat rectifier code; and Z is the
clogged;
thermistor location.
clogged;
Increase ventilation;
time;
Lower the load cycle and the motor
load.
time;
Reduce the torque boost if this
failure occurs in self-tuning;
Check whether the output cable is
The instantaneous overcurrent
shorted;
Instantaneous output failure is triggered when AC
Er.0003 00000 Use the insulation tester to check
overcurrent is detected. current is over the overcurrent
the motor insulation intactness;
point.
Check whether the motor cable
length is within the prescribed
range;
Reduce the speed loop gain;
Reduce the current loop gain.
Confirm the internal EMC filter has
been installed;
Confirm the motor cable length does
not surpass the maximal cable length
The absorption circuit used for motors corresponding to
Absorption circuit
Er.0092 01100 overcurrent failure is detected in the carrier frequency;
overcurrent is detected.
the inverter. Check the input voltage
unbalancedness;
Check whether the input is
interfered such as voltage sag caused
by the DC drive;

Failure
subcode
Use the megameter to test the
motor & its wiring insulativity;
Install the output choke or sine filter.
Check the brake resistor wiring;

Brake IGBT overcurrent is Check whether the brake resistance
Instantaneous overcurrent
Er.0004 01000 detected, and the brake IGBT value is equal to or over the
of brake IGBT
short-circuit protection is valid. minimum resistance value;
Check the brake resistor insulativity.
Trip out the motor wire at the
OI.dc failure indicates that the inverter side and use the insulation
Overcurrent is detected in
Er.0109 inverter output short-circuit tester to test the motor & its wiring
IGBT output.
protection is valid. insulativity;
Replace the inverter.
The option card does not in
The option card does not required time report
Reset the failure;
make any response when communication between it and
Er.0215 Replace the option card if the failure
the inverter changes the inverter has been missing
cannot be eliminated.
among modes. when the inverter changes
among modes.
Check the inverter & motor wiring;
Check the output phase failure: Set FL.0015 = 2 or 3 (Be cautious to
Er.0098 Output phase failure
FL.0015 = 0. cancel the output phase failure
protection).
Check whether the output cable is
shorted;
Output overcurrent is detected. Use the insulation tester to test the
Er.0228 Output short-circuit It may be caused by grounding motor insulativity intactness;
fault. Check the motor cable length is
within the required length for the
inverter model.
The motor frequency Lower the speed loop P gain to
Er.0007 surpasses the overspeed reduce speed overshoot (it is only
threshold. applicable in RFC-A mode).
Overvoltage failure: DC An instantaneous failure is
bus voltage is over its peak triggered in the control segment
00001 voltage or surpasses the Increase the deceleration time;
when DC bus voltage is over its
maximal continuous peak voltage; Lower the brake resistance value
voltage by 15 seconds. (make sure it is above the required
A failure is triggered in the
(200 V rated voltage: DC minimal resistance value);
control segment when DC bus
bus peak voltage is 415 V, Check the input voltage level;
Er.0002 00002 voltage is over its maximal
and its maximal Check whether DC bus voltage
continuous voltage by a certain
continuous voltage is 410 boosting is caused by the input
time (15 s);
V; 400 V rated voltage: DC voltage disturbance;
bus peak voltage is 830 V, An instantaneous failure is Use the insulation tester to test the
and its maximal triggered in the power segment motor insulativity.
01000
continuous voltage is 815 when DC bus voltage is over its
V) peak voltage.

Failure
subcode
Check whether the full load is the AC
input voltage level, and check its
If the customer requires DC
balance;
power supply or single-phase
Use an isolated oscilloscope to
Er.0032 00000 Input phase failure input rectification, set parameter
detect the DC bus ripple;
FL.0015 = 1 and set input as
Check the output current stability;
non-operating for phase failure.
Lower the motor load.
Hardware failure in the Hardware failure in the power Contact the inverter supplier for
Er.0235
power board processor hardware failures.
PLL running range exceeds the
1
lock;
Communications with the user
2 Power control board are missing the power
Er.0093 communication error or / board;
hardware failures.
missing is detected. Communications with the power
3
board are missing the user board;
There is communication CRC
4
error.
Configuration error in the Contact the inverter supplier for
Er.0220
power segment hardware failures.
The inverter detects a
Set FP.005 value as 1001, and then
Er.0037 Power-down save error power-down save error in the
reset the inverter.
non-volatile register.
00000 Remove the option card and reset
The internal power supply is
Internal power supply the inverter;
Er.0005 overloaded in the control
01100 failure Return the inverter to the supplier
segment and power segment.
for hardware failures.
Er.0014-17
Er.0011
Er.0009
Er.0001
Er.0094-95
These failures are reserved, so
Er.0103-108
Reserved failures their codes cannot be used in the
Er.0191-198
user-defined failure program.
Er.0168-173
Er.0238-245
23,39,99,176
205-214
223-224
Check the motor wiring;

Use the insulation tester to test
winding intactness of the motor
stator;
Check the motor interphase
impedance in the inverter side;
The measured impedance The stator impedance measured Check the motor interphase
Er.0033
exceeds the allowable in self-tuning exceeds ranges of impedance in the motor side;
parameter range. FC.008 and FH.005. Confirm the motor stator impedance
is within the allowable parameter
range of the inverter;
Set F0.014 = 0,1,2,3, and use the
oscilloscope to monitor the output
current waveform;
Replace the motor.
Er.0204 1 The option card is The option card was not installed Power it off, confirm a proper option

Failure
subcode
replaced. previously; card is installed in the slot, and then
An option card with the same power it on;
model is installed, but its set Confirm a proper option card is
2 parameter is changed; hence, the installed in the slot, confirm the
module parameter has been set option card parameter is right, and
as default; execute parameter save in FP.005.
An option card with the same
model is installed, but its
application parameter is
3
changed; hence, the module
parameter has been set as
default;
An option card with the same
model is installed, but its set &
application parameters are
4
changed; hence, the module
parameter has been set as
default;
Model of the previously installed
>99
option card is displayed.
Option card failure in slot Refer to failure-related chapters in
Er.0202
1 the option card user manual.
The option card type cannot be
1
identified;
All the required user-defined
parameter table information is
2
not provided, or the provided
one is damaged;
No enough space can be
3 allocated to the module as a
communication buffer;
Confirm the option card is properly
The module doesn’t run normally
4 Hardware failure in option installed;
Er.0200 when the inverter is powered on;
card 1 Replace the option card;
The option card is removed after
Replace the inverter.
the inverter is powered on, or
5
the option card has been shut
down;
The module stops accessing the
6 inverter parameter when the
inverter is changing its mode;
The option card doesn’t make
7 any response when the inverter
processor is reset.
Confirm the option card is properly
The option card in slot 1 is installed;
The option card in slot 1 is
Er.0203 removed after the inverter is Reinstall the option card;
removed.
powered on. Execute parameter save in FP.005 if
the option card is not required.
Functional work error of
Er.0201 Replace the option card.
the option card watchdog
The buffer relay is not off, or a
The buffer relay is not Contact the inverter supplier for
Er.0226 failure occurs in the buffer
closed. hardware failures.
detection circuit.
1) Check if the STO board has been
install.
STO board is not installed STO board is not installed or
Er.0234 2) Check if the connection is loose.
or malfunction malfunction
Contact the supplier if cannot solve
the problem

Failure
subcode
A hardware failure
Enter 1299 in FP.005 and press the
Er.0221 occurred in last
reset button to eliminate the failure.
powering-off.
Er.0227 RAM allocation error RAM allocation error
The power thermistor location is Contact the inverter supplier for
Er.0218 010ZZ Internal thermistor failure
determined by zz. hardware failures.
Check the brake resistor and its
wiring;
Confirm the brake resistance value is
Er.0010 Brake resistor overheat
equal to or greater than the required
minimal resistance value;
Check the brake resistor insulativity.
The motor thermistor is
Check the thermistor wiring;
Motor thermistor short-circuited, or its impedance
Er.0025 Replace the motor / the motor
short-circuit is too low (< 50 Ω) in control
thermistor.
terminal X3.
The motor thermistor of control
Motor thermistor Check the motor temperature;
Er.0024 terminal X3 displays the motor
overheat Check the thermistor wiring.
overheat.
Er.0091 Reserved Reserved Reserved
Er.0008 Reserved Reserved
An onboard user-program
Er.0096 defined failure is Check the user program.
triggered.
Onboard user-program
Er.0249 Check the onboard user program.
defined failure
Power off the inverter after
Parameter save error / The inverter is power off in
Er.0036 confirming the parameter saving has
incompletion parameter saving.
been completed.
The watchdog failure indicates
Control word watchdog
Er.0030 that the control word has been
timeout
enabled but is timeout.
The failure is reported if the
Er.0094
DC brake failure motor doesn't stop within 60 s
during the DC brake is applied.
If the output frequency is over
the offload detection frequency
threshold (FL.033), and the load
percentage is below the offload
Er.0038
Offload failure detection level (the load shall run
at set frequency in
non-acceleration & deceleration
process), the inverter reports the
failure.
Table.6.1 Failure codes and countermeasures
Priority Category Failure Note

HF01, HF02, HF03, HF04,
HF05, HF06, HF07,
HF08, HF09, HF10, HF11, This failure cannot be reset; and if any failure occurs,
1 Internal failure
HF12, HF13, HF14, all functions of the inverter will be disabled.
HF15, HF16, HF17, HF18
and HF19
Set FP.005 = 1299 and reset the inverter to eliminate
1 Stored hardware failure {Stored HF}
this failure.
Er.0218 to Er.0247 and
2 Non-resettable failure This failure cannot be reset.
Er.0200

Priority Category Failure Note

3 Volatile storage failure Er.0031 It can be reset if FP.005 value is set as 1233 / 1244.
Er.0174, Er.0175,
4 SD card failure This failure priority is 5 in powering on.
Er.0177 to Er.0188
4 Internal 24 V failure Er.0005
Failure with prolonged reset Er.0003, Er.0003, Er.0109
5 This failure can merely be reset after 10 s it is reported.
time and Er.0173
Input phase failure and DC bus Er.0032 and Er.0027 The inverter shuts down the motor before reporting
5
circuit protection failures of Er.0032 and Er.0027.
Other failures except for
5 Standard failure
the above
Table.6.2 Failure categories
Value Text Description Measure

1) Check if the correct brake resistor values has been used
ALA.1 Brake Resistor Braking overload
2) Check if there is a short circuit on cable
1) Check if the the motor parameter has been setup correctly
2) Check the accelerate/decelerate rate is correct
ALA.2 Motor Overload Motor overload
3) Check if the motor is damage
4) Check if there is no damage on the mechanical load
Inductor alarm
ALA.3 Reserved None
(reserved)
1) Check if the rating of the motor is correct
2) Check the accelerate/decelerate rate is correct
ALA.4 Drive Overload Drive overload
3) Check if the motor is damage
4) Check if there is no damage on the mechanical load
Auto tune in
ALA.5 Auto Tune None
progress
ALA.6 Limit Switch Limit switch active None
ALA.7 Fire Mode Fire Mode active None
ALA.8 Low Load Low load active None
ALA.9 Option Slot 1 Slot 1 alarm None
DC bus under DC bus under
ALA.10 Check if correct AC supply has been connect to the drive
voltage voltage
Slot 3 alarm
ALA.11 Reserved None
(Reserved)
Slot 4 alarm
ALA.12 Reserved None
(Reserved)
ALA.13 Low AC Low voltage mode Check if correct AC supply has been connect to the drive
ALA.14 Current limit Current limit active Check if the correct load has been connect to the drive
Table.6.3 Alarm codes and measures

Chapter VII Maintenance & Repair 99
Chapter VII Maintenance & Repair

Affected by the ambient temperature, moisture, dust and 3. The DC bus direct voltage measured is below 36 V.
vibration, combined aging and wear of internal devices, etc.,
internal potential failures may occur in the inverter; hence, it is
7.1 Routine maintenance & repair
necessary to provide routine and regular maintenance or the The inverter shall run at the environment as required by
inverter. Section 2.1; for unexpected cases probably occurring in
Note: Confirm the following aspects before inspection and operation, the user shall do the routine maintenance as shown
maintenance; otherwise, it may incur electric shock hazard. in Table.7.1. The inverter service life can be prolonged via
1. The inverter has been powered off; maintaining a good operating environment, recording daily
2. The operation panel is powered off; operating data and early diagnosing anomalies.
Inspection gist
Inspection object Criteria
Inspection content Cycle Inspection means
(1) Temperature and (1) Thermometer and
(1) Derating use at 40 ºC C ~ 50 50 ºC
moisture hygrometer
Operating At any
(2) Dust, water and
environment time (2) Visual inspection (2) No traces of water leakage
leakage
(3) Gases (3) Visual inspection (3) No odor
(1) Slight vibration and reasonable air
(1) Vibration and heat At any (1) Housing touch
Inverter temperature
time
(2) Noise (2) Hearing (2) No abnormal sound
(1) Heat At any (1) Hand touch (1) No abnormal heat
Motor
(2) Noise time (2) Hearing (2) Uniform noise
(1) Output current (1) Ammeter (1) Within the rated value range
Running status (2) Output voltage At any (2) Voltmeter (2) Within the rated value range
parameter (3) Internal time
(3) Thermometer (3) Temperature rise is below 35oC.
temperature
Table.7.1 Table of routine inspection tips
connections;
7.2 Regular maintenance
3. Check whether any damage lies in the power cable and
The user can conduct a regular inspection on the inverter
control table, especially cuts in their external skins contacting
based on the environment every 3 to 6 months.
metal surfaces;
Note: 1. Only qualified personnel is allowed to disassemble
4. Check whether the insulation binder falls off the power cable
relevant components, maintain the inverter, and replace
nose;
relevant devices;
5. Have a thorough cleaning of dusts on the circuit board and
2. Do not leave such metal pieces as screws and gaskets in the
the air duct, it is preferable to do such cleaning by a vacuum
apparatus; otherwise they may damage it.
cleaner;
General inspection items are as follows:
6. The inverter for long storage shall be subject to the
1. Check whether crews of the control terminal are loose,
powering-on test once within 2 years; in powering-on, its
and screw up the loose one;
voltage shall be gradually boosted to the rate value by the
2. Check whether bad contact lies in the main loop terminal
voltage regulator; The powering-on time is about 5 hours, and it
and check whether any overhear traces lies in the copper bar
can be not brought onto load;

100 Chapter VII Maintenance & Repair
7. Detection means for the rectifier diode and IGBT freewheel Criteria: liquid leakage, safety valve bulge, electrostatic
diode are as follows: capacity determination and insulation resistance
(1) Remove L1, L2 and L3 as well as U, V, and W connection lines; determination.
(2) Put the multimeter in place and select the diode characteristic 3. Relay
position; Possible factors causing damage: corrosion and frequent actions.
(3) Use the multimeter to test the diode quality by measuring Criteria: On / off out of order.
the diode characteristic between L1, L2, L3, U, V, W and (+) &
(-).
7.4 Inverter storage
After purchasing the inverter, the user shall pay much
Note: attention to the following aspects for its temporary storage
1. The diode characteristic shall not be measured before and long storage:
full discharge of the filter capacitor is confirmed; 1. Avoid to store it in the place with high temperature,
2. The measured value size is related to the inverter type; moisture, dirt, and metal dusts and keep a good ventilation.
if input or output three-phase values are consistent, the 2. Power on the inverter for at least 5 hours once within 2
diode is usually regarded as good. years for long storage will result in degradation of the
electrolytic capacitor; and the input voltage shall be gradually
7.3 Replacement of inverter wearing parts boosted to the rated value by the voltage regulator.
The inverter wearing parts include the cooling fan and the
buffer capacitor, and their service life is closely related to the
7.5 Inverter warranty
use environment and maintenance. The general service life is The company will provide warranty service for the following
shown in Table.7.2. cases:
1. The warrant range is limited to the inverter itself;
2. The manufacturer is responsible for 18-month (from the
Device name Service life
date of production on) warranty for failure or damage
Fan 30,000 ~ 40,000 hours
occurring in normal use; reasonable repair fees will be charged
Electrolytic capacitor 40,000 ~ 50,000 hours
on failure or damage occurring in normal use beyond the
Relay About 100,000 times
warranty period;
Table.7.2 Service life of wearing parts
3. Repair fees shall be charged on the following cases even
The user can determine the replacement period based on the within the 18-month warranty period:
running time. (1) Apparatus damage caused by use without observance of
1. Cooling fan the user manual;
Possible factors causing damage: bearing abrasion and blade aging. (2)Damage caused by fire, flood, voltage abnormity, etc.;
Criteria: cracks in the fan blade, abnormal vibration sound in (3)Damage caused by use of the inverter in improper
starting up, etc. functions.
2. Electrolytic capacitor 4. The service fee is charged based on the actual cost; and it
Possible factors causing damage: higher ambient temperature, will be processed by the contract-first principle if there is a
pulsating current increase caused by frequent load jump and contract concerned.
aging electrolyte.

Appendix 1 Parameter Summary Table 101
Appendix 1 Parameter Summary Table

The parameters of MEV series inverter are classified by functions. They are divided into 19 groups, including F0~F9, FA, Fb, FC, FE,
FF, FH, FL, Fn, FP, etc. Each function group has certain parameters. The parameters shall be identified by (parameter group number
+ parameter number), the FW.XYZ characters occurred in other parts of this manual means the No. “XYZ” parameter in group “W”.
th
Ex., “F6.008” indicates the No. 8 parameter in the 6 function group.
To facilitate the parameter setting, when operating through the operation panel, the function group no. corresponds to level 1
menu, the parameter no. corresponds to level 2 menu, and the parameter parameter corresponds to level 3 menu.
Description of column content of function table is shown below:
st nd
The 1 column “parameter” is the number of parameter group and parameter. The 2 column “name” is the full name of
rd
parameter. The 3 column "LCD display” is the brief instruction of the parameter names on LCD display of the operation panel. The
th th
4 column “setting range” is the valid setting range of the parameters, displayed on LCD display of the operation panel. The 5
th
column “minimum unit” is the minimum unit of the parameter setting. The 6 column “default setting” is the default set value of
th
the parameters. The 7 column “attribute of the parameter” is the attribute of the parameters (i.e. define the attribute of the
parameter). The description is shown below:
RW (read/write): read/write the parameter
RO (read only): read the parameter
RA (rating dependent): this parameter is likely to have different values and ranges with inverters with different levels of voltage and
current. If the levels of the target inverter and the source inverter are different, such parameters will not be transmitted via the
smart card.
TE (text): the parameter uses text strings instead of numbers
ND (no default): the parameter is not modified when thedefault default values are loaded (except when the inverters are in
production or EEPROM fails).
PT (protected): cannot be used to assign the target parameters.
NC (not copied): cannot be modified by the smart card when copying parameters
VM (variable max): the maximum value of the parameter may change
FI (filtered): the values of some parameters displayed on the operation panel are filtered for they often change quickly.
The “parameter system” includes decimal system (DEC) and hexadecimal system (HEX). If the parameter is presented with the
hexadecimal system, then each data bit is independent while the parameters are being edited, the value range of some bits can be
of the hexadecimal system (0~F).
1. The “LCD display” is effective only when the LCD Chinese/English operation panel is used.
2. “Default value” means the refreshed value of the parameter parameter when recovering the default parameter. But the actual
detection value or record value will not be refreshed.
3. To effectively protect the parameters, the inverter provides password protection for the parameter.

102 Appendix 1 Parameter Summary Table
Group F0: Basic Running Parameter
Minimum Attribute of
Parameter Name LCD display Set range Default value
unit parameter
Motor 1 0: Digital reference 1, adjusting the

reference potentiometer on the operation
frequency panel
selector 1: Digital reference 2, terminal
UP/DN adjustment
2: Digital reference 3, serial port
reference
Main Reference 3: AI1 analog reference RW,TE
F0.000 1 0
Selector 4: AI2 analog reference
5: Terminal pulse (PULSE) reference
6: Ex A1,External analogue reference
1 from SI-IO (MEV2000 and
MEV3000 only)
7:Ex A2,External analogue reference
2 from SI-IO (MEV2000 and
MEV3000 only)
0 (off): The setting frequency will be

Digital
Digital Ref Save saved upon power down
F0.001 Reference 1 0 RW
Selector 1 (on): The setting frequency will not
Save Selector
be saved upon power down
0 (off): The setting frequency will be

Digital
Digital Ref Stop maintained upon shutdown
F0.002 Reference 1 0 RW
Select 1 (on): The setting frequency will be
Stop Selector
reset to F0.003 upon shutdown
F0.013 lower limit frequency ~

Main Digital Main Digital
F0.003 F0.012 upper limit frequency 0.01 Hz 50.00 Hz RW,VM
Reference Reference
(only available for F0.000=0, 1, 2)
0: Operation panel running

Motor 1
command channel
operating
Command Source 1: Terminal running command RW,TE
F0.004 Command 1 0
Selector channel
Source
2: Serial port running command
Selector
channel
Keypad
Running Keypad Direction
F0.005 0: Run forward; 1: Run reverse 1 0 RW,TE
Direction Select
Selector

unit parameter
Maximum
Max output
F0.006 Output 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 50.00 Hz RW
frequency
Frequency
Motor 1
Motor Rated
F0.007 rated 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 50.00 Hz RW, ND
Frequency
frequency
Motor 1 Motor Rated Motor rated RW,RA,VM,

F0.008 1~480 V 1V
rated voltage Voltage value ND
Motor 1 low
Low Frequency
F0.009 frequency 0~30.0% 0.1% 0.0% RW,RA
Voltage Boost
voltage boost
Motor 1
Acceleration Rate 0.1~3200
F0.010 acceleration
1 Note: the default unit is second; see
rate 1 6.0 s
F9.011 for the 0.1 RW,VM
Motor 1
Deceleration acceleration/deceleration time unit
F0.011 deceleration
Rate 1 selection
rate 1
Motor 1
maximum Maximum Lower limit frequency ~ maximum
F0.012 0.01 Hz 50.00 Hz RW,VM
reference Reference Clamp output frequency
clamp
Motor 1
minimum Minimum
F0.013 0.00 ~ upper limit frequency 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW,VM
reference Reference Clamp
clamp

unit parameter
0: Customized V/F mode

(determined by parameters between
F0.15 and F0.20)
1: Torque decrease curve 1
(2.0-power)
(1.7-power)
Motro 1 V/F Open Loop Mode
F0.014 (1.2-power) 1 0 RW,TE
Curve Select Select
4: Open-loop vector control mode
(Ur)
(Ur_S)
(Ur_I)
(Ur_Auto)
Motor 1 V/F
Third Point
F0.015 third point F0.017~F0.006 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Frequency
frequency
Motor 1 V/F
Third Point
F0.016 third point F0.018~100.0% 0.1% 0.0% RW
Voltage
voltage
Motor 1 V/F
Second Point
F0.017 second point F0.019~F0.015 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Frequency
frequency
Motor 1 V/F
Second Point
F0.018 second point F0.020~F0.016 0.1% 0.0% RW
Voltage
voltage
Motor 1 V/F
First Point
F0.019 first point 0.00~F0.017 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Frequency
frequency
Motor 1 V/F
First Point
F0.020 first point 0~F0.018 0.1% 0.0% RW
Voltage
voltage

unit parameter
Motor 1
Boost End 0.0 ~ 50.0% (relative F0.007 rated
F0.021 Boost End 0.1% 10.0% RW
Frequency frequency)
Frequency
Group F1: Frequency Reference Parameter
unit parameter
Maximum
Maximum Ref
F1.000 input pulse 0.00~100.00kHz 0.1 k 10.0 kHz RW
Frequency
frequency
Minimum
pulse
Two Point Min
F1.001 frequency 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 0.00% RW
Frequency
reference
input
Actual value
of reference
Drive Reference
at minimum
F1.002 at Min 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 0.00% RW
pulse
Frequency
frequency
input
Maximum
pulse
Two Point Max
F1.003 frequency 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 100.00% RW
Frequency
reference
input
Actual value
of reference
Drive Reference
at maximum
F1.004 at Max 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 100.00% RW
pulse
Frequency
frequency
input
Minimum
input of Analog Input 1
F1.005 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 0.00% RW
Analogue Min Reference
Input 1

unit parameter
Actual value
of reference
at minimum Analog Input 1
F1.006 Analogue At Min 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 0.00% RW
Input 1 Reference
reference
input
Maximum
F1.007 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 100.00% RW
Analogue Max Reference
Input 1
Actual value
of reference
at maximum Analog Input 1
F1.008 Analogue At Max 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 100.00% RW
Input 1 Reference
reference
input
Minimum
F1.009 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 0.00% RW
Analogue Min Reference
Input 2
Actual value
of reference
at minimum Analog Input 2
F1.010 Analogue At Min 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 0.00% RW
Input 2 Reference
reference
input
Maximum
F1.011 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 100.00% RW
Analogue Max Reference
Input 2

unit parameter
Actual value
of reference
at maximum Analog Input 2
F1.012 Analogue At Max 0.00~100.00% 0.1% 100.00% RW
Input 2 Reference
reference
input
Analogue
Analog Input 1
F1.013 Input 1 0~6 1 6 RW,TE
Mode
Mode
Group F2: Starting and Braking Parameter
unit parameter
0 (disabled): Run from the startup

frequency
F2.000 Start Mode Start Mode 1 (enable): Start after rotating 1 0 RW,TE
speed tracing
4 (braking): Brake and then start
Start
F2.001 Start Frequency 0.20 ~ Min{60,F0.012} 0.01 Hz 0.50 Hz RW
Frequency
Start
Start Frequency
F2.002 Frequency 0.00~10.00s 0.1 s 0.0 s RW
Hold Time
Hold Time
Spin Start
F2.003 Spin Start Boost 0.0~10.0 0.1 1.0 RW
Boost
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
Ramp Mode Ramp Mode
F2.005 1: S curve acceleration/deceleration 1 0 RW,TE
Select Select
2: Auto acceleration/deceleration
Start Time of Start Time of S 10.0%~50.0%

F2.006 0.1% 20.0% RW
S Curve Curve
Rising Time of Rising Time of S 10.0%~70.0%

F2.007 0.1% 60.0% RW
S Curve Curve

Group F2: Starting and Braking Parameter
unit parameter
0: Free shutdown
1 (acceleration/deceleration):
F2.008 Stop Mode Stop Mode Deceleration shutdown 1 0 RW,TE
2: DC braking with zero speed
detection
End Time of S End Time of S

F2.009 10.0~50.0% 0.1% 20.0% RW
Curve Curve
Falling Time Falling Time of S

F2.010 10.0~70.0% (60.0%) 0.1% 60.0% RW
of S Curve Curve
DC Injection Injection Braking

F2.011 0.0~150.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW,RA
Braking Level Level
DC Injection Injection Braking

F2.012 0.0~25.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s RW
Braking Time Time
Braking IGBT
Braking IGBT
F2.013 Lower 0~999 V 0.1 KW 0.0 RW,RA
Lower Threshold
Threshold
Braking IGBT
Braking IGBT
F2.014 Upper 0~999 V 0.01 s 0.00 RW
Upper Threshold
Threshold
DC inject
F2.015 start 0.00~60.00Hz 0.01 5.00 RW
frequency
Group F3: Auxiliary Running Parameter
Minimum Default Attribute of

Parameter Name LCD display Set range
unit value parameter
F3.000
Reverse-Proof 0 (off): Reverse operation is allowed
F3.000 Reverse-Proof 1 0 RW
Selector 1(on): Reverse operation is prohibited
Selector
F3.001 Delay
Time Between Change Of
F3.001 0.0~3600.0s 0.1 s 0.0 s RW
Change Of Direction Delay
Direction
Low Frequency 0 (off): No action

F3.005 Reserved 1 0 RW
Slip Boost 1 (on): Action


Auto Energy
Low Frequency 0 (off): No action
F3.006 Saving 1 1 RW
Slip Boost 1 (on): Ongoing action
Operation
Auto Energy
Auto Voltage
F3.007 Saving -150.0~150.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
Regulation
Operation
Automatic
Voltage
F3.008 Slip Comp Gain 0.00~10.00Hz 0.01 Hz 10.00Hz RW
Regulation
Enable
Motor 1 Gain 0:64 ms

of Slip 1:128 ms
Compensation
2:256 ms
Motor 1 Slip
Slip Comp Limit
Compensation
Slip Comp Filter
Limit
Switching
Motor 1 Slip
Frequency
Compensation
Auto-Switching
F3.009 Time Const 1 1 RW,TE
Frequency
F3.005 Auto
Enable
Energy Saving 3:512 ms
Low Acoustic
Operation
Noise Enable
F3.006
Jog Reference
Automatic
Voltage
Regulation
Enable
Carrier wave 0:0.667 kHz

Carrier wave
frequency
frequency 1:1 kHz
Switching
Jog Interval 2:2 kHz
Frequency
Jog Acceleration
3:3 kHz 3.0 kHz
F3.010 Rate 1 RW,RA
Jog Deceleration 4:4 kHz
Rate 5:6 kHz
Acceleration 6:8 kHz
Rate 2
7:12 kHz


Deceleration
Rate 2
Acceleration
Rate 3
Deceleration
8:16 kHz
Rate 3
Acceleration
Rate 4
Deceleration
Rate 4
0 (off): Automatic adjustment for

Automatic
Adjustment carrier wave frequency selects no
adjustment
selection for action
F3.011 selection for 1 1 RW
carrier wave 1 (on): Ongoing action is selected for
carrier wave
frequency the automatic adjustment for carrier
frequency
wave frequency.
Tone control Tone control for 0 (off): No motor tone control function
F3.012 1 0 RW
for motor motor 1 (on): Motor tone control function
Auto-Switching
Preset
F3.013 Frequency 0.10~50.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 5.00 Hz RW
Reference 1
Change Enable
Motor Tone Preset

F3.014 0.0~100.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s RW
Adjustment Reference 2
Preset
F3.015 Jog Reference
Reference 3 6.0 s
0.1~60.0 s 0.1 RW,RA
Preset
F3.016 Jog Interval
Reference 4
Preset
F3.017 Jog Acc Time
Reference 5
Preset
F3.018 Jog Dec Time 0.1~3200
Reference 6
Note: he default unit is second;
Acceleration Preset 6.0 s
F3.019 see F9.011 for the 0.1 RW,RA
Time 2 Reference 7
acceleration/deceleration time unit
Deceleration
F3.020 Skip Reference 1 selection
Time 2
Acceleration Skip Reference

F3.021
Time 3 Band 1


Deceleration
F3.022 Skip Reference 2
Time 3
Acceleration Skip Reference

F3.023 5.00 Hz
Time 4 Band 2
Deceleration
F3.024 Skip Reference 3 10.00 Hz
Time 4
Preset Skip Reference

F3.025 20.00 Hz
Reference 1 Band 3
Preset Reverse-Proof
F3.026 Lower limit frequency ~ upper limit 30.00 Hz
Reference 2 Selector 0.01 Hz RW
frequency
Preset Change Of
F3.027 40.00 Hz
Reference 3 Direction Delay
Preset Low Frequency

F3.028 45.00 Hz
Reference 4 Slip Boost
Auto Energy
Preset
F3.029 Saving 50.00 Hz
Reference 5
Operation
Preset Auto Voltage

F3.030 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW,VM
Reference 6 Regulation
Preset
F3.031 Slip Comp Gain 0.00~30.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Reference 7
Skip Reference
F3.032 Slip Comp Limit 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW,VM
1
Skip Reference
F3.033 Slip Comp Filter 0.00~30.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Band 1
Skip Reference Switching

F3.034 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW,VM
2 Frequency
Auto-Switching
Skip Reference
F3.035 Frequency 0.00~30.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Band 2
Enable


RW, TE, ND,

F4.000 User Drive Mode User Drive Mode 1, 2 1 1
NC, PT, BU
F4.001 Motor ASR-P1 Motor ASR-P1 0.000~200.000s/rad 0.001 0.100 s/rad RW
F4.002 Motor ASR-I1 Motor ASR-I1 0.00~655.35 s²/rad 0.01 0.10 RW
F4.003 Motor ASR-D1 Motor ASR-D1 0.00000~0.65535 1/rad 0.00001 0.00000 RW,BU
F4.004 Motor ASR-P2 Motor ASR-P2 0.000~200.000s/rad 0.001 0.100 s/rad RW
F4.005 Motor ASR-I2 Motor ASR-I2 0.00~655.35 s²/rad 0.01 0.10 RW
F4.006 Motor ASR-D2 Motor ASR-D2 0.00000~0.65535 1/rad 0.00001 0.00000 RW,BU
Motor ASR 1/2 Switching Gain Change

F4.007 0.00~2*F0.012 0.01 0.00 RW,VM
Frequency Threshold
Freq Controller
F4.008 Motor ASR Gain Select 0,1,2 1 0 RW,BU
Gain Select
Current
F4.009 Motor ACR-P 0.00~4000.00 0.01 20.00 RW
Controller P Gain
Current
F4.010 Motor ACR-I 0.000~600.000 0.001 40.000 RW
Controller I Gain
Torque Mode
F4.011 Torque Mode Selector 0~5 1 0 RW
Selector
Torque
Torque Reference
F4.012 Reference 0~4 1 0 RW
Selector
Selector
Torque
Torque Reference
F4.013 Reference 0~65535ms 1 0 RW,BU
Filtering Time
Filtering Time
Torque
F4.014 Torque Reference Depending on mode 0.1 0.0% RW,VM
Reference
Inertia Compensation Inertia Comp

F4.016 0, 1 1 0 RW
Enable Enable
Speed To Torque Control Speed To Torque

F4.017 Depending on mode 0.1 0.0% RW
Threshold Threshold
Speed To Torque Control Speed To Torque

F4.018 0~1000 ms 1 0 ms RW
Delay Control Delay


Flux Control Flux Control

F4.019 0, 1 1 0 RW
Compensation Disable Comp Disable
User Current Maximum User Current

F4.020 Depending on model 0.1 165.0% RW,VM
Scaling Max Scaling
F4.021 Torque Offset Torque Offset Depending on model 0.1 0.0% RW
Torque Offset
F4.022 Torque Offset Select 0, 1 1 0 RW
Select

F5.000 PID1 Enable PID1 Enable 0, 1 1 0 RW
PID1 Reference
F5.001 PID1 Reference Selector 0~4 1 0 RW
Selector
PID1 Feedback
F5.002 PID1 Feedback Selector 0~8 1 0 RW
Selector
PID1 Feed Forward PID1 Feed Forward

F5.003 0~4 1 0 RW
Selector Selector
PID1 Reference
F5.004 PID1 Reference Filtering 0.01~50.00 s 0.01 0.50 s RW
Filtering
PID1 Feedback
F5.005 PID1 Feedback Filtering 0.01~50.00 s 0.01 0.50 s RW
Filtering
PID1 Digital
F5.006 PID1 Digital Reference 0.00~100.00% 0.01 0.00% RW
Reference
PID1 Feed Forward PID1 Feed-fwds

F5.007 0.00~100.00% 0.01 0.00% RW
Reference Reference
PID1 Feed Forward

F5.008 PID1 Feed Forward Gain 0.00~10.00 0.01 1 RW
Gain
PID1 Minimum
F5.009 PID1 Minimum Reference 0.0%~F5.011 0.01% 0.0% RW,VM
Reference
Feedback Corresponding
PID1 Min Ref
F5.010 to PID1 Minimum 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 20.0% RW
Feedback Ratio
Reference


PID1 Maximum
F5.011 PID1 Maximum Reference F5.009~100.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
Reference
PID1 Max Ref
F5.012 to PID1 Maximum 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
Feedback Ratio
Reference
PID1 Proportional
F5.013 PID1 Proportional Gain 1 0.000~4.000 0.001 1.000 RW
Gain
F5.014 PID1 Integral Gain 1 PID1 Integral Gain 0.000~4.000 0.001 0.500 RW
F5.015 PID1 Differential Gain 1 PID1 Differential Gain 0.000~4.000 0.001 0.000 RW
F5.016 F5.016 PID1 Gain 2 Enable PID1 Gain 2 Enable 0, 1 1 0 RW
PID1 Proportional
F5.017 PID1 Proportional Gain 2 0.000~4.000 0.001 1 RW
Gain 2
F5.018 PID1 Integral Gain 2 PID1 Integral Gain 2 0.000~4.000 0.001 0.5 RW
PID1 Differential Gain

F5.019 PID1 Differential Gain 2 0.000~4.000 0.001 0 RW
2
PID1 Gain switch

F5.020 PID1 Gain switch level 0.00 ~ 100.00 0.01 50.00 RW
level
F5.021 PID1 Sampling Period PID1 Sampling Period 0.004~50.000 s 0.004 0.500 s RW,BU
F5.022 PID1 Error Limit PID1 Error Limit 0.0~20% 0.1% 2.0% BU,RW
F5.023 PID1 Polarity Selector PID1 Polarity Selector 0, 1 1 0 RW,TE
F5.024 PID1 integral hold PID1 Integral Hold 0, 1 1 0 RW
PID1 Speed
F5.025 PID Speed Reference 0~39000 rpm 1 0 BU,RW
Reference
PID1 Preset
F5.026 PID1 Preset Frequency 0.00~F0.012 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz BU,RW
Frequency
PID1 Preset Frequency PID1 Preset Freq

F5.027 0.0~3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s RW
Holding Time Holding Time
F5.030 PID2 Enable PID2 Enable 0, 1 1 0 RW
PID2 Reference
F5.031 PID2 Reference Selector 0~4 1 0 RW
Selector
PID2 Feedback
F5.032 PID2 Feedback Selector 0~8 1 0 RW
Selector


F5.033 PID2 Feed Forward PID2 Feed Forward

F5.033 0~4 1 0 RW
Selector Selector
PID2 Reference
F5.034 PID2 Reference Filtering 0.01~50.00 s 0.01 0.50 s RW
Filtering
PID2 Feedback
F5.035 PID2 Feedback Filtering 0.01~50.00 s 0.01 0.50 s RW
Filtering
PID2 Digital
F5.036 PID2 Digital Reference 0.00~100.00% 0.01 0.00% RW
Reference
PID2 Feed Forward PID2 Feed-forwards

F5.037 0.00~100.00% 0.01 0.00% RW
Reference Reference
PID2 Feed Forward

F5.038 PID2 Feed Forward Gain 0.00~10.00 0.01 1.00 RW
Gain
PID2 Minimum
F5.039 PID2 Minimum Reference 0.0%~F5.041 0.01% 0.0% RW,VM
Reference
PID2 Min Ref
F5.040 to PID2 Minimum 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 20.0% RW
Feedback Ratio
Reference
PID2 Maximum
F5.041 PID2 Maximum Reference F5.039~100.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
Reference
PID2 Max Ref
F5.042 to PID2 Maximum 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
Feedback Ratio
Reference
PID2 Proportional
F5.043 PID2 Proportional Gain 1 0.000~4.000 0.001 1.000 RW
Gain
F5.044 PID2 Integral Gain 1 PID2 Integral Gain 0.000~4.000 0.001 0.500 RW
F5.045 PID2 Differential Gain 1 PID2 Differential Gain 0.000~4.000 0.001 0.000 RW
F5.046 PID2 Gain 2 Enable PID2 Gain 2 Enable 0, 1 1 0 RW
PID2 Proportional
F5.047 PID2 Proportional Gain 2 0.000~4.000 0.001 1 RW
Gain 2
F5.048 PID2 Integral Gain 2 PID2 Integral Gain 2 0.000~4.000 0.001 0.5 RW
PID2 Differential Gain

F5.049 PID2 Differential Gain 2 0.000~4.000 0.001 0 RW
2


PID2 Gain switch

F5.050 PID2 Gain switch level 0.00 ~ 100.00 0.01 50.00 RW
level
F5.051 PID2 Sampling Period PID2 Sampling Period 0.004~50.000 s 0.004 0.500 s RW,BU
F5.052 PID2 Error Limit PID2 Error Limit 0.0~20% 0.1% 2.0% BU,RW
F5.053 PID2 Polarity Selector PID2 Polarity Selector 0,1 1 0 RW,TE
Pulse Lines Per

F5.060 Pulse Lines Per Revolution 0~65535 1 256 RW
Revolution
PID Preset Reference

F5.061 PID Preset Reference1 0.00~100.00% 0.01% 0.00% RW
1

2

3

4

5

6

7
Group F6: Weaving Swing Frequency and Brake Function

F6.000
Traverse
Traverse 0: Do not use the swing frequency function
F6.000 Function 1 0 RW
function 1: Use the swing frequency function
Selection
selection
Unit place of LED: input mode

F6.001
Traverse 0: Auto input mode (according to F6.03)
Traverse
F6.001 Operating 1: Manual input through terminal 1 0000 RW
operating
Mode Tens place of LED: swing amplitude control
mode
0: Variable swing amplitude


1: Fixed swing amplitude

Hundreds place of LED: selection of the
swing frequency starting mode after
shutdown
0: Start according to the state stored before
shutdown
1: Restart
Thousands place of LED: swing frequency
status power down storage
0: Save the swing frequency status
parameters upon power-down
1: Do not save the swing frequency status
parameters upon power-down
Pre-traverse Pre-traverse
F6.002 0.00 Hz~F0.012 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW,VM
frequency Frequency
Holding time
Pre-traverse
of
F6.003 Freq Holding 0.0~3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s RW
Pre-traverse
Time
frequency
Traverse Traverse
F6.004 0.0~50.0% 0.1% 0.0% RW
amplitude Amplitude
Jitter Jitter
F6.005 0.0 ~ 50.0% (compare to F6.004) 0.1% 0.0% RW
frequency Frequency
Traverse Traverse
F6.006 operating Operating 0.0~999.0s 0.1 s 10.0 s RW
cycle Cycle
Rise Time Of
Rising time of 0.0 ~ 100.0% (refer to swing frequency
F6.007 Triangular 0.1% 50.0% RW
triangle wave circle)
Wave
BC Brake BC Brake 0 (off): The brake switches on 1 (on): RO,ND,NC,

F6.008 1 0
Release Release The brake releases PT
0 (disabled): The brake controller is disabled

F6.009 BC Enable BC Enable 1 0 RW, TE
1 (enabled): The brake controller is enabled
BC Upper BC Upper
F6.010 Current Current 0~200.0% 1% 50.0% RW
Threshold Threshold


BC Lower BC Lower
F6.011 Current Current 0~200.0% 1% 10.0% RW
Threshold Threshold
BC Brake BC Brake
F6.012 Release Release 0.00~20.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.00 Hz RW
Frequency Frequency
BC Brake
BC Brake Apply
F6.013 Apply 0.00~20.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 2.00 Hz RW
Frequency
Frequency
BC Brake
F6.014 BC Brake Delay 0.0~25.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s RW
Delay
BC Post-brake BC Post-brake
F6.015 0.0~25.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s RW
Release Delay Release Delay
BC Initial BC Initial
F6.016 0~2 1 0 RW, TE
Direction Direction
BC Brake
Brake Apply
Apply
F6.017 Thru Zero 0.00~25.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Through Zero
Threshold
Threshold
Note: the central swing frequency is the current set frequency by default (the swing frequency setting is invalid when jogging or in
closed loop)
Group F7: Terminal Parameter

Multi-function
F7.000 X1 Control 0 ~ 80, see F7 for details 1 0 RW
terminal X1/Y1
Multi-function
F7.001 X2 Control 0 ~ 80, see F7 for details 1 0 RW
terminal X2/Y2
Multi-function
F7.002 input terminal X3 Control 0 ~ 49, see F7 for details 1 0 RW
X3
F7.003~F7.00
Reserved Reserved
4


Multi-function
Analog Input 2
F7.005 input terminal 0 ~ 44, see F7 for details 1 0 RW
Control
Ai2/X6*
0: Two-wire running mode 1

FWD/REV FWD/REV
1: Two-wire running mode 2
F7.008 operating operating 1 0 RW
2: Three-wire running mode 1
modes setup modes
3: Three-wire running mode 2
Up and Down
F7.009 UP/DN rate 0.01~99.99 Hz/s 0.01 Hz/s 1.00 Hz/s RW
rate
Multi-function
F7.011 Relay 1 Control 0~20 1 0 RW
relay 1 terminal
Multi-function
F7.012 Relay 2 Control 0~20 1 0 RW
relay 2 terminal
Frequency
Freq arriving
F7.013 arriving signal 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 2.50 Hz RW,VM
signal (FAR)
(FAR)
Freq Detection
F7.014 FDT1 level 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 50.00 Hz RW,VM
Level (FDT1)
Freq Detection
F7.015 FDT1 lag 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.00 Hz RW,VM
Lag (FDT1)
Freq Detection
F7.016 FDT2 level 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 25.00 Hz RW,VM
Level (FDT2)
Freq Detection
F7.017 FDT2 lag 0.00~550.0 Hz 0.01 Hz 1.00 Hz RW,VM
Lag (FDT2)
F7.018
~ Reserved Reserved - - 0 *
F7.024
Multi-function
analog output Analog Output 1
F7.025 0~11 1 0 RW
terminal Control
AO1/Y3
F7.026 Reserved n/a
F7.028 Reserved n/a
F7.029 Reserved n/a


Analogue
Analog Output 1
F7.030 output 1 0.0~4000.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
Scaling
scaling
F7.031 Reserved n/a
Maximum 0: 1 KHz
Frequency Out
output 1: 2 KHz
F7.032 or PWM Out 1 0 RW,TE
frequency of Y1 2:5 KHz
Scaling
3: 10 KHz
Preset last Final counting

F7.033 F7.34~9999 1 0 RW
counting value value
Preset early Specified

F7.034 0~F7.33 1 0 RW
counting value Counting Value
Digital IO invert
F7.035 Digital IO Invert 0~4095 1 0 RW
control
F7.036~F7.04 \
Reserved
0
Serial
communication
Y1 frequency
F7.041 pulse 0~65535 1 0 RW
out serial value
frequency
output scaling
Analogue
F7.042 Reserved
Output 2 Offse
Y1 digital \
F7.043 0.0~3600.0s 0.1 0.0s RW
output on delay
Y1 digital \
F7.044 output off 0.0~3600.0s 0.1 0.0s RW
delay
Group F8: Display Control Parameter
Default Attribute of
Parameter Name LCD display Set range Minimum unit
value parameter
Displayed Binary setting:

Status - Running
F8.001 parameter 0: No display; 1: Display 1 3 FF RW
Parameters 1
group 1 Unit place of LED:

value parameter
during BIT0: Output frequency (Hz)

operation (before compensation)
BIT1: Output frequency (Hz)
(after compensation)
BIT2: Set frequency (Hz flashing)
BIT3: Output current (A)
Tens place of LED:
BIT0: Operating rotate speed
(r/min)
BIT1: Set rotating speed (r/min)
BIT2: Operating line speed
(mm/s)
BIT3: Set line speed (mm/s)
Hundreds place of LED:
BIT0: Output power
BIT1: Output toque (%)
Note: the default display shall
be running frequency before
compensation when all the
parameters are 0
Binary setting:
0: No display; 1: Display
Unit place of LED:
BIT0: Output voltage (V)
BIT1: Bus voltage
BIT2: Analog input AI1
Displayed BIT3: Analog input AI2
parameter Tens place of LED:
Status - Running
F8.002 group 2 BIT0: Reserved 1 000 RW
Parameters 2
during BIT1: Reserved
operation BIT2: External count value
(without unit)
BIT3: Terminal status (without
unit)
BIT0: Actual length
BIT1: Set length

value parameter
0.0~1000.0%
Rotating speed display =
(measured frequency *60 /
p)×F8.003(PG)
Rotating speed display = (F8.010
Customer * 60 / p)×F8.003 (not PG)
Defined Defined Speed Set rotating speed display =
F8.003 0.1% 100.0% RW
Speed Scaling (final reference frequency *60 /
Scaling p)×F8.003 (PG)
Set rotating speed display =
(final reference frequency *60 /
p)×F8.003 (not PG)
Note: the actual rotating speed
is not affected
0.0~1000.0%
Output line speed display =
measure frequency × F8.004
(PG)
Output line speed display =
Customer F8.010 × F8.004 (not PG)
Defined Customer Line Set line speed display = (final
F8.004 0.1% 1.0% RW
Line Speed Speed Scaling reference frequency ×F8.004
Scaling (PG)
Set line speed display = (final
reference frequency ×F8.004
(not PG)
Note: the actual rotating speed
is not affected
Customer
Defined Defined Analog
F8.005
Analog Scaling
Scaling
0: Operation panel
1: Terminal
Reference 2: Serial port
Reference Select
F8.006 Selected 3:A1 1 RO, ND, NC, PT,VM
Indicator
Indicator 4:AI2
5: Pulse
6::ExAi1,External analogue

value parameter
reference 1
7: ExAi2,External analogue
reference 2
8:Preset,Main reference is from
preset
9:PLC,Main reference is from
PLC function
10:PID1,Main reference is from
PID1
11: Jog,Jog reference
Main
F8.007 Main Reference 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz RO,, ND, NC, PT,VM
Reference
Auxiliary
F8.008 Auxiliary reference 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz RO, ND, NC, PT,VM
reference
Final
Final Reference
F8.009 Reference 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz RO, ND, NC, PT,VM
Selected
Selected
F8.010
RO, FI,, ND, NC,
F8.010 Output Output Frequency 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz
PT,VM
Frequency
F8.011
RO, FI, ND, NC,
F8.011 Output Output Voltage -650 V~650 V 1V
PT,VM
Voltage
F8.012
RO, FI, ND, NC,
F8.012 Current Current Magnitude -999.99~999.99 A 0.01 A
PT,VM
Magnitude
F8.013
RO, FI, ND, NC,
F8.013 Percentage Percentage Torque −1000.0~1000.0% 0.1%
PT,VM
Torque
F8.014
31 31
F8.014 Actual Actual speed -2 ~2 – 1 rpm RO, FI, ND, NC, PT
speed
F8.015 SET 31 31
F8.015 Set speed -2 ~2 – 1 rpm RO, FI, ND, NC, PT
speed
31 31
F8.016 Output line Output Line Speed -2 ~2 – 1 mm/s RO, FI, ND, NC, PT

value parameter
speed
Set line 31 31
F8.017 Set line speed -2 ~2 – 1 mm/s RO, FI, ND, NC, PT
speed
Output RO, FI, ND, NC,

F8.018 Output Power −999.99~999.99 KW 0.01 KW
Power PT,VM
Reset
0: Do not reset
F8.019 Energy Reset Energy Meter 1 0 RW
1: Reset energy meter
Meter
Energy
Energy Meter:
F8.020 Meter: -999.9~999.9 MWh RO, ND, NC, PT
MWh
MWh
Energy
F8.021 Meter: Energy Meter: kWh -99.9~99.9 KWh RO, ND, NC, PT
kWh
DC Link RO, FI, ND, NC,

F8.022 D.c. Bus Voltage 0~999 V 1V
Voltage PT,VM
F8.023
F8.023 Status Status Word 0~32767 1 RO, ND, NC, PT
Word
Digital I/O Digital I/O Read

F8.024 0~16383 1 RO, ND, NC, PT
Read Word Word
Analog RO, FI, ND, NC, PT

F8.025 Analog Input 1 0.00~100.00% 0.01% 100.00%
Input 1
Analog RO, FI, ND, NC, PT

F8.026 Analog Input 2 0.00~100.00% 0.01% 100.00%
Input 2
Analog
F8.027 Analog Output 1 0.0~100.0% 0.0% RO, FI, ND, NC, PT
output 1
Analogue
F8.028 Analogue Output 2
output 2
PID1
F8.029 PID1 Reference
Reference
PID1
F8.030 PID1 Feedback
Feedback
F8.031 Motor Motor Temperature -50~300 °C 0° RO, ND, NC, PT, FI

value parameter
Temperatu
re
Total
Total power-on
F8.032 power-on 0~65535 h 0 RO, ND, NC, PT
time
time
Total fan
Total fan operation
F8.033 operation 0~65535 h 0 RO, FI, ND, NC, PT
time
time
Binary setting:
0: No display; 1: Display
Unit place of LED:
BIT0: Set frequency (Hz)
BIT1: External count value
(without unit)
BIT2: Rotating speed in running
(r/min)
BIT3: Set rotating speed (r/min)
Tens place of LED:
BIT0: Line speed in running
(m/s)
Status
BIT1: Set line speed (m/s)
Mode - Status - Stop
F8.034 BIT2: VCI (V) 1 FFH RW
Stop Parameters
BIT3: CCI (V)
Parameters
BIT0: Reserved
BIT1: Reserved
BIT2: Actual length
BIT3: Set length
Thousands place of LED:
BIT0: Terminal status (without
unit)
BIT1: Bus voltage
Note: The default display shall
be set frequency when all the
parameters are 0
Motor
Motor Protection
F8.035 thermal 0.0~100.0% 0.0 RO, ND, NC, PT
Accumulator
accumulato

value parameter
Command
Command Selected
F8.036 Selected 0~2 1 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Indicator
Indicator
PID2
F8.037 PID2 Reference -100~100% 1 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Reference
PID2
F8.038 PID2 Feedback -100~100% 0.01 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Feedback
PID1
F8.039 PID1 Output -100~100% 0.01 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Output
PID2
F8.040 PID2 Output -100~100% 0.01 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Output
Magnetisin Magnetising
F8.041 -999.99~999.99 A 0.01 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
g Current Current
Torque
Torque Producing
F8.042 Producing -999.99~999.99 A 0.01 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Current
Current
Final
Final Torque
F8.043 Torque -999.9~999.9% 0.1 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Reference
Reference
Final
Final Current
F8.044 Current -999.9~999.9% 0.1 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Reference
Reference
Final
F8.045 Current Final Current Limit -999.9~999.9% 0.1 175.0% RO, ND, NC, PT
Limit
Percentage
F8.046 Percentage Load -999.9~999.9% 0.1 n/a RO, ND, NC, PT
Load

Group F9: Enhanced Parameter
value parameter
Unit place of LED: select the

frequency reference channel
upon the ON/OFF control of the
operation panel
0: No bundling
1: Digital reference 1 (adjust
with ▲ and ▼ on the operation
panel)
with terminal UP/DN)
3: Digital reference 3 (serial
port reference)
6: Terminal pulse reference
Tens place of LED: select the
frequency reference channel
upon the control of the
Command terminal
to Command to Ref 0: No bundling
F9.000 1 000 RW
Reference Bindingbinding 1: Digital reference 1 (adjust
Binding with ▲ and ▼ on the operation
panel)
port reference)
Hundreds place of LED: select
the frequency reference
channel upon the control of the
serial port
0: No bundling
with ▲ and ▼ on the operation
panel)

value parameter

port reference)
0 (no operation): no auxiliary

frequency channel
1: Digital reference 1, adjust
with ▲ and ▼ (given by F9.03
directly)
2: Digital reference 2, adjust
with terminal UP/DN (given by
F9.03 directly)
3: Digital reference 3, serial
Auxiliary
Auxiliary Ref port reference (given by F9.03
F9.001 reference 1 0 RW,TE
Selector directly)
selector
6: Terminal pulse (PULSE)
reference
7:ExA1
8:ExA2
Note: it is disabled when
becoming the same as the main
reference channel.
Auxiliary
F9.002 digital Auxiliary Digital Ref F0.012~F0.013 0.01 0.00 Hz RW, VM
reference
0 (off): The auxiliary frequency

will be saved upon power down
The auxiliary frequency will be
Digital saved into F9.002 upon power
Auxiliary down
Digital Auxiliary Ref
F9.003 Reference 1 (on): The auxiliary frequency 1 0 RW
Save
Save will not be saved upon power
Selector down
The auxiliary frequency will not
be saved into F9.002 upon
power down

value parameter
Note: F9.003 is valid only when

F9.001=1, 2, 3.
Digital 0 (off): The auxiliary frequency

Auxiliary will be maintained after
Digital Auxiliary Ref
F9.004 Reference shutdown 1 0 RW
Stop
Stop 1 (on): The auxiliary frequency
Selector will be reset after shutdown
0 (off): positive polarity

The sum of the main frequency
and the auxiliary frequency is
Auxiliary used as the set frequency.
Auxiliary Reference
F9.005 Reference 1 (on): negative polarity 1 0 RW
Invert
Invert The difference between the
main frequency and the
auxiliary frequency is used as
the set frequency.
0: Inactive
Do not adjust the combined
frequency after combining the
main and auxiliary reference
frequency.
1: Adjust according to the
Final maximum output frequency
Reference Final Reference F0.006
F9.006 1 0 RW
adjustment adjustment Final reference frequency =
selector combined frequency + F0.006 ×
F9.007
2: Adjust according to the
current frequency
Final reference frequency =
combined frequency +
combined frequency × F9.007
Final
Reference Final Reference
F9.007 -100.0%~100.0% 0.1% 0.0% RW
adjustment Adjustment Coef.
coefficient
STOP/RESET Stop/Reset Key 0: Only valid in the operation

F9.008 1 0 RW
Key Function Select panel running command

value parameter
Function channel
Selector 1: Valid in the operation
panel/terminal/serial port
running command channel
when this button is pressed, the
inverter will stop according to
the stop mode.
2: Valid in the operation
panel/terminal/serial port
running command channel in
the operation panel running
command channel, when this
button is pressed, the inverter
will stop according to the stop
mode; in the terminal or serial
port running command
channel, press this button, and
the inverter will alarm (failure
code: Er.0006) and stop freely.
0: Lock all the keys on the

operation panel. When the
locking function becomes
effect, all the keys on the
operation panel are disabled.
1: Lock all the keys except the
STOP/RESET key. When the
Keypad lock Keypad Lock
F9.009 locking function becomes 0 0 RW
selector Selector
effect, only the STOP/RESET key
can be used.
2: Lock all the keys except the
RUN and STOP keys. When the
locking function becomes
effect, only the RUN and STOP
keys can be used.
0: The heatsink fan does not

run.
Cooling fan Cooling Fan
F9.010 1: Force the heatsink fan to run 1 2 RW
control Control
at full speed.
2: The heatsink fan runs

value parameter
automatically, which depends

on the temperature (Fn.003) of
heatsink 1.
The inverter controls the
heatsink fan and decides to run
the fan at full speed or low
speed or stop it according to
the temperature (Fn.003) of
heatsink 1.
3: The heatsink fan runs
automatically, which depends
on the temperature (Fn.003) of
heatsink 1.
The inverter controls the
heatsink fan and decides to run
the fan at full speed or low
speed according to the
temperature (Fn.003) of
heatsink 1.
4: The heatsink fan keeps
running at low speed.
Acc/Dec
Acc/Dec Rate Unit 0: (s)
F9.011 rate unit 0 0 RW, TE
Selector 1: (min)
selector
Droop
F9.012 Droop Frequency 0.00~10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Frequency
Over-Modul Over Modulation 0 (off): disabled

F9.013 1 1 RW
ation Enable Enable 1 (on): enabled
Zero-freque
Sleep / Wake
F9.014 ncy 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW, VM
Threshold
threshold
Zero-freque
Zero Frequency
F9.015 ncy 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW, VM
Hysteresis
hysteresis
0 (the function of fixed length

Length
F9.016 Length Reference shutdown is disabled) ~ 65535 1 (m) 0 (m) RW
Reference
(m)

value parameter
Actual 0.000 ~ 65535 (m) (save upon

F9.017 Actual length 1 (m) 0 (m) RO
length power down)
Ratio of
F9.018 Ratio Of Length 0.001~30.000 0.001 1.000 RW
length
Length
Length Correction
F9.019 correction 0.001~1.000 0.001 1.000 RW
Coef
coefficient
Perimeter of
F9.020 Perimeter Of Axis 1~1000 mm 1 mm 100 mm RW
axis
Number of
Number Of Pulses
F9.021 pulses per 1~9999 1 1 RW
Per Cycle
cycle
Low-voltage 0: No action
F9.022 compensati Ride Thru 1: action (low voltage 1 0 RW, TE
on Enable compensation)
Restart after
Restart After 0: No action
F9.023 power down 1 0 RW
Power Down 1: Action
selector
Delay time
for restart Delay Time For
F9.024 0.0~10.0 s 0.1 s 0.5 s RW
after power Restart
down
Note:
① Actual length (km) = {terminal count value × measured shaft perimeter (F9.020) ÷ number of pulses per revolution (F9.021)} ×
length multiples (F9.018) ÷ length correction coefficient (F9.019) ÷100÷1000.
FA: Reserved Parameter
Attribute of
Parameter Name LCD display Set range Minimum unit Default value
parameter
Option Module ID
FA.001 0~999 RO
module ID

FC: Second Motor Parameter

Select Motor Select Motor 2 0: Motor 1 parameters

FC.000 1 0 RW,TE
2 Parameters Parameters 1: Motor 2 parameters
M2 Number
M2 Number Of 2 ~ 32, 0: the number of poles can be
FC.001 of Motor 1 4 ND
Motor Poles identified automatically
Poles
M2 Motor M2 Motor
FC.002 0.01 kw 0.00 kw ND
Rated Power Rated Power
FC.003 M2
M2 Rated
FC.003 Motor Rated 0.01 A 0.00 A ND
Current
Current
M2 Motor M2 Motor 1500.0

FC.004 0~36000 rpm 0.1 rpm ND
Rated Speed Rated Speed rpm
M2 Motor M2 Motor
FC.005 Rated Power Rated Power 0.0~1 0.01 0.85 ND
Factor Factor
M2 Motor
M2 Rated 230/400
FC.006 Rated 0~480 V 1V ND
Voltage V
Voltage
M2 Motor
M2 Rated
FC.007 Rated 1.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 50.00 ND
Frequency
Frequency
M2 Motor
M2 Stator
FC.008 Stator 0.0000~99.9999 Ω 0.0001 Ω 0.0000 Ω ND
Resistance
Resistance
M2 Transient M2 Transient
FC.009 0.000~500.000 mH 0.001 mH 0.000 mH RW,RA, ND
Inductance Inductance
M2 Stator M2 Stator
FC.010 0.000~500.000 mH 0.001 mH 0.000 mH RW,RA, ND
Inductance Inductance
Motor and M2 Motor and

FC.011
Load Inertia Load Inertia
M2
M2 Saturation
FC.012 Saturation
Breakpoint 1
Breakpoint 1


M2
M2 Saturation
FC.013 Saturation
Breakpoint 3
Breakpoint 3
M2
M2 Saturation
FC.014 Saturation
Breakpoint 2
Breakpoint 2
M2
M2 Saturation
FC.015 Saturation
Breakpoint 4
Breakpoint 4
0: Operation panel
1: Terminal
M2 Main
M2 Main Ref 2: Serial port
FC.016 Reference
Selector 3: AI1 analog reference
Selector
5: Pulse
M2
M2 Maximum
Maximum
FC.017 Reference FC.018~F0.006 0.01 Hz 50.00 Hz RW,VM
Reference
Clamp
Clamp
M2 Minimum M2 Minimum
FC.018 Reference Reference 0~FC.017 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW,VM
Clamp Clamp
M2
Command M2 Command
FC.019 0~2 1 0 RW,TE
Source Source Selector
Selector
M2
M2 Command
Command to
FC.020 to Ref 000~666 1 0 RW
Reference
Bindingbinding
Binding
M2 M2
FC.021 Acceleration Acceleration 0.1~3200.00 s 0.1 s 6.0 s RW,VM
Rate 1 Rate 1
M2 M2
FC.022 Deceleration Deceleration 0.1~3200.00 s 0.1 s 6.0 s RW,VM
Rate 1 Rate 1


M2 V/F Open
M2 Open Loop
FC.023 loop control 0~7 1 0
Mode Select
mode
M2 V/F Third
M2 V/F Third
FC.024 Point 0.00~550.00 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Point Frequency
Frequency
M2 V/F Third M2 V/F Third

FC.025 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 0.0% RW
Point Voltage Point Voltage
M2 V/F
M2 V/F Second
FC.026 Second Point 0.00~550.00 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Point Frequency
Frequency
M2 V/F
M2 V/F Second
FC.027 Second Point 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 0.0% RW
Point Voltage
Voltage
M2 V/F First
M2 V/F First
FC.028 Point 0.00~550.00 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Point Frequency
Frequency
M2 V/F First M2 V/F First

FC.029 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 0.0% RW
Point Voltage Point Voltage
M2 Boost
M2 Boost End
FC.030 End 0.0~50.0% 0.1% 10.0% RW
Frequency
Frequency
M2 Low
Frequency M2 Low Freq
FC.031 0.0~30.0% 0.1% 3.0% RW, RA
Voltage Voltage Boost
Boost
M2 Gain of
Slip M2 Gain of Slip
FC.032 -150.0~150.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
Compensatio Compensation
n
M2 Slip
M2 Slip Comp
FC.033 Compensatio 0.00~10.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 10.00 Hz RW
Limit
n Limit


M2 Slip
M2 Slip Comp
FC.034 Compensatio 0~3 1 1 RW,TE
Filter
n Time Const
M2 Frequency 0.100
FC.035 M2 ASR.P1 0.000~200.000s/rad s/rad RW
Cont. P Gain s/rad
M2 Frequency
FC.036 M2 ASR.I1 0.00~655.35 s²/rad s/rad 0.10 s/rad RW,BU
Cont. I Gain
M2 Frequency 0.000011/r 0.000001

FC.037 M2 ASR.D1 0.00000~0.65535 1/rad RW,BU
Cont. D Gain ad /rad
M2 Current
FC.038 M2 ACR-P Controller Kp 0.00~4000.00 0.01 20.00 RW
Gain
M2 Current
FC.039 M2 ACR-I Controller Ki 0.000~600.000 0.001 40.000 RW
Gain
M2 Motoring M2 Motoring
FC.040 1000.0~1000.0% 0.1% 165.0% RW,RA,VM
Current Limit Current Limit
M2 M2
FC.041 Regenerating Regenerating 1000.0~1000.0% 0.1% 165.0% RW,RA,VM
M2
M2 Symmetrical
FC.042 Symmetrical 1000.0~1000.0% 0.1% 165.0% RW,RA,VM
Current Limit
Current Limit
FC.043 Reserved
Motor
M2 Low Freq
Thermal
FC.044 Therm Protect 1~3000 1s 179 s RW
Time
Mode
Constant 1
M2 Low
Frequency
Select Motor 2
FC.045 Thermal 0, 1 1 0 RW
Parameters
Protection
Mode

Group FE: Simple PLC Parameter

Unit place of LED: PLC running mode

selection
0: No action
1: Stop after single cycle
2: Hold the end value after single cycle
3: Continuous cycle
Tens place of LED: The restart mode
selection for interrupted PLC running
0: Restart from the first section
1: Continue to run from the running
Simple PLC Simple PLC
frequency of the shutdown moment
FE.000 operation Operation 1 0000 RW
2: Continue to run from the running
mode Mode
frequency of the shutdown moment
Hundreds place of LED: Storage selection
of PLC status parameter upon power
down
0: No storage
1: Storage
Thousands place of LED: Stage time unit
selection
0: s
1: min
Unit place of LED: Frequency setting

0: Select the multi-step frequency 1
(F3.023)
1: The frequency is determined by F0.000
parameter
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
Tens place of LED: Running direction
PLC Stage 1 PLC Stage 1 selection
FE.001 1 000 RW
Setting Setting 0: Run forward
1: Run reverse
2: Determined by the running command
Acceleration/deceleration time selection
0: Acceleration/deceleration time 1


PLC Time Of PLC Time Of

FE.002 0.0~6500 0.1 20.0 RW
Stage 1 Stage 1

(F3.024)
parameter
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
FE.003 1 000 RW
1: Run reverse

FE.004 0.0~6500 0.1 20.0 RW
Stage 2 Stage 2

(F3.025)
parameter
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
PLC Stage 3 PLC Stage 3
FE.005 selection 1 000 RW
Setting Setting
0: Run forward
1: Run reverse



FE.006 0.0~6500 0.1 20.0 RW
Stage 3 Stage 3

(F3.026)
parameter
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
FE.007 1 000 RW
1: Run reverse

FE.008 0.0~6500 0.1 20.0 RW
Stage 4 Stage 4

(F3.027)
parameter
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
FE.009 Tens place of LED: Running direction 1 000 RW
Setting Setting
selection
0: Run forward
1: Run reverse



FE.010 0.0~6500 0.1 20.0 RW
Stage 5 Stage 5

(F3.028)
parameter
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
FE.011 1 000 RW
1: Run reverse

FE.012 0.0~6500 0.1 20.0 RW
Stage 6 Stage 6

(F3.029)
parameter
2: Reserved
FE.013 3: Reserved 1 000 RW
Setting Setting
selection
0: Run forward
1: Run reverse




FE.014 0.0~6500 0.1 20.0 RW
Stage 7 Stage 7
FF: Communication Parameter

0: do not perform communication reset

Reset Serial
Communicatio function
FF.000 Communication RW, ND, NC
n Reset 1: perform communication reset
s
function
0:300 BPS
1:600 BPS
2:1200 BPS
3:2400 BPS
Communicatio 4:4800 BPS
Serial Baud
FF.001 n baud rate 5:9600 BPS 1 6 RW, TE
Rate
selector 6:19200 BPS
7:38400 BPS
8:57600 BPS
9:76800 BPS
10:115200 BPS
Data format:
0: 8-2 format, no parity check, standard
RTU (8 2 NP)
1: 8-1 format, no parity check, standard
RTU (8 1 NP)
Communicatio
FF.002 Serial Mode 2: 8-1 format, even check, standard RTU 1 0 RW, TE
n data format
(8 1 EP)
3: 8-1 format, odd check, standard RTU
(8 1 OP)
4: 8-2 format, no parity check,
non-standard (8 2 NP M)

FF: Communication Parameter

5: 8-1 format, no parity check,

non-standard (8 1 NP M)
6: 8-1 format, even check, non-standard
(8 1 EP M)
7: 8-1 format, odd check, non-standard
(8 1 OP M)
8: 7-1 format, even check, standard RTU
(7 1 EP)
9: 7-1 format, odd check, standard RTU
(7 1 OP)
10: 7-1 format, even check,
non-standard (7 1 EP M)
11: 7-1 format, odd check, non-standard
(7 1 OP M)
FF.003 Local address Serial Address 1~247 1 1 RW
Communicatio
Communication
FF.004 ns timeout 0.0~1000 s 0.1 0.0 s RW
s timeout time
time
Minimum
Local reply
FF.005 Comms 0~250 ms 1 5 ms RW
delay
Transmit Delay
Virtual Enable Virtual

FF.006 0, 1 1 0 RW
terminal Terminal
Comms Comms Control

FF.007 0~32767 1 1 RW,NC
Control Word Word
Communicatio
Communication
FF.008 n Main 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW, VM
Main Reference
Reference
Communicatio Communication
FF.009 n Auxiliary Auxiliary 0.00~550.00 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW, VM
Reference Reference

Group FH: Motor parameter

Number of
Number of M1 2 ~ 32, 0: the number of poles can be
FH.000 poles of 2 0 RW, ND
poles identified automatically
motor 1
Rated power 0.00 RW,RA, VM,

FH.001 M1 rated power -999.99~999.99 kW 0.01 kW
of motor 1 kW ND
Rated Depend
M1 rated RW,RA, VM,
FH.002 current of 0.00~999.99A 0.01 A ing on
current ND
motor 1 model
Rated
rotating M1 rated 1500
FH.003 0.0~33000.0 rpm 0.1 rpm RW, ND
speed of rotating speed rpm
motor 1
Rated power
M1 rated power
FH.004 factor of 0.00~1.00 0.01 0.85 RW,RA, ND
factor
motor 1
Stator
M1 stator
FH.005 resistance of 0.0000~99.9999 Ω 0.0001 0.0000 RW,RA, ND
resistance
motor 1
Transient
M1 transient
inductive 0.000
FH.006 inductive 0.000~500.000 mH 0.001 mH RW,RA, ND
reactance of mH
reactance
motor 1
Stator
M1 stator
inductive 0.00
FH.007 inductive 0.00~5000.00 mH 0.01 mH RW,RA, ND
reactance of mH
reactance
motor 1
Parameter Parameter
FH.008 Open-loop mode: 0 ~ 2 1 0 RW,NC
self-setting self-setting
FH.009 Reserved Reserved
FH.010 Reserved Reserved 0

Group FL: Relevant Protection Parameter
value parameter
Low
Low Frequency
Frequency
Thermal
FL.000 Thermal 0, 1 1 0 RW
Protection
Protection
Mode
Mode
Motor
Motor Thermal
Thermal
FL.01 Time Constant 1~3000 s 1s 179s RW
Time
1
Constant
Over-Voltage 0: Disabled (when mounting the braking

OV Protection
FL.002 Protection At resistor) 1 1 RW
At Stall
Stall 1: Enabled
Over-Voltage
Standard Ramp
FL.003 Protection 120.0~150.0% Udce 0.1% 140.0% RW,RA, VM
Voltage
Point at Stall
Overload
Overload Pre- 0: Relative rated current of the motor
FL.004 Pre-alarm 1 0 RW,TE
Alarm Selector 1: Relative rated current of the inverter
Selector
Overload
Overload Pre-
Pre-alarm
FL.005 Alarm 20~150% 0.1% 130.0% RW
Detection
Threshold
Threshold
Overload
Overload
Pre-alarm
FL.006 Pre-alarm 0.0~60.0 s 0.1 s 5.0 s RW
Detection
Detection Time
Time
Motoring Motoring
FL.007 -1000.0~1000.0% 0.1% 165.0% RW,RA, VM
FL.008
Regeneratin
Regenerating
FL.008 g Current -1000.0~1000.0% 0.1% 165.0% RW,RA, VM
Current Limit
Limit of
motor 1
Symmetrical Symmetrical
FL.009 -1000.0~1000.0% 0.1% 165.0% RW,RA, VM
FL.010 Number of Number Of 0 ~ 6: 0 indicates no auto reset function 1 0 RW, TE

value parameter
Auto-reset Auto-reset and 6 indicate no limitation for auto

Attempts Attempts reset times.
1. When the inverter issues failure
alarm, the auto reset function is invalid
for the failure with the priority of 1, 2
and 3.The minimum interval between
some failure reset is 10 site count of
auto reset times can be increased only
when the failures issued in succession
are the same; otherwise the count will
be 0. The count of auto reset times will
be cleared if no failure alarm is reported
within 5 min. reset the failure manually
and the count of auto reset times is 0.
2. If the inverter is in running status
upon the occurrence of failure, it will
automatically run at the rotating speed
tracing the starting speed.
Auto-reset Auto-reset
FL.011 0.0~600.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s RW
Delay Delay
0~3
Bit 0: setting
Force the motor to shut down before
reporting the following failures.
Action on Failure code: 6, 26, 27, 32, 34, 35, 38,
Non-Importa 96, 112 to 167, 173, 189 and 190.
Action on Low
FL.012 nt Fault Bit 1: setting 1 0 RW
Fault Detection
Detection The following failures will trig an alarm
for 4 s and then the inverter continues
to keep running. If the conditions for
trigging the alarm always exist, the
alarm will continue.
Failure code: 91, 174, 175, 177 -188
When the serial communication signal

Communicati
disappears, and its retention time
on Failure Communication
FL.013 exceeds the set value of FF.004, the 1 2 RW
Protection Loss Protection
inverter will perform the corresponding
Selector
actions shown in the table below.

value parameter
0: Do not alarm and continue to run

1: Alarm for the abnormal
communication and continue to run
2: The watchdog fails and stops freely
(Er.030)
3: The inverter stops according to the
stop mode and reports the watchdog
failure (Er.030)
Attribute
Default
Parameter Name LCD display Set range Minimum unit of
Set value
parameter
0: No action
The inverter will report the failure
regardless of whether the auto reset
function acts or not when it fails.
Auto-reset
Auto-reset 1: Action
Fault
FL.014 Hold Drive During auto reset period, the failure 1 0 RW
Indication
Healthy status of the inverter will not be
Selector
indicated via status word (F8.023) and
digital output terminal (DO/TC) but will
be displayed on the panel. This function
will be disabled in case of undervoltage.
0: Protection for both the input and

Phase Failure output phase lose
Protection Phase Failure 1: No action for input phase lose
FL.015 1 0 RW
Selector Protection 2: No action for output phase lose
3: Disabled for neither the input nor
output phase loss
RO, TE, ND,

FL.016 Trip 1 Trip 2 0~255 1 0
NC, PT
Trip 2 Sub-trip RO, ND,

FL.017 Sub Trip 1 0~255 1 0
Number NC, PT
RO, TE, ND,

FL.018 Trip 2 Trip 1 0~255 1 0
NC, PT

Attribute
Default
Set value
parameter
Trip 1 Sub-trip * RO, ND,

FL.019 Sub Trip 2 0~255 1 0
Number NC, PT
Trip 3 (Last RO, TE, ND,

FL.020 Trip 0 0~255 1 0
trip) NC, PT
Sub Trip 3 Trip 0 Sub-trip RO, ND,

FL.021 0~255 1 0
(Last trip) Number NC, PT
FL.022 DC Bus
DC Bus Voltage RO, ND,
FL.022 Voltage On 0~999 V 1V 0V
On Trip 0 NC, PT, VM
Last Trip
Output
Output Current RO, ND,
FL.023 Current On 0.00~999.99 A 0.01 A 0.00 A
On Trip 0 NC, PT
Last Trip
Output Output
RO, ND,
FL.024 Frequency On Frequency On 0.00~550 .00Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz
NC, PT, VM
Last Trip Trip 0
Drive State
Drive State RO, ND,
FL.025 Word On Last 0000~FFFF 0000
Word On Trip 0 NC, PT
Trip
Braking
Braking
Resistor
FL.026 Resistor Rated 0.0~99999.9 kW 0.1 0.0 kw RW,RA
Rated Power
Power
Braking Braking
Resistor Resistor
FL.027 0.00~1500.00 s 0.00 0.00 s RW
Thermal Time Thermal Time
Constant Constant
Braking
Braking
Resistor
FL.028 Resistor 0.00~9999.99 Ω 0.01 .00 Ω RW,RA
Resistance
Resistance
Keypad 0: the protection does not act and

Reference continues to run
Keypad Ref
FL.030 Failure 1: Alarm Operation Panel Mode and 1 2 RW
Loss Protection
Protection continue to run
Selector 2: Issue Operation Panel Mode failure

Attribute
Default
Set value
parameter
and stop freely

3: The inverter stops according to the
stop mode and reports Operation Panel
Mode failure
0: The protection does not act and

continues to run
1: Loss of Input 1 or Loss of Input 2 alarm
Current is reported and the inverter continues to
Reference run
Current Ref
FL.031 Lost 2: Loss of Input 1 or Loss of Input 2 1 0 RW
Loss Protection
Protection failure is reported and the inverter stops
Selector freely
3: Loss of Input 1 or Loss of Input 2
failure is reported and the inverter stops
according to the stop mode
0: The alarm is activated

When load loss is detected, the load loss
Enable Trip Enable Trip On alarm is activated
FL.032 1 0 RW
On Low Load Low Load 1: The failure is activated
When load loss is detected, the load loss
failure is activated
Low Load
Low Load
Detection
FL.033 Detect Hz 0.00~550.00Hz 0.01 Hz 0.00 Hz RW
Frequency
Threshold
Threshold
Low Load
Low Load
FL.034 Detection 0.00~100.00 % 0.01% 0.00% RW
Detection Level
Level
0: To run at the current set frequency

1: To run at the main digital reference
(F0.003)
Upon Fault Upon Fault
2: To run at upper limit frequency
FL.035 Frequency Frequency 1 0 RW
(F0.012)
Selector Select
3: To run at lower limit frequency
(F0.013)
4: To run at standby frequency setting

Attribute
Default
Set value
parameter
(FL.036) for abnormal situations
Standby
Standby Freq
FL.036 Frequency for 0.0~100.0% 0.1% 100.0% RW
On Fault
Abnormality
0: DIN44081
Motor 1: KTY84
Thermistor
FL.037 Thermistor 2: PT1000 1 0 RW
Type
Type 3: PT2000
4 Others
Feedback of
Thermistor RO,FI,ND,N
FL.038 motor 0~4000 Ω 1Ω 0Ω
Feedback C,PT
thermistor
FL.039 Reserved Reserved ND
FL.040 Motor
Thermistor Trip
FL.040 Thermal Trip 0~4000 Ω 3300 Ω RW
Threshold
Threshold
FL.041 Motor
Thermistor
Thermal
FL.041 Reset 0~4000 Ω 1800 Ω RW
Reset
Threshold
Threshold
FL.042 Over
Over Frequency
FL.042 Frequency 0.00~F0.012 0.01Hz 0.00Hz RW, VM
Threshold
Threshold
Group Fn: Inverter Parameter
value parameter
Preset 0 ~ maximum time 65535 hours 1k hours

Time Between
Fn.000 operating 0 RW
Filter Changes
time
Total 0 ~ maximum time 65535 hours 1k hours

Time Before
Fn.001 operating 0 RO, ND
Filter Change
time

Group Fn: Inverter Parameter
value parameter
Reset Filter Change 0, 1

Fn.002 operating Required / RW, ND, NC
time Done
Heat sink 1 Stack 0.0~100.0 oC 0.1 RO, ND, NC,

Fn.003 0 oC
temperature Temperature PT
Heat sink 2 Auxiliary 0.0~100.0 oC 0.1 RO, ND, NC,

Fn.004 0 oC
temperature Temperature PT
User 00.00.00.00~99.99.99.99
Software RO, ND, NC,
Fn.005 Firmware
Version PT
Version
Power Power 00.00.00.00~99.99.99.99

RO, ND, NC,
Fn.006 Firmware Software
PT
Version Version
Group FP: Parameter Protection
Paramete Minimum Default Attribute of

Name LCD display Set range
r unit value parameter
0~9999
User security User Security RW, ND,
FP.000 0: The user password is not applied 0 0
code Code NC, PT
Non-zero: The user password is applied
0: All the parameters can be changed;

1: All the parameters excluding the set
frequency (F0.003) cannot be changed;
2: The operation panel remains in the status
mode and the parameters of the remaining
Parameter User Security RW, TE, ND,
FP.001 parameters cannot be changed; 1 1
protection Status PT
3: The operation panel remains in the status
mode and the parameters of the remaining
parameters cannot be changed; the inverter
parameters cannot be changed via serial port,
PROFIBUS interface or other option modules.
0:No action
Parameter Parameter 1:Clear trips
FP.002 1 0 RW, TE, NC
Initiate Initiate Clear fault records (FL.16 to FL.21)
2:Default


The parameters are reset to default values.

The motor must not be running
3:Save All
All user save parameters are saved
4: Default All
The parameters are reset to default values
including motor parameters. The motor must
not be running.
 Note:
1. If this parameter is set as 1 or 2, the
function corresponding to the set value can be
enabled by pressing the Reset button.
2. This parameter will revert to 0 after the
memory information is cleared or the default
parameters are restored.
0: No action
Do not perform any operation.
1: Downloading all the parameters
All the parameters in the smart card will be
downloaded to the inverter after FP.003 is set
to 1 and the inverter is reset. FP.003 will
change to 0 automatically after the parameters
Parameter Parameter are downloaded.
FP.003 1 00 RW, TE, NC
download download 2: Downloading the parameters excluding
motor parameters
All the parameters excluding motor
parameters in the smart card will be
downloaded to the inverter after FP.003 is set
to 2 and the inverter is reset. FP.003 will
change to 0 automatically after the
parameters are downloaded.
0: No action
Do not perform any operation.
1: Uploading all the parameters
Parameter Parameter All parameters in the inverter will be uploaded RW, ND,
FP.004 1 0
upload upload to the smart card and the original parameters NC,
in it will be covered after FP.004 is set to 1 and
the inverter is reset. FP.004 will change to 0
automatically after the parameters are


uploaded.
Parameter
FP.005 Drive action 0~65535 1 0 BU, RW, NC
with set value
Table.A1.1 Parameter Table

Appendix 2 Recommended Parameters of Parts 153
Appendix 2 Recommended Parameters of Parts

AC input reactor
Inverter Model Reactor Input Inductive Continuous Peak Weight Outline Dimensions
Order No. Phase Reactance Current A current Kg (mm)
mh A L D H
MEV2000-40004 ~ 4402-0227 3 2.0 7.9 15.8 3.5 150 90 150
MEV2000-40015
MEV2000-40022 ~ 4402-0228 3 1.0 15.4 47.4 3.8 150 90 150
MEV2000-40055
MEV2000-40075 ~ 4402-0232 3 0.6 27.4 54.8 6 180 100 190
MEV2000-40110
MEV2000-40150 ~ 4400-0240 3 0.45 46 92 11 190 150 225
MEV2000-40185
MEV2000-40220 ~ 4400-0241 3 0.3 74 148 15 250 150 275
MEV2000-40300
Table.A2.1 Parameter Table of AC Input Reactor
ground terminal
Fig.A2.1 Dimension Drawing of AC Input Reactor

154 Appendix 2 Recommended Parameters of Parts
Order No. Installation Dimensions

A B C D E Installation
Aperture
4402-0227 150mm 150mm 120mm 47mm 90mm 17mm×7mm
4402-0228
Table.A2.2 Installation Dimension Table of AC Input Reactor
External EMC filter

Outline dimensions
Fig.A2.2 Outline Dimensions of EMC Filter
Order A B C D E H W V X Y Z CS
No.
Table.A2.3 Dimension Table of EMC Filter

Appendix 3 Serial Communication Protocol 155
Appendix 3 Serial Communication Protocol

Networking mode
The主机为
master is The主机为
master is The主机为
master is
PC 或
or PLC PC
RS232 RS232
RS232-RS485 RS232-RS485
conversion
转换模块 conversion
转换模块
module module
MEV1000 MEV2000 MEV3000 MEV3000
Single master and

单主机多从机 Single master and
multiple 单主机多从机
multiple
Fig.A3.1 Schematic diagram for the networking mode of the inverter
Interface mode
RS485 interface: asynchronous and half-duplex. Default: 1-8-N-2, 9600bps, RTU. Refer to Group FF parameter for the parameter
settings.
Communication mode
1. The communication protocol of the inverter is Modbus protocol, which does not only support common register reading/writing,
but also expands some commands to manage the inverter parameters.
2. The inverter is slave, adopting master/salve mode P2P communication. The inverter will not respond to the command sent by
the master via broadcast address.
3. In multiple-unit communication or long-distance communication, parallel connecting the resistor of 100 to 120 ohms with the
positive end and negative end of the communication signal line of the master station can enhance its immunity to interference.
4. MEV series products provide RS485 interface only. If the communication interface of the external equipment is RS232, the
RS232/RS485 conversion equipment is needed.
Modbus RTU specifications
This section includes the application of MODBUS RTU protocol provided by EmersonCT products and the portable software to
realize this protocol.
MODBUS RTU is a master-slave system with half-duplex information exchange. MEV implements the read/write registers which
support core parameter. In addition, MEV defines 32-bit expansion for standard 16-bit data format.
MODBUS RTU
Property Description
Multi-point operation for

RS485 two-wire
normal physical layer
It carries standard UART asynchronous symbols of nonreturn to zero

Bit stream
code (NRZ).
Each symbol includes:

1 start bit
Symbol
8 data bits (the least-significant bit will be first transferred)
2 stop bits
Baud rate 300, 600, 1200,2400,4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Table.A3.1 Physical Layer

156 Appendix 3 Serial Communication Protocol
RTU framing
The frames have the following basic formats.
Slaver Function
功能码信息数据
Information data 16位CRC 停顿间隔
从机地址 16-bit CRC Pause interval
address code
信息数据 data
Information
Fig.A3.2 Frame Format
The frame ends at the shortest communication pause time for time of 3.5 bytes (e.g. for baud rate of 19200, the shortest
communication pause time is 2 milliseconds).Each node uses the last communication pause time to explore frame trail and begins
frame processing. Thus all frames must transfer in the form of continuous code stream at intervals shorter than communication
pause time. If error interval occurs, the receiving node will begin frame processing earlier, which will result in CRC failure and the
frame will be discarded.
MODBUS RTU is a master-slave system, so all the requests of the master except broadcast command will give rise to slave response,
and then the slave will respond in given longest slave response time (e.g. it begins to send response).The system has also defined
the shortest slave response time which is no less than the shortest communication pause time for the definition of 3.5 bytes. If the
master sends broadcast out, it will dispatch a new request once the longest slave response time is overtime. The master must
conduct operation processing transmission errors during information timeout which is the longest slave response time plus
transmission time.
Min. dead time Min. dead time
Frame Frame
Master request processing Slaver response Master request
detection of slaver
Response time of Master's new request

slaver starts here
time
Fig.A3.3 Schematic Diagram of Master-Slave Communication Time
Slave address
The start bytes of frames are the slave node addresses, of which the effective slave node address is decimal 1-247.The byte in the
master request represents target slave node, and that in the slave response is response address sent by the slave.
Global addressing
Zero address performs addressing all the slave nodes on the network, while the slave nodes restrain the response information to
broadcast request.
MODBUS register
MODBUS register’s address range is 16 bits (65536 register), represented with protocol index of 0-65535.
MEV inverter parameter matching
The inverter applies Modbus RTU and serves as a slave all the time.
MEV inverter defines the data formats of the following serial interfaces. Two addressing modes are supported, that is, standard and
nonstandard register modes. RTU register values are determined by the corresponding equivalent values (ne) to parameter group
and parameter numbers (pn).Nonstandard mode can support allowable parameter numbers to 255 addressed. If the corresponding
value to any parameter group is greater than 63 and the parameter it contains is more than 99, the parameters cannot be
addressed by Modbus RTU.

The Corresponding Equivalent Values to Parameter Groups

Parameter group Corresponding equivalent values
(ne)
F0 0
F1 1
⁞ ⁞
F8 8
F9 9
F[a,A] 10
F[b,B] 11
⁞ ⁞
F[y,Y] 34
F[z,Z] 35
Table.A3.2 Equivalent Values to Communication Parameter Groups
Addressing mode Modbus RTU register address
(ne x 100) + pn
Standard
Wherein, ne ≤ 162 and pn ≤ 99
(ne x 256) + pn – 1
Nonstandard
Wherein, ne ≤ 63 and pn ≤ 255
Table.A3.3 Communication Addressing Mode
Data type
MODBUS protocol specification defines the register as 16-bit integer with symbols.
Please refer to the following extended data types for details of 32-bit register data.
Data consistency
All MEV devices support the data consistency of a minimum parameter (16-bit or 32-bit data). Some devices support complete
consistency processed by multiple registers.
Data coding
MODBUS RTU adopts 'big-endian' notation to represent address and data item (excluding CRC belonging to “little-enian”), which
means the most significant bytes will be sent first during multiple bytes transmission. For example:
16-bit 0x1234 is 0x12 0x34.
32-bit 0x12345678L is 0x12 0x34 0x56 0x78
Parameter
th
Parameter determines the content and form of information data and the 7 bit of parameter in slave response represents an
abnormal situation.
Code Description
3 Multiple 16-bit registers are read
6 A single register is written
16 16-bit registers are written
23 Multiple 16-bit registers are read and written
Table.A3.4 Parameter Operations Supported by Inverter Modbus Protocol

FC03 reads many times

Consecutive series of inverters are read. The slave station specifies the upper limit of registers’ number that can be read. If the
number limit is surpassed, the slave station will trigger abnormal code 2.
Byte Description
The slave node address is 1-247 and 0 is the global
0
parameter.
1 Parameter 0x3
2 Register address MSB
3 Register address LSB
4 Number of 16-bit register MSB
5 Number of 16-bit register LSB
6 CRC LSB
7 CRC MSB
Table.A3.5 Master Request
Byte Description
0 Slave node address
1 Parameter 0x03
2 The length of register data in read block (Unit: byte)
3 Register data 0 MSB
4 Register data 0 LSB
3 + byte CRC LSB
number
4 + byte CRC MSB
number
Table.A3.6 Slave Response
FC6 writes a single register

A single 16-bit register is written. The normal response is the request echo returned after register content is written. The register
address can corresponds to 32-bit parameter but send only 16-bit data.
Byte Description
0 The slave node address is 1-247 and 0 is the global
parameter.
1 Parameter 0x06
4 Register data MSB
5 Register data LSB
6 CRC LSB
7 CRC MSB

Byte Description
1 Parameter 0x06
4 Register data MSB
5 Register data LSB
6 CRC LSB
7 CRC MSB
FC16 writes many times

Consecutive series of inverters are written. The slave specifies the upper limit of registers’ number that can be written. If the
number limit is surpassed, the slave will discard the request and the master’s timeout will happen.
Byte Description
The slave node address is from 1 to 247 and 0 is
0
the global parameter.
1 Parameter 0x10
2 Start register address MSB
3 Start register address LSB
4 Number of 16-bit register MSB
5 Number of 16-bit register LSB
The length of register data to be written (Unit:
6
byte)
7 + byte number CRC LSB
8 + byte number CRC MSB
Byte Description
1 Parameter 0x10
2 Start register address MSB
3 Start register address LSB
4 Number of 16-bit written register MSB
5 Number of 16-bit written register LSB
6 CRC LSB
7 CRC MSB
FC23 reads/write many times

Two consecutive series of inverters are read and written. The slave specifies the upper limit of registers’ number that can be
written.

If the number limit is surpassed, the slave will discard the request and the master’s timeout will happen.
Byte Description
The slave node address is from 1 to 247 and 0 is the
0
global parameter.
1 Parameter 0x17
2 Read start register address MSB
3 Read start register address LSB
4 Number of 16-bit registers to be read MSB
5 Number of 16-bit registers to be read LSB
6 Written start register address MSB
7 Written start register address LSB
8 Number of 16-bit registers to be written MSB
9 Number of 16-bit registers to be written LSB
10 The length of register data to be written (Unit: byte)
11 + byte
CRC LSB
number
12 + byte
CRC MSB
number
Byte Description
1 Parameter 0x17
2 The length of register data in read block (Unit: byte)
3 + byte CRC LSB
number
4 + byte CRC MSB
number
Expansion data type

A standard MODBUS register is a 16 bit register and standard mapping is that a signal # ne.pn parameter maps to a single MODBUS
register. MODBUS multi-time reading and writing service can be used to transfer consecutive series of 16-bit registers so as to
support 32 bit data type (integer and floating point number).
The slave device often contains mixed setting of 16-bit and 32-bit registers. To allow the master to select 16-bit or 32-bit access
needed, the first two bits of register address can be used to display data type selected.
Note
This selection shall be applied to access to the entire block.

Bit 15 Bit 14
Bits
Type selection Parameter address

ne *100+pn
Fig.A3.4 Expansion Data Type and Format
For 2-bit type field, select data type based on Table.A3.13.
Type field
Select data type Description
Bits 15-14
00 INT16 Backward compatibility
01 INT32
IEEE794 standard
10 Float32
All slaves are not supported
11 Reserved
Table.A3.13 2-bit Type Field
If 32-bit data type is selected, the slave shall adopt consecutive 16-bit MODBUS register (represented in big endian), and the master
must be set with correct “16-bit register number”.
For example, from node 8, FC03 is used to read F0.006 as 32-bit parameter.
Byte Value Description

0 0x08 Target node address of slave
1 0x03 FC03 reads many times
2 0x40 Start register address # F0.006
3 0x06 (0x4000 + 6) = 16390 = 0x4006
4 0x00 Number of 16-bit registers to be read
5 0x02 # F0.006 is 1x32-bit register = 2x16-bit register
6 CRC LSB
7 CRC MSB
Byte Value Description

0 0x08 Target node address of slave
1 0x03 FC03 reads many times
2 0x04 Data length (byte) = 1x32-bit register = 4 bytes
3-6 # F0.006 data
7 CRC LSB
8 CRC MSB
How to read when the actual data type differs from the selected type
If a 32-bit parameter is read as a 16-bit one, the slave will send the least significant data bit of this parameter.
If a 16-bit parameter is read as a 32-bit one, the slave will expand the least significant bit since the number of 16-bit registers must

be even during 32-bit reading.

For example, #F2.015 is 32-bit parameter and its value is 0x000F423F;
# F2.006 16-bit parameter, and the value 0x01F4; #F2.007 16-bit parameter, and the value 0x0190.
Start Register
Read 16-bit Register No. Response Description
Address
If 32-bit register is read

as standard 16-bit, it
#F2.015 215 1 0x423F will return to little
16-bit word of
truncated data
#F2.015 16599 2 0x000F423F Full 32-bit reading
For 32-bit reading, the

Abnormal
#F2.015 16599 1 byte number must be
situation 2
even

# F2.006 206 1 0x01F4
will return to little
16-bit word

as 32-bit, it will return
# F2.006 16590 2 0x000001F4
to 32-bit expansion data
with symbols

as 32-bit, it will return
# F2.007 16591 2 0x00000190
to 32-bit expansion data
with symbols

#F2.006- 0x01F4
200 2 will return to little
#F2.007 0x0190
16-bit word of
truncated data
#F2.006- 0x000001F4
16590 4 Full 32-bit reading
#F2.007 0x00000190
Table.A3.16 How to Read When the Actual Data Type Differs From the Selected Type
How to write when the actual data type differs from the selected type
If the 32-bit value falls into the normal range of 16-bit parameter, the slave will write 32-bit value into 16-bit parameter;
Similarly, the slave will write 16-bit value into 32-bit parameter. At that time, the slave will give the expansion value marks. The
range of 16-bit values shall be between -32767 and +32767.

Start 16-bit
Write register register Data Description
address No.
Standard 16-bit value is
written into 32-bit
# F2.015 215 1 0x1234
register. The written
value = 0x00001234
The written value =
# F2.015 16599 2 0x00001234
0x00001234
The written value =
# F2.006 206 1 0x0123
0x0123
The written value =
# F2.006 16590 2 0x00000123
0x00000123
Table.A3.17 How to Write When the Actual Data Type Differs From the Selected Type
Abnormal situation
If errors are found in the detection of the master request, the slave responds abnormally; if the information is damaged, the frame
is not received or CRC fails, the slave will not report abnormally. At the moment, the master’s timeout will happen. If the request for
writing many times (FC16 or FC23) exceeds the maximum buffer size of the slave, the slave will discard information. Then, it will not
send abnormal report and the master’s timeout will happen.
Abnormal information format
The abnormal information of the slave includes the following formats. See Table.A3.18.
Byte Description
0 Slave source node address
th
1 The 7 bit in original parameter is set
2 Abnormal code
3 CRC LSB
4 CRC MSB
Table.A3.18 Formats of Abnormal Information of Slave
Abnormal code:
Abnormal code in Table.A3.19 is supported.
Code Description
1 The parameter is not supported
The register address is beyond limit or the register number
2
in the request to be read is too large
Table.A3.19 Abnormal Code
The parameter is beyond the range during block writing FC16

The slave will process write block based on the order of data received. If the writing operation fails because parameter values are
beyond limits, the write block will be suspended, the slave will not send abnormal response. Or rather, this trip situation will be sent
to the master in the form of figures of successfully written field.
The parameter is beyond the range during block writing/reading FC23

There is no reminder regarding values beyond limits during access to FC23.

CRC
CRC is 16-bit cyclic redundancy check. Standard CRC-16 polynomial x16 + x15 + x2 + 1 shall be adopted. LSB will be first transferred
after the 16-bit CRC is attached to information. CRC shall be calculated on all bytes in the frame.


MEV2000 en

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

MEV2000 en

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

MEV2000 Series General Purpose

AC Variable Speed Drive

Document Version V1.0

Control Techniques Ltd.

Customer service hotline: 400-887-9230

Precautions for unpacking inspection

Fig.A.3 Schematic Diagram for the Positions of the Nameplate

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Chapter I Safety information

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

The mechanical devices that need lubrication, including the

MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Chapter II Product Introduction

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Item Item Description

2.2 Product series introduction

2.2.1 Rated value of inverter

MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

2.2.2 Inverter control mode

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

2.2.3 Name of each part of the inverter

Fig.2.1 Feature of the drive (Size 2~4)

MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Fig.2.2 Feature of the drive (Size 5 - 6)

2.3 Optional parts

2.3.1 Component of optional parts

Fig.2.3 Options Supported by MEV2000

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

SN Name Functional descriptions

2.3.2 Option card type

Providing more I/O

Table.2.4 Option Card Description

2.4 Inverter accessories

Name Size 1-4 Size 5 Size 6 Size 7

MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Chapter III Installation and Wiring

Fig.3.1 Installation Spacing

Size Space (A)

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

3.2 Removal and installation of inverter components

3.2.1 Removal of terminal cover

Fig.3.2 Schematic Diagram for the Removal of Size 2~4 Cover

Fig.3.3 Schematic Diagram for the Removal of Size 5 - 8 Covers

3.2.2 Removal of finger-type panel and DC terminal cover

MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Fig.3.4 Removal of Finger-type Panel and Terminal Cover

3.2.3 Installation and removal of option card

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Fig.3.5 Schematic Diagram of the Installation of the Option Card

Fig.3.6 Schematic Diagram of the Removal of the Option Card

3.2.4 Installation and removal of external RS485 adapter

Fig.3.7 Schematic Diagram of the Installation of the External RS485 Adapter

MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Fig.3.8 Schematic Diagram of the Removal of the External RS485 Adapter

3.3 Installation methods of inverter

3.3.1 Wall-mounted installation

Fig.3.9 Outline of MEV2000 Inverter

MEV2000 Series General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

M1 M2 H W D Aperture A B Gross Weight

3.3.2 Wall penetration installation

Fig.3.10 Dimensions for Wall Penetration Installation of Size 5

MEV2000 General Purpose AC Variable Speed Drive User Manual

Fig.3.11 Dimensions for Wall Penetration Installation of Size 6